JP5739377B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention is, that the first variable display means gaming media or second start region derives displays the variable display was carried out display results of identification information based on the first start-up region game media passes has passed The present invention relates to a gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived and displayed on second variable display means for variably displaying identification information based on the display information and deriving and displaying the display result.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “variation”) is provided on the game board, and the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device becomes the specific display result. Some are configured to be controllable to a specific gaming state advantageous to the user.

  The specific game state means a state advantageous for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the specific game state is, for example, a state in which a special variable winning device is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball (a big hit game state), or a state in which a right to be advantageous for a player has occurred. In this state, a predetermined game value such as a state where conditions for paying out premium game media are easily established is given.

  In such a gaming machine, the fact that the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as identification information is a combination of specific display modes (specific display result) determined in advance is generally referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the V zone provided in the big prize opening) is not established at the time when the big prize opening is closed, the big hit gaming state is ended. Some are also available.

JP 2006-346201 A (paragraphs 0038-0044, FIG. 11)

  It is an object of the present invention to improve game playability using an operation means.

Gaming machine according to the invention, the first variable display means gaming media or second start region, for variably displaying a performed result displayed derivation displaying identification information based on the first start-up region game medium passes is It is a gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the second variable display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the passing and deriving and displaying the display result. Numerical data is extracted when the game medium passes through the operating means that can be operated by the player, the variable winning device that can be changed to the open state in the specific gaming state, and the first starting area or the second starting area. For the variable display of the extraction means and the identification information that has not yet started even though the game medium has passed through the first starting area, the numerical data extracted by the extraction means is limited to a predetermined upper limit number. The first hold storage means for storing as hold storage and the numerical data extracted by the extraction means for a variable display of identification information that has not yet started even though the game medium has passed through the second starting area Second holding storage means for storing the number as a holding storage limit, a predetermining means for determining whether or not to enter a specific gaming state before the display result of the variable display of identification information is derived and displayed, and a predetermining means Based on the determination result, whether or not to execute variable display execution means for performing control to execute variable display of identification information in the first variable display means or the second variable display means, and whether to perform an operation effect accompanied by operation by the operation means The operation effect determining means for determining the operation effect, the operation effect executing means for executing the operation effect based on the determination result by the operation effect determining means, and the initialization process when a predetermined condition is satisfied Feasible and initialization means for performing an initialization notification means for performing an initialization notification indicating that the initialization processing is performed by the initialization means, a plurality of types of error notification indicating the occurrence of an error relating to a game machine Yes, as the error notification, provided with abnormality notification means for performing abnormality notification based on the determination that the game medium has entered the variable winning device in a gaming state other than the specific gaming state, the operation effect determining means, Whether or not the operation effect is executed at different determination ratios when the variable display of the identification information on the first variable display means is executed and when the variable display of the identification information on the second variable display means is executed. determined, the initialization notification means, in preference to abnormality notification performs initialization notification, abnormality notification means, Ri executable der abnormality notification after the execution of the initialization notification is completed, the plurality of types When performing error notification, the plurality of types of error notification can be displayed simultaneously .

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, it is possible to improve the playability using the operating means.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko machine of the state which removed the glass door frame from the front. It is a front view which shows the front surface of a glass door frame. It is the top view which expanded the hitting ball supply tray. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a player's hand, a ball-lending switch, and a return switch during operation of an operation part. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the truck as a movable member. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the beam as a movable member. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of an operation part. It is a figure for demonstrating the aspect of the press operation part of an operation part, and a display member. It is a figure for demonstrating the aspect in the state which the press operation part light-emitted. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the various detectors and lamps in an operation part, and the structure of an operation part. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for showing the various states of an operation part. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate and an effect control board. FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control board, a relay board, a board side IC board, and a frame side IC board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each input IC. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the format of the serial data output from the microcomputer for production control. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of the input timing of the serial data and clock signal to serial-parallel conversion IC, and the output timing of parallel data. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of each input IC. It is a timing chart which shows each detection signal of the 1st rotation detector and the 2nd rotation detector at the time of rotation operation of a rotation operation part. It is a figure which shows the rotation determination table used in order for a production control microcomputer to determine a rotation direction and rotation amount based on each detection signal of a 1st rotation detector and a 2nd rotation detector in a table format. It is a display screen diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device when the effect mode can be selected. It is a display screen figure which shows the image displayed on a production | presentation display apparatus when it is decided to set it as the specific kind of reach called a chance reach. It is a display screen figure which shows the image displayed on a production | presentation display apparatus when it is decided to set it as the specific kind of reach called a chance reach. It is a display screen figure which shows the image displayed on a production | presentation display apparatus when it is decided to set it as the predetermined kind of reach called character selection reach. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a big hit determination value. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the format of the presentation control command transmitted as a serial data system. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transmission timing of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows operation detection processing. It is a flowchart which shows rotation operation determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows production mode selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of the process in decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of the process in decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the aspect of the various error alerting | reporting performed in alerting | reporting control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an operation part failure determination process. It is a flowchart which shows alerting | reporting control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a notification start process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification start process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the process table for error alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the lamp control signal output as a serial data system in alerting | reporting control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the lamp control signal output as a serial data system in alerting | reporting control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the motor control signal output as a serial data system in a game production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a structure of the process table for operation instructions, and the example of the lamp control signal output as a serial data format in an effect mode selection process and an operation time effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a serial setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows one structural example of the data storage area | region where the lamp control signal and motor control signal of an output object are set. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a serial input / output process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the situation of the display effect in an effect display apparatus, the sound effect by a speaker, and the display effect by each lamp | ramp. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the effect process at the time of operation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other display mode of a determination operation instruction | indication display and a rotation operation instruction | indication display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the lamp control signal output as a serial data format in effect mode selection process and operation time effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other display aspect of a determination operation instruction | indication display and a rotation operation instruction | indication display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the address provided to each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other display aspect of a determination operation instruction | indication display and a rotation operation instruction | indication display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the further another example of the address provided to each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the further another example of the lamp control signal output as a serial data format in an effect mode selection process and an operation time effect process. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of the mechanism part of a game machine. It is sectional drawing which shows the longitudinal cross-section of a game machine. It is a front view for demonstrating a transparent game area | region and a movable member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example by which the display effect and movable member in an image display apparatus cooperate, and one effect is implement | achieved. It is a front view for demonstrating another kind of movable member. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a drawing processor. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a big hit determination value. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the multiple types of decoration symbol variably displayed in an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display method of a symbol reservation memory | storage display part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows pending storage processing. FIG. 38E illustrates an effect control command signal line. It is a timing diagram showing the relationship between an 8-bit control signal and an INT signal constituting a control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a 2nd special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display state of the image display apparatus 9 when the reach effect by super reach A is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display state of the image display apparatus 9 when the reach effect by super reach A is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display state of the image display apparatus 9 when the reach production by super reach B is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the production | presentation aspect of reach production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating transfer of image data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the command regarding data transfer. It is explanatory drawing which shows the instruction | command regarding extending | stretching moving image data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data bus in the CG bus between the drawing control part and CGROM in a drawing processor. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image data of the design symbol memorize | stored in CGROM. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data structure of moving image data among the image data of the components image memorize | stored in CGROM. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decoding method of the moving image data (compressed data) by which data compression was carried out. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding memory | storage display control process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notice selection process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the process which determines the kind of notification effect at the time of determining whether to perform a notification effect, and performing a notification effect. It is a flowchart which shows a movable member notice selection process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table for rotation operation determination. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table for movable determination. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows production mode # 1 data transfer control processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image data which comprise the synthetic | combination moving image of the moving images A and B used by the notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example by which a synthetic | combination moving image is reproduced | regenerated repeatedly. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of a notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a movable member notice effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the image data for backgrounds memorize | stored in CGROM. It is explanatory drawing which shows the background image displayed on the display screen of an image display apparatus. FIG. 5 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the special symbol variation display is executed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port or the second starting winning port. is there. FIG. 5 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the special symbol variation display is executed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port or the second starting winning port. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the decoration design change start process in an effect control process process. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of the mechanism part of the game machine with which the movable member was installed in the position corresponding to a lower opaque area. It is sectional drawing which shows the longitudinal cross-section of a game machine when a movable member is installed in the position corresponding to a lower opaque area. It is a front view for demonstrating a transparent game area | region and a movable member when a movable member is installed in the position corresponding to a lower opaque area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example by which the display effect and movable member in an image display apparatus when a movable member is installed in the position corresponding to a lower opaque area | region cooperate, and one effect is implement | achieved. It is a front view for demonstrating the other kind of movable member when a movable member is installed in the position corresponding to a lower opaque area. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of the mechanism part of the game machine by which the movable member was installed in the position corresponding to a side part opaque area. It is sectional drawing which shows the longitudinal cross-section of a game machine when a movable member is installed in the position corresponding to a side part opaque area. It is a front view for demonstrating a transparent game area | region and a movable member when a movable member is installed in the position corresponding to a side part opaque area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example by which the display effect and movable member in an image display apparatus when a movable member is installed in the position corresponding to a side part opaque area | region cooperate, and one effect is implement | achieved. It is a front view for demonstrating the other kind of movable member when a movable member is installed in the position corresponding to a side part opaque area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data bus in the CG bus between the drawing control part and CGROM in a drawing processor. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is the front view which looked at the variable winning ball apparatus from the front. It is the front view which looked at the variable winning ball apparatus from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the structure which has the passage opening of the game ball provided in the back surface side of the open door. It is a perspective view which shows the path | route from a passage opening to a specific winning opening. It is a perspective view which shows the path | route from other passage openings to a specific winning opening. It is the top view which looked at the lower part of the variable winning ball apparatus from the upper side, and the front view seen from the front side. It is the top view which looked at the lower part of the variable winning ball apparatus from the upper side, and the front view seen from the front side. It is the top view which looked at the lower part of the variable winning ball apparatus from the upper side. It is the top view which looked at the rotary body from the upper side. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of how to advance the game of a gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of a special symbol and a decoration symbol, and the start of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of a special symbol and a decoration symbol, the start of a small hit game, and the start of a big hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows image display examples, such as a post-change effect, in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the stop symbol of a special symbol, and the type of winning. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the stop symbol of a special symbol, and a determination value. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between a fluctuation pattern and a determination value. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows processing for opening an accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory release middle. It is a flowchart which shows a rotary body and a movable part control. It is a timing diagram which shows the operation example of a rotary body and a movable part. It is a flowchart which shows a post-completion process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the round which open | releases the 1st big winning opening in the 2nd big hit game state. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows the process after closing of the big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the display screen of an effect display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the production process after the end of change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the relationship between the stop symbol of a special symbol, and the winning type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of each random number which the microcomputer for game control uses. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the relationship between the stop symbol of a special symbol, and a determination value, and the relationship between a small hit type and a determination value.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be other gaming machines such as a coin gaming machine and a slot machine. Any gaming machine may be used as long as it can play a predetermined game. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the truck as the movable member. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the beam as the movable member.

  First, the configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the glass door frame 2 of FIG. 2 removed as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the front surface of the glass door frame 2. FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view of the hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 3.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame 11 attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame 11 includes a front frame 2a that can be freely opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding game boards to be described later). .). A glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape as shown in FIG. 2 is provided at the upper part on the front side of the front frame 2a so as to be opened and closed. The glass door frame 2 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a circular see-through window as an opening through which a game area 7 of a game board 6 described later can be almost seen through, and a multilayer glass plate is mounted from the back surface of the circular see-through window. It is like that. FIG. 1 shows a pachinko gaming machine 1 with the glass door frame 2 as shown in FIG. 2 removed.

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is provided at a lower portion on the front side of the front frame 2a so as to be positioned below the glass door frame 2. In FIG. 1, the glass door frame 2 shown in FIG. 2 is attached to the upper part of the hitting ball supply tray 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the game is performed with the glass door frame 2 closed. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the game balls.

  On the back surface of the front frame 2a, there is a plastic frame (not shown) constituting a part of the game frame 11. The plastic frame includes a mechanism plate, and components such as a power supply circuit (not shown) and a speaker 27 are attached to the mechanism plate. The plastic frame of the game frame 11 is provided with a relay board (not shown) that relays the wiring between the game frame 11 and the game board 6. Further, in the game frame 11, the game board 6 is detachably attached in such a manner that it is housed and fixed in a game board storage frame portion formed on the back side of the front frame 2a. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. A game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  The side of the pachinko machine 1 accepts a prepaid card as a player-owned recording medium, and rents a ball based on the use of the remaining amount (also referred to as a balance) owned by the player specified by the record information of the prepaid card A prepaid card unit (hereinafter also simply referred to as a “card unit”), which is a card processing device that performs processing for lending (lending) game balls as a player, is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. (Not shown in FIG. 1 and shown in FIG. 12). Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game balls, which are the game media stored in the hit ball supply tray 3, are shot and fired, and the game balls are driven into the game area 7 formed on the game board 6, and A predetermined game as described is performed. When a game ball is received in a winning area provided in the gaming area 7 in the game and a winning occurs, a payout condition is established, and the prize is a prize game medium as a prize based on the establishment of the payout condition. Prize balls (game balls) are paid out.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, there is provided an effect display device (image display device) 9 including a plurality of variable display units each displaying a decorative pattern for effect. The effect display device 9 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The effect display device 9 performs a variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative (effect) symbol during the special symbol variable display period by the special symbol indicator 8. The effect display device 9 that performs variable display of decorative symbols is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Such an effect display device 9 is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an effect display device that performs a predetermined effect as described below.

  Below the effect display device 9 is provided a special symbol display device (special symbol display device) 8 that variably displays special symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of displaying a numerical value of, for example, 00 to 99 in a variable manner. The special symbol display 8 is not limited to displaying a two-digit number, but may be configured to display a variable number of digits such as 0 to 9 in a variable manner. In addition, the effect display device 9 changes the decorative symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified during the variable symbol display period of the special symbols on the special symbol display unit 8 for decoration (for effects). Display.

  On the right side of the special symbol display 8 is a special symbol hold composed of four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the start winning openings 13, 14, that is, the number of hold memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). A storage indicator 18 is provided. Every time there is an effective start prize, the display color of one display is changed. Then, every time the variable display of the special symbol display 8 is started, the display color of one display is restored. In addition, in the display area of the effect display device 9, a special symbol reserved storage display area including four display areas for displaying the number of reserved memories may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is 4, but the upper limit value may be a larger value. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a second starting winning opening (second starting opening) through which a game ball can be won based on the operation of the pair of left and right movable pieces. A variable winning ball apparatus 15 having 14 is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened when the movable piece is opened by bringing the solenoid 16 into an excited state. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed when the movable piece is closed by putting the solenoid 16 in a demagnetized state. In a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize. The first start winning port 13 and the second start winning port 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading toward the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail is arranged densely around 13 or the nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is difficult for the game balls to guide to the first starting winning opening 13, It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a truck 151 as a movable member used for game effects is provided. In the game effect, the truck 151 can produce an effect of jumping out from the right side of the effect display device 9 to the left side as shown in FIG.

  Further, a beam 152 as a movable member used for the game effect is provided on the upper and right sides of the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 6, the beam 152 can perform an effect that collapses from the upper part and the right side of the effect display device 9 according to the control of the effect control means in the game effect.

  Further, at the lower part of the effect display device 9, a solenoid 21 is used in a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous for a player that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the special symbol display 8. A special variable winning ball apparatus 20 that is opened is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 has an opening / closing plate 20a that opens and closes a large winning opening as a winning area in which a game ball can win when opened, and an open state (open state) advantageous to the player, and a game It is controlled to one of the closed states that is disadvantageous to the person. In the specific game state (big hit game state), the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to be in the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the big prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state. The winning ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the member constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided with an operation portion 81 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation unit 81 is a push button switch (jog switch) that allows a player to perform a pressing operation in a direction selected from a plurality of predetermined directions (four directions) such as front, rear, left, and right when viewed from the player. A plurality of operation units including a pressing operation unit 811 having a circular shape in a plan view and a rotation operation unit 812 including a dial (jog dial) that can be rotated around the pressing operation unit 811 and can be rotated. including. In addition to the four directions of front, back, left and right, the pressing operation unit 811 can also be pressed downward as viewed from the player. In the pressing operation unit 811, the player faces the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the front, rear, left, and right four directions. The player can perform a direction selection operation for selectively pressing one of the directions and a determination operation for pressing the entire pressing operation unit 811 downward in addition to the direction selection operation.

  In the pressing operation unit 811, a portion operated when performing an operation of selecting the front direction (a portion on the side facing the player toward the pressing operation unit 811) is referred to as a front direction portion. In the pressing operation unit 811, a portion operated when performing an operation of selecting the backward direction (a portion on the near side of the player toward the pressing operation unit 811) is referred to as a backward direction portion. In the pressing operation portion 811, a portion operated when performing an operation of selecting the left direction (a portion on the left side of the player facing the pressing operation portion 811) is referred to as a left direction portion. In the pressing operation unit 811, a portion (a portion on the right side of the player facing the pressing operation unit 811) operated when performing an operation of selecting the right direction is referred to as a right direction unit.

  In addition, the rotation operation unit 812 allows the player to arbitrarily perform a left rotation operation that rotates counterclockwise and a right rotation operation that rotates clockwise.

  Moreover, in the member which comprises the hitting ball supply tray 3, when receiving the ball lending switch 91 operated when borrowing a game ball via the above-mentioned card unit other than the operation unit 811, and the return of the prepaid card Operation means such as a return switch 92 to be operated is provided.

  FIG. 3 also shows a cross-sectional view of the ball lending switch 91. As shown in FIG. 3, the ball lending switch 91 is disposed on the same surface as the surface on which the operation unit 81 of the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided. Further, as shown in the cross-sectional view in FIG. 3, the ball lending switch 91 is disposed at a position recessed from the surface on which the operation unit 81 of the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided in a state where the ball lending switch 91 is not pressed by the player. Has been. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where the ball lending switch 91 is accidentally pressed when the operation unit 81 is operated. Similarly to the ball lending switch 91, the return switch 92 is also arranged at a position recessed from the surface on which the operation unit 81 of the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the return switch 92 is accidentally pressed when the operation unit 81 is operated.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the player's hand and the ball rental switch 91 and the return switch 92 during operation of the operation unit 81. FIG. 4A shows a state where the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 is operated using the left hand. 4B and 4C show a state where the rotation operation unit 812 is operated using the right hand. For example, as shown in FIG. 4C, when the rotation operation unit 812 is operated using the right hand, the position of the right hand is unconsciously determined by the player as the position of the ball rental switch 91 or the return switch 92. There may be an overlapping state. In this case, if the ball lending switch 91 and the return switch 92 are arranged so as to protrude from the surface on which the operation unit 81 of the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided, the right hand is the ball lending switch. 91 or the return switch 92 may be touched, and the ball lending switch 91 or the return switch 92 may be accidentally pressed. In this embodiment, since the ball lending switch 91 and the return switch 92 are arranged so as to be recessed from the surface on which the operation unit 81 of the hit ball supply tray 3 is provided, the operation of the operation unit 81 This prevents a situation where a hand touches the ball lending switch 91 or the return switch 92 by mistake.

  Referring to FIG. 1, when a game ball wins a gate 32 and is detected by a gate switch 32a, the display variation of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the left and right lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on) are turned on alternately to perform variable display. For example, if the right lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. And when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. At the lower part of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls entered into the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a prize at the gate 32, the normal symbol holding storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  The game board 6 is provided with a plurality of winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, and 39. The winning holes 29, 30, 33, and 39 for the game balls are awarded to the winning port switches 29a and 30a, respectively. , 33a, 39a. Each winning opening 29, 30, 33, 39 constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game balls and allowing winning. The start winning ports 13 and 14 and the big winning port also constitute a winning area that accepts game balls and allows winning. In addition, the game balls won in the respective winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 may be detected by one switch.

  A decoration member 154 is attached to the center of the game area 7 so as to surround the effect display device 9, and a decoration lamp (for center decoration) that is lit or blinked during the game is placed on the top of the decoration member 154. Lamp). In this embodiment, six LEDs 125a to 125f are provided as center decoration lamps. In addition, the decoration member 154 is provided with a decoration lamp (stage lamp) that is lit or blinked during the game so as to surround the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, six LEDs 126a to 126f are provided as stage lamps.

  Further, at the lower part of the game area 7, there is an out port 26 for absorbing game balls that have not won a prize. Two speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7.

  Referring to FIG. 2, a top frame lamp, a left frame lamp, and a right frame lamp are provided on the outer periphery of game area 7. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure in the game area 7. The top frame lamp, the left frame lamp, the right frame lamp, and the decoration LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, twelve LEDs 281a to 281l are provided as ceiling lamps. In addition, six LEDs 282a to 282f are provided as left frame lamps. In addition, six LEDs 283a to 283f are provided as right frame lamps. In addition, as the decorative LEDs around the structure, one LED 127a (see FIG. 1) is provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 15, and two LEDs 127b and 127c (see FIG. 1) are provided around the special variable winning ball apparatus 20. ing. Further, the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 includes eight single-color LEDs (first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to eighth pressing operation unit lamp 82h shown in FIG. 10 and the like) and one multi-color LED (FIG. 10 and the like). The operation unit center lamp 82A) is provided, and the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 is provided with four single-color LEDs (first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l shown in FIG. 10 and the like). ing.

  The game balls launched from the hit ball launching device enter the game area 7 through the hit ball rail, and then descend the game area 7. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, or when a game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, the variation of the design If the display can be started, the special symbol on the special symbol display unit 8 starts the variation display (variation) and the effect display unit 9 starts the variation display (variation). If the symbol display cannot be started, the number of reserved memories is increased by one.

  The special symbol variation display on the special symbol display 8 and the decorative symbol variation display on the effect display device 9 are stopped when a certain time has elapsed. If the special symbol (stop symbol) at the time of stoppage is a jackpot symbol (a jackpot display result as a specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. That is, the special winning opening is opened until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins.

  When the game ball wins the gate 32, the normal symbol display unit 10 is in a state where the normal symbol is variably displayed. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. Further, in the probability variation state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Further, in the short time state (the game state in which the special symbol variation display time is shortened), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 may be increased.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with lamps and LEDs as light emitters in various places.

  Next, the operation unit 81 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the operation unit 81. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining modes of the pressing operation unit 811 and the display member 811A of the operation unit 81. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a state in which the pressing operation unit 811 emits light. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between various detectors and lamps in the operation unit 81 and the structure of the operation unit 81. 7A is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit 81, FIG. 7B is a back view of the cover plate 815 included in the operation unit 81, and FIG. 7C is a side view of the cover plate 815. (However, in order to clarify the configuration of the protruding portion 8150 on the back surface, the fixing portion 815a is not shown). In FIG. 8, (a) shows the mode of the pressing operation unit 811, and (b) shows the mode of the display member 811 A inside the operation unit 81. In FIG. 9, (a) shows the light emission state when the operation unit center lamp (multi-color LED) 82A blinks red, and (b) shows the light emission state when the operation unit center lamp 82A lights blue. It is shown. In FIG. 10, (a) shows a plan view of the operation unit 81 showing the arrangement of various detectors and various lamps, (b) shows a side view of the operation unit 81, and (c) shows (a A-A cross-sectional view of FIG. FIG. 11 is a longitudinal sectional view for illustrating various states of the operation unit 81.

  Referring to FIG. 7, the operation unit 81 includes a pressing member 811a, a display member 811A, a rotation member 812a, a button housing 813, a button spring 814, a cover plate 815, a dial base 816, a button base 817, and an operation unit substrate 818. Including. The pressing operation unit 811 is mainly configured by components such as a pressing member 811a, a display member 811A, a button housing 813, a button spring 814, a button base 817, and an operation unit substrate 818. The rotation operation unit 812 is mainly configured by components such as a rotation member 812a, a cover plate 815, and a dial base 816.

  The pressing member 811a is a resin-made semitransparent circular button-shaped member. The display member 811A is a resin-made translucent member, and is formed in a sheet shape having a constant thickness and a circular shape slightly smaller than the inner peripheral size of the pressing member 811a.

  The display member 811A has a plurality of types of character strings printed in different colors on the lower surface of a plate formed of a resin member such as an acrylic material. As shown in FIG. 8B, the display member 811A has three types of paints 811b to 811d printed on the lower surface of a resin member such as an acrylic material. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, the display member 811A displays a red character string (for example, “Press!”) Displayed when the operation unit center lamp 82A emits red light. Column) is printed, and a blue character string (for example, a character string such as “Turn !!”) is printed when the operation unit center lamp 82A emits blue light. The red character string is mainly printed by a red paint 811b that transmits red light and blocks blue light as a paint that matches the wavelength when the operation unit center lamp 82A that is a multi-color LED emits red light. ing. The blue character string is mainly printed by a blue paint 811c that transmits blue light and blocks red light as a paint that matches the wavelength when the operation unit center lamp 82A emits blue light. Further, a blank portion where neither a red character string nor a blue character string is printed is printed with a black paint 811d as a light-shielding color paint that does not transmit light (at least red light and blue light).

  In the example shown in FIG. 8B, the display member 811A shows a case where the red character string and the blue character string are printed so as not to have an overlapping portion. The columns and the blue character strings may be printed so as to overlap each other. In this case, the overlapping portion of the red character string and the blue character string is a mixed color of red light and blue light and a purple paint as a mixed color paint that transmits red light and blue light. It may be printed. In this embodiment, a case where a red character string and a blue character string are printed on the display member 811A is shown. However, the display member 811A is not limited to a character string. It may be printed.

  The button housing 813 is a member in which a pressing member 811a is fitted in the upper part and operates in the front / rear / left / right direction and the upper / lower direction in accordance with the operation of the pressing operation part 811. Four protrusions 813a necessary for detecting which of the directions is operated are provided. In addition, in order to cause the outer periphery of the button housing 813 to emit light in four directions (front direction, rear direction, right direction, and left direction) that the player should operate in the pressing operation unit 811. In the operation portion 81, four light guide portions 813b that guide light from below to above are formed. One end of a button spring 814 made of a coil spring is attached to the lower surface side of the button housing 813.

  The button base 817 is a resin member to which the pressing member 811a, the button housing 813, the rotating member 812a, the button spring 814, the cover plate 815, and the dial base 816 are attached at the top, and the operation unit substrate 818 is attached to the bottom. . In the button base 817, a cylindrical wall portion 817a having a shape capable of receiving the button housing 813 in the internal space is formed in the upper portion. In the button base 817, a plurality of claw portions 817b for attaching the operation portion 81 to an attachment portion provided in the hit ball supply tray 3 are formed.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the cover plate 815 is a metal member formed in an annular shape, and the button housing 813 is inserted through the inner periphery thereof. As shown in FIGS. 7B and 7C, on the lower surface side of the annular portion of the cover plate 815, a click feeling (clicking, clicking sound) is made to divide the rotation operation for each predetermined rotation amount. There is provided a protrusion 8150 in which a plurality of (two) protrusions 8151 for generating a sense of operation) are formed. The protruding portion 8150 has a protrusion 8151 that is formed by bending a part of the member at the intermediate portion of the leaf spring-like member, and the position of the protrusion 8151 is swung by the elastic force of the leaf spring-like member ( In this example, it has a shape that can be moved up and down). Further, as shown in FIG. 7A, four fixing portions 815 a for fixing the cover plate 815 to the upper part of the dial base 816 are provided on the four sides of the cover plate 815.

  The dial base 816 is an annular resin member that rotates in accordance with the operation of the rotation operation unit 812, and has a cylindrical wall portion 816c into which the rotation member 812a is fitted. A button housing 813 is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the dial base 816. Further, on the outer periphery of the dial base 816, there is provided a click feeling portion 816b in which a plurality of concave and convex portions for continuously generating a click feeling in relation to the protrusion 8151 of the cover plate 815 are continuously formed. . Further, on the lower surface side of the dial base 816, a rotation detection wall portion 816a for detecting the rotation of the rotation operation portion 812 is provided in a form of being arranged in an annular shape (concentric circle shape) at a predetermined interval.

  Such a dial base 816 is slidably contacted with the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical wall portion 817a of the button base 817, and is inserted through the cylindrical wall portion 817a of the button base 817 so as to be rotatable along the outer peripheral surface. In this manner, the button base 817 is fitted. The cover plate 815 fixes the fixing portion 815a to the fixing portion 817c (see FIG. 10B) provided on the button base 817 in a state where the cylindrical wall portion 816c of the dial base 816 is pressed from above. Is attached to the button base 817. In such a state, a part of the cylindrical wall portion 816 c of the dial base 816 protrudes upward from the inner peripheral side of the cover plate 815. By attaching the rotating member 812a to the protruding cylindrical wall portion 816c, the dial base 816 is interlocked with the rotation operation of the rotation operation portion 812. The protrusion 8151 of the protrusion 8150 on the lower surface side of the cover plate 815 is urged toward the uneven part continuously formed on the dial base 816 by the elastic force of the protrusion 8150. In such a case, the protrusion 8151 of the protrusion 8150 on the lower surface side of the cover plate 815 enters and exits the uneven portion formed continuously on the dial base 816, so that the rotation operation portion 812 is moved at a predetermined angle such as 15 degrees. A click feeling can be generated each time the (predetermined amount of rotation) is rotated.

  For example, the concave portion of the concavo-convex portion continuously formed on the dial base 816 is guided so that when the projection on the lower surface side of the cover plate 815 comes into contact, the projection slides downward and enters the bottom portion of the convex portion. It is comprised in the shape which forms the slope which can do. Therefore, in response to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812, the projection 8151 moves from a certain concave portion to the vertex of the next convex portion, and when the projection 8151 enters the next concave portion beyond the vertex of the convex portion, Thereafter, even if no operating force is applied, the protrusion 8151 is urged by the elastic force of the member of the protrusion 8150, and slides down the slope to enter the bottom of the next protrusion. Therefore, when the rotation operation portion 812 is rotated, when the projection 8151 passes through the apex of the convex portion between the concave portions when the operation is performed for one click from one concave portion to the next concave portion, the protrusion is required unless it is rotated in the opposite direction. Since 8151 is guided to the bottom of the next concave portion, it is possible to determine that an operation for one click has been performed at the timing when the projection 8151 passes through the apex of the convex portion. By performing such an operation according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812, a click feeling is generated for each predetermined rotation amount.

  For the button housing 813 to which the pressing member 811a and the button spring 814 are attached, the other end of the button spring 814 is a button spring attaching portion 817c provided on the bottom surface inside the cylindrical wall portion 817a of the button base 817 (FIG. 10B). ))). As shown in FIG. 11A or 11C, after the pressing operation portion 811 is pressed, the pressing operation is performed as shown in FIG. 11B based on the expansion / contraction force of the button spring 814. The subsequent pressing member 811a is returned to the original position.

  An operation unit substrate 818 is attached to the lower surface of the button base 817 with screws. As shown in FIG. 10A, the operation unit substrate 818 is a substrate that is formed in a disc shape and on which various electrical components are mounted. On the upper surface side of the operation unit substrate 818, a first press detector 81a, a second press detector 81b, a third press detector 81c, a fourth press detector 81d, a first rotation detector 81e, and a second rotation detector 81f, 1st press operation part lamp 82a, 2nd press operation part lamp 82b, 3rd press operation part lamp 82c, 4th press operation part lamp 82d, 5th press operation part lamp 82e, 6th press operation part lamp 82f, A seventh pressing operation unit lamp 82g, an eighth pressing operation unit lamp 82h, and an operation unit center lamp 82A are provided. As shown in FIG. 10A, the rotation operation unit 812 includes a first rotation operation unit lamp 82i, a second rotation operation unit lamp 82j, a third rotation operation unit lamp 82k, and a fourth rotation operation. A partial lamp 82l is also provided.

  The first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press detector 81c, and the fourth press detector 81d are four-direction direction selection operation and determination operation by the press operation unit 811 as described above. , And is arranged at a predetermined interval on a concentric circle with the central portion of the operation unit substrate 818 as the center. Each pressing operation device is composed of a photosensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. As shown in FIG. 11 (a) or FIG. 11 (c), the protrusion 813a of the button housing 813 described above enters the internal space. It is detected that the pressing operation unit 811 has been operated based on the fact that the light is interrupted. More specifically, the relationship between the four protrusions 813a of the button housing 813 and each of the first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press detector 81c, and the fourth press detector 81d. Is as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, when the left direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 is pressed, the protrusion portion that exists immediately below the left direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 among the protrusion portions 813 a is the second pressing portion. Based on entering the inside of the detector 81b, it is detected that the left direction portion has been pressed. In addition, when the right direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 is pressed, the protruding portion that exists immediately below the right direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 among the protruding portions 813a enters the inside of the fourth press detector 81d. Based on this, it is detected that the right direction portion has been pressed. Further, when the forward direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 is pressed, the protruding portion existing immediately below the forward direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 among the protruding portions 813a enters the inside of the first press detector 81a. Based on the above, it is detected that the front portion has been pressed. Further, when the rear portion of the pressing operation portion 811 is pressed, the protruding portion that exists immediately below the rear portion of the pressing operation portion 811 among the protruding portions 813a enters the inside of the third press detector 81c. Based on this, it is detected that the backward portion has been pressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11C, when the central portion of the pressing operation unit 811 is normally pressed, the first pressing detector 81a, the second pressing detector 81b, and the third pressing detection are usually performed. A protrusion 813a is inserted into at least two of the device 81c and the fourth press detector 81d. Accordingly, the pressing portion 813a is inserted into at least two of the first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press detector 81c, and the fourth press detector 81d. It is detected that the central portion of the operation unit 811 has been pressed.

  The first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f are detectors provided for detecting a left rotation operation and a right rotation operation by the rotation operation unit 812. As shown in FIG. 10A, each rotation detector includes a photosensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and when the dial base 816 is rotated, the rotation detection wall portion 816a is a light emitting portion. It is provided at a position where it can pass between the light receiving parts. The positional relationship between the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f is such that, for example, when the first rotation detector 81e detects a rotation detection wall portion 816a, the second rotation detector 81f The rotation detection wall portion 816a is not separated from the rotation detection wall portion 816a and is spaced apart by a predetermined distance.

  In each rotation detector, when the rotation detection wall portion 816a of the dial base 816 enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion, light from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion is blocked. Since the rotation detection wall portions 816a are arranged at a predetermined interval as described above, the detection signals output from the respective rotation detectors are detected when the dial base 816 is rotating. Is a pulse signal that repeats an on state in which no rotation is detected and an off state in which the rotation detection wall portion 816a is detected. In the effect control microcomputer 100, as described later, based on the relationship between the state of the detection signal of the first rotation detector 81e and the state of the detection signal of the second rotation detector 81f, the rotation operation by the rotation operation unit 812 is performed. Is detected.

  An operation unit center lamp 82A, which is a multi-color LED, is provided at the center of the operation unit substrate 818. The operation unit center lamp 82A is an LED for causing the character string printed on the display member 811A to emit light when the determination operation by the pressing operation unit 811 is performed or when the rotation operation by the rotation operation unit 812 is performed. . The light from the operation unit central lamp 82A passes through the internal space of the button base 817 and the internal space of the button housing 813 and reaches the central part of the operation unit substrate 818 (see FIG. 10C). The printed character string emits light, and the character string in the light emitting state can be visually recognized by the pressing operation unit 811.

  In this embodiment, when the operation unit center lamp 82A is not emitting light, as shown in FIG. 8A, the character string cannot be visually recognized in the pressing operation unit 811. For example, when the operation unit center lamp 82A emits red light, a character string (for example, a character string such as “Press!”) Printed on the display member 811A with red paint 811B by the red light from the operation unit center lamp 82A. As shown in FIG. 9A, a red character string (for example, a character string such as “Press!”) Is visible in the pressing operation unit 811. As shown in FIG. Further, by displaying a character string such as “Press!”, The player recognizes that the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 811 is instructed by confirming the display on the pressing operation unit 811. be able to. In addition, for example, when the operation unit center lamp 82A emits blue light, a character string (for example, “Turn !!” or the like) printed on the display member 811A with the blue paint 811C by the blue light from the operation unit center lamp 82A. Column) is lit (may be blinking), and as shown in FIG. 9B, a blue character string (for example, a character string such as “Press!”) Can be visually recognized in the pressing operation unit 811. Become. Further, by displaying a character string such as “Turn !!”, the player recognizes that the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 is instructed by confirming the display on the pressing operation unit 811. be able to.

  In this embodiment, a case where one multi-color LED is arranged as the operation unit center lamp 82A is shown. However, a red single color LED and a blue single color LED are provided at the center of the operation unit 81. Each may be arranged. When prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 811, a character string such as “Press!” Is displayed on the pressing operation unit 811 by blinking the red single-color LED (may be turned on). When prompting the operation of the rotation operation unit 812, a character string such as “Turn it!” May be displayed on the pressing operation unit 811 by lighting a blue single-color LED (may be blinking). .

  The first press operation unit lamp 82a to the eighth press operation unit lamp 82h are positions on the operation unit substrate 818 where the first press detector 81a to the fourth press detector 81d are arranged from the center of the operation unit substrate 818. Further, they are arranged at predetermined intervals on concentric circles centered on the central portion of the operation unit substrate 818 at positions outside the center. The first pressing operation unit lamp 82a is provided in the vicinity of the first pressing detector 81a. The second pressing operation unit lamp 82b is provided in the vicinity of the second pressing detector 81b. The third pressing operation unit lamp 82c is provided in the vicinity of the third pressing detector 81c. The fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d is provided in the vicinity of the fourth pressing detector 81d. The fifth pressing operation unit lamp 82e is provided between the first operation unit lamp 82a and the second operation unit lamp 82b. The sixth pressing operation unit lamp 82f is provided between the second operation unit lamp 82b and the third operation unit lamp 82c. The seventh pressing operation unit lamp 82g is provided between the third operation unit lamp 82c and the fourth operation unit lamp 82d. The eighth pressing operation unit lamp 82h is provided between the fourth operation unit lamp 82d and the first operation unit lamp 82a.

  The first pressing operation unit lamp 82a is an LED for causing the front direction part of the pressing operation unit 811 that is a position to be operated when performing the forward direction selection operation in the pressing operation unit 811 to emit light. The light from the first pressing operation portion lamp 82a passes through the inner space of the button base 817 and the light guide portion 813b for guiding the light for light emission in the front direction in the button housing 813, and reaches the front direction portion of the operation portion substrate 818. As a result, the forward direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 emits light.

  The second pressing operation unit lamp 82b is composed of an LED for causing the left direction part of the pressing operation unit 811, which is a position to be operated when performing the left direction selection operation, of the pressing operation unit 811 to emit light. Light emitted from the second pressing operation portion lamp 82b passes through the inner space of the button base 817 and the light guide portion 813b that guides light for light emission in the left direction in the button housing 813, and reaches the left direction portion of the operation portion substrate 818. As a result, the left direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 emits light.

  The third pressing operation portion lamp 82c is an LED for causing the rear portion of the pressing operation portion 811 that is a position to be operated when performing the backward direction selection operation of the pressing operation portion 811 to emit light. The light from the third pressing operation portion lamp 82c passes through the inner space of the button base 817 and the light guide portion 813b for guiding the light for the rear portion light emission in the button housing 813, and reaches the rear portion of the operation portion substrate 818. As a result, the backward portion of the pressing operation portion 811 emits light.

  The fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d is an LED for causing the right direction part of the pressing operation unit 811, which is a position to be operated when performing the right direction selection operation, of the pressing operation unit 811 to emit light. The light from the fourth pressing operation portion lamp 82d passes through the inner space of the button base 817 and the light guide portion 813b for guiding the light for light emission in the right direction portion of the button housing 813, and reaches the right direction portion of the operation portion substrate 818. Thus, the right direction part of the pressing operation part 811 emits light.

  FIG. 12 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 12 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. And a serial output circuit for converting parallel data into serial data and outputting the serial data. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit for generating hardware random numbers.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  Also, an input driver circuit for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a to the game control microcomputer 560. 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a special symbol display 8 for variably displaying special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols, a special symbol hold memory indicator 18 and a normal symbol hold memory indicator 41. Perform display control.

  Further, the serial output circuit 78 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560 is constituted by a shift register or the like, converts the effect control command output from the CPU 56 into serial data, and sends it to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77. Send. The serial output circuit 78 converts the control signal output from the CPU 56 into serial data, and via the relay board 77, the special symbol display 8, the special symbol hold storage display 18, the normal symbol display 10, and the normal symbol. Output to the on-hold storage display 41. The special symbol display 8, the special symbol hold storage display 18, the normal symbol display 10 and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 are provided with serial-parallel conversion ICs for converting serial data into parallel data, respectively. The control signal from the relay board 77 is converted into parallel data and supplied to the special symbol display 8, the special symbol hold storage display 18, the normal symbol display 10, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Display is performed as a serial data system, and display control of the effect display device 9 that displays the decorative design in a variable manner is performed.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the production control board 80 performs display control of the center decoration lamps 125a to 125f and the stage lamps 126a to 126f provided on the game board 6, and on the frame side. Provided ceiling frame lamps 281a to 281l, left frame lamps 282a to 282f, right frame lamps 283a to 283f, first pressing operation unit lamps 82a to 8th pressing operation unit lamps 82h, operation unit central lamp 82A and first rotation Display control of the operation unit lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l is performed, and sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 of the effect control board 80 is provided with lamps 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 82A, 82a to 82l output by the effect control means. A serial output circuit 353 for converting a control signal for display control from parallel data to serial data is mounted. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 of the effect control board 80 is equipped with a serial input circuit 354 that converts the input serial data into parallel data and outputs the parallel data to the effect control means. Therefore, the effect control means outputs the control signal as a serial data system via the serial output circuit 353, whereby each lamp 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 82A, Display control of 82a to 82l is performed.

  On the game board side, a board-side IC board 601 on which a serial-parallel conversion IC for converting serial data into parallel data is mounted. The board side IC board 601 is connected to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 606. On the game frame 11 side, frame-side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, and 605 on which serial-parallel conversion ICs for converting serial data into parallel data are provided. Each frame side IC substrate 602, 603, 604, 605 is connected to the effect control substrate 80 via the relay substrate 606, 607.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the effect control board 80, the relay board 606, and the relay board 607 are connected to each other in a bus type by a single wiring route.

  FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77 and the effect control board 80. Note that the example shown in FIG. 13 shows a case where only the effect control board 80 is provided for effect control, but a lamp driver board and an audio output board may be provided. In this case, the lamp driver board and the sound output board are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101, a RAM (not shown), a serial output circuit 353, a serial input circuit 354, a clock signal output unit 356 and an input capture signal output unit 357. It is installed. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives an effect control command via the serial input circuit 102 and the input port 103. In this case, the serial input circuit 102 converts the effect control command received as the serial data method into parallel data and outputs the parallel data. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. VDP109
Has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative designs), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads the image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 13 illustrates a diode.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the lamp via the serial output circuit 353. The serial output circuit converts the input signal (parallel data) for driving the LED of the lamp into serial data and outputs the serial data to the relay board 606. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs the sound number data to the speech synthesis IC 173.

  Further, the clock signal output unit 356 outputs a clock signal to the relay board 606. The clock signal from the clock signal output unit 356 is supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615, 622, and 623 and the input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 via the relay substrates 606 and 607, respectively. The clock signal from the clock signal output unit 356 is supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 and the input IC 621 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 via the relay substrate 606. Therefore, in this embodiment, a common clock signal is supplied to each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619, 622, 623 and the input ICs 620, 621.

  Further, the input capture signal output unit 357 inputs the input capture signal (latch signal) to the board side IC board 601 or the frame side IC boards 602 to 605 via the relay boards 606 and 607 in accordance with the instruction of the effect control CPU 101. Is output. When the input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC substrate 605 receives an input capture signal from the production control microcomputer 100, the first press detector 81a to the fourth press detector 81d, the first rotation detector 81e, and The detection signal of the second rotation detector 81f is latched and output to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the relay boards 606 and 607 as a serial data system. The input IC 621 mounted on the board-side IC board 601 latches the detection signals of the position sensors 151b and 152b when an input input signal from the production control microcomputer 100 is input, and relays the serial board as a serial data system. It outputs to the production control microcomputer 100 via 606.

  When the sound number IC 173 receives the sound number data, the sound synthesizing IC 173 generates a sound or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 175. The amplifier circuit 175 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 173 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 176 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 174 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the effect control board 80, the relay boards 606 and 607, the board side IC board 601, and the frame side IC boards 602, 603, 604, and 605. The effect control microcomputer 100 of the effect control board 80 outputs a clock signal to the relay board 607 together with serial data as a control signal. In addition, an input capture signal for causing the input ICs 620 and 621 to latch the input signal is output to the relay board 606.

  The relay board 606 supplies the serial data and the clock signal input from the effect control microcomputer 100 to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC board 601. And each serial-parallel conversion IC616-619 converts the input serial data into parallel data, LED125a-125f of each lamp provided in the game board 6, 126a-126f, 127a-127c, and each movable member To the motors 151a and 152a.

  Further, the relay board 607 is connected to the relay board 606 through a single wiring route in a bus type, and the serial data line 300 and the clock signal line 301 connected to each serial-parallel conversion IC 616 to 619 are connected to the board side. It is connected to the bus form on the IC substrate 601. The connection to the bus type means that a plurality of serial-parallel conversion ICs or relay boards are connected to one wiring route.

  Each serial-parallel conversion IC 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 has a unique ID. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the ID of IC 616 is 06, the ID of IC 617 is 07, the ID of IC 618 is 08, and the ID of IC 619 is 09.

  In addition, an input IC 621 for inputting a detection signal of a position sensor of each movable member provided on the game board 6 is mounted on the board side IC board 601. In this embodiment, the input IC 621 and the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the board-side IC board 601 include an input signal line 302, a clock signal line 301, and an input capture signal line 303 via a relay board 606. The presentation control microcomputer 100 is connected and outputs an input capture signal to the input IC 621 via the relay board 606 at a predetermined timing. Then, the input IC 621 latches the detection signal of each position sensor based on the input capture signal (latch signal) and outputs it to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the relay board 606. In this case, the input IC 621 converts the detection signal input in parallel from each position sensor into serial data and outputs it. In this embodiment, the unique ID of the input IC 621 is 11, as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the serial data and clock signal input to the relay board 607 are supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615, 622 and 623 mounted on the frame side IC boards 602 to 605. And each serial-parallel conversion IC611-615,622,623 converts the input serial data into parallel data, LED281a-281l of each lamp provided in the game frame 11, 282a-282f, 283a-283f, 82A and 82a to 82l.

  The serial data lines and clock signal lines connected to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 are connected in a bus format on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, first, the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 of the frame-side IC board 604 is input, and the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 and the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 and the serial-parallel of the frame-side IC board 602 are input. The signals are input in the order of the parallel conversion IC 612, and further input from the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613 of the frame side IC substrate 603. The serial data lines and clock signal lines connected to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 615, 622, and 623 are connected in a bus format on the frame side IC substrate 605. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, first, the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 of the frame side IC substrate 605 is input, and the serial-parallel conversion IC 615, the serial-parallel conversion IC 622, and the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 are input in this order. Is done.

  Each serial-parallel conversion IC 611-615, 622, 623 mounted on each frame side IC substrate 602-605 has a unique ID. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the ID of IC 611 is 01, the ID of IC 612 is 02, the ID of IC 613 is 03, the ID of IC 614 is 04, and the ID of IC 615 is 05 The ID of IC 622 is 12, and the ID of IC 623 is 13.

  Further, the frame side IC substrate 605 includes a first press detector 81a to a fourth press detector 81d, a first rotation detector 81e, and a second rotation detector 81f in the operation unit 811 provided in the game frame 11. The input IC 620 for inputting the respective detection signals is mounted. In this embodiment, an input signal line, a clock signal line, and an input capture signal line are connected to the input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC board 605 and the production control microcomputer 100 via the relay boards 606 and 607. Thus, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs an input capture signal to the input IC 620 via the relay boards 606 and 607 at a predetermined timing. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs the input capture signal to the input IC 620 at a timing different from the timing of outputting the input capture signal to the input IC 621. Then, the input IC 620 receives signals from the first pressure detector 81a to the fourth pressure detector 81d, the first rotation detector 81e, and the second rotation detector 81f based on the input capture signal (latch signal). The detection signal is latched and output to the production control microcomputer 100 via the relay boards 606 and 607. In this case, the input IC 620 converts the detection signals input in parallel from each of the first pressure detector 81a to the fourth pressure detector 81d, the first rotation detector 81e, and the second rotation detector 81f into serial data. And output. In this embodiment, the unique ID of the input IC 620 is 10 as shown in FIG.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the panel-side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615, 622, and 623 mounted on the frame-side IC substrates 602 to 605 are connected via one system wiring. It is connected. Specifically, the connection via one line of wiring means that the relay boards 606 and 607 are connected in a bus type, and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619, 622, and 623 are in a bus type or daisy chain. It is connected to the mold. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619, 622, and 623 are connected in a bus type. As described above, in this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel ICs 611 to 615 and 622 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 are provided. , 623 are connected to each other through one line of wiring using a connector via relay boards 606 and 607. Therefore, the wiring work between the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be performed only by attaching / detaching the connector, and the work of attaching / detaching the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be performed more easily.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 622 623 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605, and A common clock signal is input to the input ICs 620 and 621 from the effect control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the wiring of the clock signal to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619, 622, and 623 and the wiring of the clock signal to the input ICs 620 and 621 can be made common, and between the effect control means and the board-side IC 601 board. And communication between the effect control means and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 can be realized using one channel, respectively, and the number of wirings can be reduced. Also, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the panel side IC substrate 601, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615, 622 623 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605, and the input ICs 620 and 621 are easy. The number of clock signal wirings can also be reduced.

  In this embodiment, each serial-parallel conversion IC 611-619, 622, 623 is assigned an address in advance, and the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a control signal converted into serial data. Outputs serial data with an address added. When each serial-parallel conversion IC 611-619, 622, 623 inputs serial data, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619, 622, and 623 check whether the address added to the input serial data matches their own address. The data is converted and supplied to the LED of each lamp (ie, output). If the addresses do not match, the LED of each lamp is not supplied.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the production control microcomputer 100 performs bidirectional communication with the board-side IC board 601 and the frame-side IC boards 602 to 605 (specifically, serial data is converted into serial-parallel data). ICs 611 to 619, 622, and 623 and input signals are input from the input ICs 620 and 621). Therefore, a data input terminal and a data output terminal are provided. Can be done. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the data input terminal and the data output terminal of one channel are respectively connected to different output target devices (in this example, serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619, 622, and 623). It is connected to an input target device (in this example, input ICs 620 and 621). With such a configuration, when the output target device and the input target device are originally different devices, communication should be performed using different channels in both directions. Communication is enabled, and the number of channels between the production control microcomputer 100, the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 is reduced.

  In this embodiment, the channel is a terminal for a data line (output data line), a clock signal line, an input signal line (input data line), and an input take-in signal line (signal line for input data read request). Is a set. One channel may include a ground wire or a terminal dedicated to the power source. Further, in this embodiment, a case where both data input and data output are performed using one channel is shown, but an output-dedicated channel in which only a terminal for a data line (output data line) and a clock signal line is set. May be used. Alternatively, an input-only channel in which only terminals for input signal lines (input data lines) and input take-in signal lines (input data read request signal lines) are set may be used.

  FIGS. 15 and 16 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of addresses given to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619, 622, and 623. FIG. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the addresses of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619, 622, and 623 shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 in a predetermined address storage area previously provided in the RAM. doing.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, in the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615, 622, and 623 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605, an address 01 is given to the IC 611. IC 612 is given address 02, IC 613 is given address 03, IC 614 is given address 04, IC 615 is given address 05, IC 622 is given address 12, IC 623 is given address 13 Is granted. Further, in the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, the address 006 is assigned to the IC 616, the address 07 is given to the IC 617, the address 08 is given to the IC 618, and the IC 619 is given to the IC 619. Address 09 is given.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619, 622, and 623 may be given the same ID as the unique ID of the IC as an address, and an address including numbers, characters, and symbols different from the unique ID of the IC. May be given.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 whose address is 01 converts serial data into parallel data, and the LED of the top frame lamp of the game frame 11 (in this example, the top frame lamp 281a). To 6 LEDs (281a to 281f) of .about.281l. The serial-parallel conversion IC 612 whose address is 02 converts the serial data into parallel data, and the LED of the ceiling frame lamp of the game frame 11 (in this example, the other six LEDs (281g to 281g to 280g). 281 l)). The serial-parallel conversion IC 613 whose address is 03 converts the serial data into parallel data and supplies the parallel data to the LEDs of the right frame lamp of the game frame 11 (in this example, 6 LEDs (283a to 283f)). Further, the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 whose address is 04 converts the serial data into parallel data, and supplies it to the LED of the left frame lamp of the game frame 11 (in this example, 6 LEDs (282a to 282f)).

  A serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is 05 converts serial data into parallel data, and supplies the parallel data to a lower pan lamp (not shown, four LEDs in this example). The serial-parallel conversion IC 622 whose address is 12 converts the serial data into parallel data, and the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to the eighth pressing operation unit lamp 82h provided in the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81. (In this example, 8 LEDs). The serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is 13 converts the serial data into parallel data, and inputs the red light emission input terminal and the blue light emission of the operation unit center lamp 82A provided in the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81. And the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l (four LEDs in this example) provided in the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81.

  The serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is 06 converts serial data into parallel data, and each movable member provided in the game board 6 (in this example, a role imitating the shape of a beam and a truck). It is supplied to a motor for driving (in this example, two motors (151a, 152a) are each in the opposite direction to the forward direction). The serial-parallel conversion IC 617 whose address is 07 converts serial data into parallel data, and each lamp of the decorative structure (center decoration) provided in the center of the game board 6 (in this example, six LEDs (125a To 125 f)). The serial-parallel conversion IC 618 whose address is 08 converts serial data into parallel data, and supplies it to each stage lamp (in this example, six LEDs (126a to 126f)) provided around the effect display device 9. To do. Further, the serial-parallel conversion IC 619 whose address is 09 converts serial data into parallel data, and the lamp LED (three LEDs (in this example) (in this example) provided around the movable member (variable winning ball device 15 in this example). 127a-127c)).

  In this embodiment, the input ICs 620 and 621 are also given addresses in advance. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of addresses given to the input ICs 620 and 621. The production control microcomputer 100 stores the addresses of the input ICs 620 and 621 in a predetermined address storage area previously provided in the RAM. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the address 10 is assigned to the input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC substrate 605, and the address 11 is assigned to the input IC 621 mounted on the panel side IC substrate 601. ing.

  The input ICs 620 and 621 may be given the same address as the unique ID of the IC, or may be given an address including numbers, characters, and symbols different from the unique ID of the IC. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, the input IC 620 whose address is 10 inputs the detection signals of the first press detector 81a to the fourth press detector 81d provided in the game frame 11 in parallel and converts them into serial data. Convert and output. Further, the input IC 621 whose address is 11 inputs the detection signals of the position sensors 151b and 152b (2 in this example) provided on each movable member of the game board 6 in parallel, converts them into serial data, and outputs them. .

  FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the configuration of each serial-parallel conversion IC 611-619, 622, 623. As illustrated in FIG. 18, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 and 622 include a data latch unit 651, a shift register 652, a header / address detection unit 653, a data buffer 655, and a sync driver 656.

  The data latch unit 651 includes, for example, a latch circuit. When serial data is input, the data latch unit 651 latches the input data bit by bit at the rising timing of the clock signal pulse and outputs the input data to the shift register 652. The shift register 652 sequentially stores data input bit by bit from the data latch unit 651. The shift register 652 shifts stored data bit by bit at the rising timing of the pulse of the clock signal. By repeatedly shifting the stored data bit by bit as described above, the data finally input as serial data (that is, in a serial manner) is stored in the shift register 652.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the format of serial data output from the production control microcomputer 100. FIG. FIG. 19A shows a data format of serial data output as lamp lighting data for individually lighting or extinguishing the LEDs of each lamp provided in the game board 6 or the game frame 11. FIG. 19B shows a format of serial data output as a reset command for resetting the LEDs of the respective lamps provided on the game board 6 and the game frame 11 to turn off all the lights.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, the lamp lighting data is composed of 28 bits, and includes 9-bit header data, mark bits (M), 8-bit addresses, 8-bit data, and end bits (E). .

  The header data represents the head of the data, and is 1FF (h) in this example. The mark bit (M) is a bit (logical value 0 in this example) representing a data delimiter, and is inserted between the header data and the address and between the address and the data. The address is the address of the data-output destination serial-parallel conversion IC. Note that an ID that is a unique serial number of each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 and 622 may be used as the address.

  The data (8 bits) is for controlling the lighting state of the LED of each lamp, and includes, for example, a logical value 1 as a bit corresponding to the LED of the lamp to be lit, Corresponding bits contain the logical value 0. The end bit (E) indicates the end of data, and has a logical value of 0 in this example.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, the reset command is composed of 19 bits, and includes 9-bit header data, mark bits (M), 8-bit reset data, and end bits (E).

  The header data represents the head of the data, and is 1FF (h) in this example. The mark bit (M) is a bit (logical value 0 in this example) representing a data delimiter, and is inserted between the header data and the reset data. The reset data is for resetting the lighting states of the LEDs of the respective lamps so that all the lamps are extinguished. The end bit (E) indicates the end of data, and has a logical value of 0 in this example.

  In this embodiment, the lamp lighting data shown in FIG. 19A or the reset command shown in FIG. 19B is input, and the shift register 652 is repeatedly shifted bit by bit at the rising timing of the clock signal pulse. Will be stored.

  The header / address detector 653 detects the header and address from the data stored in the shift register 652. First, the header / address detection unit 653 constantly detects data from the shift register 652, and confirms whether or not the content of the detected data matches 1FF (h) corresponding to the header data. If it matches the header data (1FF (h)), it is determined that the position that matches the header data is the head of the data, and it is determined that one set of lamp lighting data or reset command is stored in the shift register 652. Next, the header / address detection unit 653 detects the 11th to 18th bit data from the head corresponding to the address from the shift register 652, and whether or not it matches the address previously given to the serial-parallel conversion IC. To check. The board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 are provided with, for example, an address storage register 654 that stores the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC to be mounted, and the header / address detector 653 What is necessary is just to confirm whether or not the address detected from the shift register 652 matches the address stored in the address storage register 654 in advance. If the addresses match, the header / address detection 653 determines that data destined for the serial-parallel conversion IC has been input, and outputs an input capture signal (latch signal) to the data buffer 655. If the addresses do not match, the header / address detection 653 does not output the input capture signal to the data buffer 655. That is, in this case, since the data is not destined for the serial-parallel conversion IC, the data stored in the shift register 652 is discarded without being output to the data buffer 655.

  18 shows a case where the address storage register 654 is provided in advance on the board side IC substrate 601 and each of the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605. However, instead of the address storage register 654, serial-parallel conversion is shown. An address is input from an external hardware circuit (for example, a circuit mounted on the production control board 80) via an address terminal (8 terminals (corresponding to each bit of an 8-bit address)) provided in the IC. You may make it do. Then, by controlling the input of each address terminal to the high level (hereinafter referred to as H level) or the low level (hereinafter referred to as L level) from the external hardware circuit side, the serial-parallel conversion IC is addressed. May be entered. In this case, for example, the external hardware circuit sets the input to the terminal to H level by applying a voltage to the terminal corresponding to any bit of the address, or sets the input to the terminal to L by switching to the ground. Control to level.

  The data buffer 655 is constituted by, for example, a latch register. When an input capture signal is input from the header / address detection unit 653, the 20th to 27th bit data from the head corresponding to the data portion is captured from the shift register 652. Latch with. The data buffer 655 supplies (that is, outputs) the fetched data to the LEDs of each lamp as parallel data (Q0 to Q7).

If the data stored in the shift register 652 is a reset command, the 11th to 18th bits from the beginning all store data having a logical value of 1. In this case, the data buffer 655 determines that a reset command has been input when all data having a logical value of 1 is fetched, and the LEDs of all the lamps are reset and turned off.

  The sync driver 656 inverts and outputs the logical value of the parallel data output from the data buffer 655 based on a predetermined logic inversion setting signal, or outputs it as it is. For example, when the predetermined logic inversion setting signal is High, the signal is turned on when the bit value of the parallel data output from the data buffer 655 is 1 (that is, the corresponding bit value of the lamp lighting data is 1), An ON signal is output to the LED of each lamp. In this embodiment, the set value of the logic inversion setting signal is set in advance in a register or the like provided on the panel side IC substrate 601 or each frame side IC substrate 602-605, and each lamp is set according to the set value set in advance. It is assumed that an ON signal is output to each of the LEDs and the LEDs of each lamp are lit.

  FIG. 20 is a timing diagram showing an example of input timing of serial data and clock signals to the serial-parallel conversion IC and output timing of parallel data. In FIG. 20, a case where lamp lighting data is input as a serial data method will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, the serial data is input to the shift register 652 of the serial-parallel conversion IC in units of 1 bit in the order of header data, mark bits, addresses, mark bits, data, and end bits. The series of data is set as one set. The header / address detection unit 653 does not detect header data until one set of serial data (in this example, lamp lighting data) is completely input, so the output of the data buffer 655 does not change. Therefore, the lighting pattern based on the serial data received last time is output as it is as a parallel data system from the serial-parallel conversion IC.

  When all sets of serial data have been input, the data portion from the data stored in the shift register 652 is latched in the data buffer 655, and a lighting pattern based on the newly received serial data is output as a parallel data system. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, among the parallel data output from the serial-parallel conversion IC, Q0 and Q4 are the rising timing of the pulse of the next clock signal after completion of the serial data input. Immediately, the data is switched to new lighting pattern data. Q1 and Q5 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of one clock from Q0 and Q4. Q2 and Q6 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of two clocks from Q0 and Q4. Further, Q3 and Q7 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of three clocks from Q0 and Q4.

  FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of each of the input ICs 620 and 621. As shown in FIG. 21, in this embodiment, each input IC 620, 621 is composed of a plurality (eight in this example) of D flip-flops 661-668. In this embodiment, detection signals from the first pressure detector 81a to the fourth pressure detector 81d and the first rotation detector 81e to the second rotation detector 81f, or detection signals from the position sensors 151b and 152b. Are input in parallel to the input ICs 620 and 621, and input to any of the D flip-flops 661 to 668 for each detection signal. A clock signal is input to each of the D flip-flops 661 to 668, and each D flip-flop 661 to 668 sequentially performs a shift operation at the rising edge of the clock. The detection signals input in parallel are converted into serial data and output.

  An input capture signal (latch signal) is input to each of the D flip-flops 661 to 668 from the effect control microcomputer 100 at a predetermined timing. When an input capture signal is input, detection signals are output from the first pressure detector 81a to the fourth pressure detector 81d and the first rotation detector 81e, the second rotation detector 81f, or the position sensors 151b and 152b. The D flip-flops 661 to 668 are latched. The latched detection signal is sequentially shifted at the rising edge of the clock and output as a serial data system.

  Next, in the production control microcomputer 100, processing for detecting the rotation direction and the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotation operation unit 812 based on detection signals of the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f will be described. To do.

  FIG. 22 is a timing chart showing detection signals of the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f when the rotation operation unit 812 is rotated. In FIG. 22, (a) shows a timing chart when the rotation operation unit 812 rotates to the right, and (b) shows a timing chart when the rotation operation unit 812 rotates to the left. In the figure, “L” indicates the L level and “H” indicates the H level. In addition, the timing indicated by the dotted line in the figure indicates the timing at which the click position is reached in the detection signals of the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f.

  As shown to (a), at the time of right rotation, the signal level of the 1st rotation detector 81e and the signal level of the 2nd rotation detector 81f are "L, L"-> "H, L"-> "H, H" → “L, H” → “L, L” (“the signal level of the first rotation detector 81e, the signal level of the second rotation detector 81f”) changes the signal pattern four times. Also, as shown in (b), during left rotation, the signal level of the first rotation detector 81e and the signal level of the second rotation detector 81f are changed from “L, H” → “H, H” → “H, The signal pattern changes four times such as “L” → “L, L” → “L, H” (“the signal level of the first rotation detector 81e, the signal level of the second rotation detector 81f”). Thus, the pattern of changes in the signal level of the first rotation detector 81e and the signal level of the second rotation detector 81f is different between the right rotation and the left rotation. Thereby, the production control microcomputer 100 determines in which direction the rotation operation unit 812 is rotated by performing a process of determining in what pattern these detection signals change. To do.

  Further, as shown in (a), when the right position is rotated, the protrusion 8151 of the protrusion 8150 on the cover plate 815 is continuously formed on the dial base 816 when the click position changes according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 812. The first change pattern “H, H” → “L, H” and “L, L” → One of the two types of change patterns occurs with the second change pattern “H, L”. As a result, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a process of determining that the rotation operation is performed clockwise by one click position when these two types of change patterns occur during the clockwise rotation. The reason for making such a determination is that, as described above, when the projection 8151 passes the apex of the convex portion between the concave portions, the projection 8151 is guided to the bottom of the next concave portion unless it is rotated in the reverse direction. This is because it can be determined that the rotation operation for one click has been performed when the projection 8151 passes through the apex of the convex portion between the concave portions. Here, for example, 24 click positions are provided, and the rotation operation for one click position is the rotation operation of 15 degrees as the rotation angle around the rotation center.

  On the other hand, as shown in (b), when the left position is rotated, the protrusions 8151 of the cover plate 815 are continuously formed on the dial base 816 when the click position changes according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812. When passing through the vertices of the convex portions at the intermediate points between the click positions, the first change pattern “H, H” → “L, H” and “L, L” → “H, L” ”Occurs in the second change pattern. As a result, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a process of determining that the leftward rotation is performed by one click position when these two types of change patterns are generated during the left rotation. The reason for making such a determination is the same reason as the determination reason at the time of right rotation.

  It should be noted that, based on the change in the signal level when the projection 8151 of the cover plate 815 enters the bottom of each recess in the dial base 816, it is determined that the rotation operation has been performed by one click position (same for the left and right rotation operations). It may be. For example, at the time of right rotation in FIG. 22A, a first change pattern “H, L” → “L, L” and a second change pattern “H, L” → “H, H” Since one of the two types of change patterns occurs, it is determined that the rotation operation has been performed clockwise by one click position when such a signal level change occurs. Further, during the left rotation of FIG. 22B, a first change pattern “L, L” → “L, H” and a second change pattern “H, H” → “H, L” Since one of the two types of change patterns occurs, it is determined that the rotation operation has been performed to the left by one click position when such a signal level change occurs.

  FIG. 23 is a table showing a rotation determination table used by the production control microcomputer 100 to determine the rotation direction and the rotation amount based on the detection signals of the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f. FIG. The rotation determination table is stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, and is read and used to determine the rotation direction and the rotation amount.

  In the effect control microcomputer 100, the levels of the detection signals of the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f are confirmed at predetermined intervals, and when the confirmation is confirmed, the detection signal confirmed this time is confirmed. The present determination data indicating the level of the above is stored in the RAM as the previous determination data. Each time the level of the detection signal is newly confirmed, processing for updating the previous determination data is performed. If the previous determination data is stored in this manner, the determination of the rotation direction and the determination of the rotation amount as described above can be performed based on the relationship between the previous determination data and the current determination data. For example, as shown in FIG. 23, when the previous determination data is a change pattern “H, H” and the current determination data is “L, H”, it is determined that the rotation direction is right rotation and the rotation amount is 15 degrees. Is done. Similarly, when the previous determination data is “L, L” and the current determination data is a change pattern “H, L”, it is determined that the rotation direction is right rotation and the rotation amount is 15 degrees. When the previous determination data is “H, L” and the current determination data is a change pattern of “L, L”, it is determined that the rotation direction is counterclockwise and the rotation amount is 15 degrees. Similarly, when the previous determination data is “L, H” and the current determination data is a change pattern “H, H”, it is determined that the rotation direction is counterclockwise and the rotation amount is 15 degrees.

  In addition, a change pattern in which the previous determination data is “H, L” and the current determination data is “L, L”, a change pattern in which the previous determination data is “H, L” and the current determination data is “H, H”, and the previous determination For each of the change pattern in which the data is “L, L” and the current determination data is “L, H” and the change pattern in which the previous determination data is “H, H” and the current determination data is “H, L”, As described above, since the signal level changes when the projection 8151 of the cover plate 815 enters the bottom of each concave portion of the dial base 816, in this embodiment, the amount corresponding to one click position is obtained for the reason described above. Only the rotation amount, that is, the rotation amount is not determined to be 15 degrees.

  Next, the timing when the operation of the operation unit 81 is requested and the display operation performed in the effect display device according to the operation of the operation unit 81 will be described. FIG. 24 is a display screen diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 9 when the effect mode can be selected.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, among the effects performed in the effect display device 9, an effect mode for displaying a background image of a decorative design can be selected from a plurality of predetermined effect modes. There are three types of effect modes, such as effect mode A (for example, mountain effect mode), effect mode B (for example, night sky effect mode), and effect mode C (for example, sea effect mode). Yes. In the initial state after starting up the pachinko gaming machine 1 (after turning on the power), the production mode is selected as one of the three production modes, such as the production mode A, for example. As shown below, according to the operation of the operation unit 81, it is possible to select (change the selection) an effect mode desired by the player.

  24A, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 901, 902, and 903 are stopped and displayed, and the background image of the effect mode A is displayed as the background image. . If the condition that any one of the direction selection operation and the determination operation is performed by the pressing operation unit 811 when the decorative display is not displayed on the effect display device 9 is satisfied, (b ), An effect mode selection acceptance image that is an image indicating that the selection of the effect mode is accepted is displayed. In the effect mode selection acceptance image, an operation guidance display for explaining how to operate the operation unit 81 is performed in selecting the effect mode. For example, in (b), a display for explaining that the effect mode is determined by operating the rotation operation unit 812 to select the effect mode item and pressing the central portion of the pressing operation unit 811 is performed. Yes. In the effect mode selection acceptance image, decorative symbols 901, 902, and 903 are reduced and displayed in the lower right area of the display screen.

  After the effect mode selection acceptance image is displayed for a predetermined period, as shown in (c), an image showing three effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C that can be selected is displayed. Further, in this case, an operation guidance display is displayed on the effect display device 9, and in the operation unit 81, the operation unit center lamp 82 </ b> A emits blue light so that characters such as “turn!” The row is lit up and a display prompting the player to operate the rotation operation unit 812 is made. When the rotation operation unit 812 is rotated while such image display or operation unit display is being performed, the item of the effect mode to be selected according to the rotation operation can be changed. For example, selectable effect modes as shown in (c) are displayed as icon images 904 to 906 corresponding to each effect mode, and icon images corresponding to the currently selected effect mode (904 in the case of (c)). In the case of (d), 905) is displayed in a specific color (hereinafter referred to as a selected color) so that it can be identified in relation to an icon image corresponding to an unselected effect mode. Is done. Thereby, the selected production mode is specified. In this way, an image that specifies the selected effect mode is referred to as an effect mode selection image. When the rotation operation unit 812 is rotated in this way, as shown in (d), the icon image to be the selected color is sequentially changed according to the rotation operation, and the item of the effect mode to be selected can be changed. it can. In the initial stage where the display of (c) is performed, the currently selected icon image is set as the selection color, and then the icon image set as the selection color is changed according to the rotation operation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, the case where the selection color of the icon image indicating each of the effect modes A to C is sequentially changed according to the rotation operation from the rotation operation unit 812 is shown. The mode is not limited to that shown in FIG. For example, the icon image corresponding to the currently selected effect mode is always displayed at the top (the position of the icon image corresponding to the effect mode A shown in FIG. 24C). You may make it rotate the pattern drawn in the icon image which shows each production mode AC according to rotation operation. For example, the state in which the icon image corresponding to the effect mode A shown in FIG. 24C is selected and displayed at the top is shifted to the state in which the effect mode B is selected by the rotation operation from the rotation operation unit 812. In FIG. 24 (d), the design in the icon image displayed at the top is changed to the design of the moon and stars indicating the production mode B, and the production mode B is selected. The icon image displayed at the lower left is changed to the sea pattern indicating the effect mode C, and the icon image displayed at the lower right is changed to the mountain image indicating the effect mode A. May be.

  When the rotation operation unit 812 performs a left rotation operation, a display for selecting an effect mode is performed in the order of effect mode A → effect mode B → effect mode C → effect mode A. . When a clockwise rotation operation is performed, a display for selecting an effect mode is performed in the order of effect mode A → effect mode C → effect mode B → effect mode A. When a rotation operation is performed by the rotation operation unit 812, the operation unit center lamp 82A emits red light in the operation unit 81, and a character string such as “Press!” Blinks on the pressing operation unit 811. The player is prompted to operate the pressing operation unit 811.

  And if the center part of the press operation part 811 is pressed, according to the press operation, the selected production mode will be determined as a production mode to be selected from now on, and the production selected as shown in (d). An effect mode determination image for displaying a message indicating that the mode has been determined is displayed. Thereafter, a background image corresponding to the determined effect mode is displayed as shown in (e). In addition, when the condition for starting the variable display is established at a stage before the production mode is determined, the production mode is not changed, and the production mode selected before the production mode reception image is displayed is continued. The When the condition for starting the variable display is established at the stage before the effect mode is determined, it is determined that the effect mode selected in the effect mode selection image at that time is selected as a new effect mode. It may be.

  The condition that enables the selection of the effect mode is that any one of the direction selection operation and the determination operation by the pressing operation unit 811 when the decorative display is not displayed on the effect display device 9. It is established when Therefore, the player can change the effect mode at a time that he / she likes, and can change the mood by changing the effect mode and continue the game.

  As described above, the player can arbitrarily select the effect mode according to his / her preference from a plurality of types of effect modes based on the operation of the operation unit 81, so that the degree of freedom of effect display is increased. , You can improve the fun of the game.

  Each of FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 is a display screen diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 9 when it is determined to be a specific type of reach called chance reach. FIG. 25 shows an image when the effect display of the super reach is performed in the reach display mode by performing the change display with the change pattern of the reach F, and FIG. 26 shows the change in the change pattern of the reach E. An image when the super reach effect display is not performed in the reach display mode by the display is shown.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the reach display mode effect display (hereinafter referred to as reach effect display) is performed on the effect display device 9, an operation display in which the effect display changes according to the operation of the operation unit 81 is performed. It is.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 (a), when the left decorative design 901 and the right decorative design 903 stop at the same design while the center decorative design 902 is changing, a reach state is reached and a reach effect display is performed. In each of the above reach E and reach F, a reach rotation operation request image for requesting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 is displayed as a reach effect display as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. . In the reach rotation operation request image, if an image indicating a predetermined situation is displayed in response to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812, it indicates that it will be super reach (“Please operate the rotation ring and shoot! In this case, an operation guidance display for explaining how to operate the operation unit 81 is performed. Further, in this case, in the operation unit 81, the operation unit center lamp 82A emits blue light so that a character string such as “Turn !!!!” is lit on the pressing operation unit 811. A display prompting an operation 812 is performed.

  Then, after the operation guidance display is performed for a predetermined period, an image for performing an air hockey mini game as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 (c) and (d) is displayed. When the rotation operation unit 812 is rotated while the image is displayed, a mallet 908 as an impact tool for hitting the pack 907 is displayed as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. An operation display (for example, a display in which the mallet 908 operates on a predetermined circumference in accordance with the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812) is performed, and within a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) according to the operation. A mini game of the type in which the player side (side where only the mallet 908 is displayed) and the pachinko gaming machine 1 side (side where the character 909 is displayed) competes in an air hockey game is performed.

  In the mini-game, as shown in (c) and (d), as the game progresses, the scores of both players will be displayed ((c) in FIG. 25 and (c) and (d) in FIG. 26. ), The player side has 0 points and the pachinko gaming machine 1 side has 5 points. In FIG. 25D, the player side has 1 point and the pachinko gaming machine 1 side has 5 points), and the remaining time of the game is also displayed ( 25 (c) and FIG. 26 (c), 7 seconds, FIG. 25 (d) 3 seconds, FIG. 26 (d) 0 seconds). In such a mini game, when the player has scored before the predetermined time elapses (for example, when one score as shown in (d) of FIG. 25) is reached, (e) of FIG. After the fact that the super reach has been displayed as shown, a press operation request image at the time of super reach requesting the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 811 is displayed as shown in (f). In the case of the variation pattern in reach F, the effect display contents are determined in advance so that the display regarding the situation of the mini game and the super reach is performed, and the super reach display as shown in FIG. When it becomes a mode, a condition for displaying the effect of super reach is established.

  On the other hand, in such a mini game, when the player does not score before the predetermined time elapses (for example, as shown in FIG. 26D), or until the predetermined time elapses. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has scored (not shown), a message indicating that the normal reach has been reached is displayed as shown in FIG. 26 (e), and thereafter, an effect display given as the normal reach is performed. In the case of the variation pattern in reach E, the effect display contents are determined in advance so that display regarding such a mini game situation and normal reach is performed.

  In the press operation request image at the time of super reach as shown in (f) of FIG. 25, the press operation unit 811 is pressed to display an image indicating a predetermined situation (“Please save power by hitting the button repeatedly” ! ”), An operation guidance display for explaining how to operate the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 is performed. In this case, in the operation unit 81, the operation unit center lamp 82 </ b> A emits red light so that a character string such as “Press!” Flashes on the pressing operation unit 811, and the player presses the pressing operation unit. A display prompting the operation 811 is displayed.

  It should be noted that when displaying a press operation request image during super reach, the rotary operation unit 812 is rotated to display an image indicating a predetermined situation ("turn the jog dial to save power!"). Thus, an operation guidance display explaining how to operate the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 may be performed. Further, in this case, in the operation unit 81, the operation unit center lamp 82A emits blue light so that a character string such as “Turn !!!!” is lit on the pressing operation unit 811. A display prompting the user to perform the operation 812 may be performed.

  Then, after the operation guidance display is performed for a predetermined period, as shown in (g) of FIG. 25, the power value displayed in the bar graph format increases as the number of pressing operations of the pressing operation unit 811 increases. A chance display is performed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIGS. 25 (h) and (i), an effect display for determining the stop symbol of the center ornament symbol is performed according to the accumulated power. When it is determined to be a big hit, the big hit display result is displayed as shown in (j) of FIG. 25. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a big hit, the lost display result is displayed. As shown in (h) and (i) of FIG. 25, in the effect display image for determining the stop symbol of the center ornament symbol displayed according to the accumulated power, the larger the accumulated power, the larger the jackpot display result. It is desirable to make the image reminiscent of becoming.

  As described above, the player can be involved in the progress of the effect display such as the reach display mode based on the operation of the operation unit 81, so that the game effect mode is diversified and the interest of the game is improved. Can be made.

  FIG. 27 is a display screen diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device 9 when it is determined to have a predetermined type of reach called character selection reach.

  As shown in (a), after reaching the reach state, as a reach effect display, as shown in (b), a direction selection operation of the pressing operation unit 811 for selecting a character within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). A reach direction selection operation request image for requesting is displayed. In the reach direction selection operation request image, an operation guidance display is provided to explain how to operate the operation unit 81 in selecting a character. For example, in (b), a display explaining that a character item is selected by a direction selection operation by the pressing operation unit 811 within a predetermined time is displayed. In the reach direction selection operation request image, decorative symbols 901, 902, and 903 are reduced and displayed in the upper right area of the display screen. Further, the remaining time during which the character can be selected is displayed in the lower right area of the display screen.

  In the reach direction selection operation request image, images indicating four characters A to D that can be selected are displayed. In this case, in the operation unit 81, the first pressing operation unit lamp 81a to the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 81d are caused to emit light, and a display for prompting the player to perform a selection operation by the pressing operation unit 811 is performed. When the direction selection operation is performed by the pressing operation unit 811 while such an image display or operation unit display is performed, the item of the character to be selected can be changed according to the direction selection operation. For example, selectable characters such as (b) are displayed as icon images 910 to 913 corresponding to the respective characters, and icon images corresponding to the currently selected character (910 and (c in the case of (b)). ) Is displayed in a specific color (hereinafter referred to as a selected color), so that it can be identified in relation to an icon image corresponding to a non-selected effect mode. Thereby, the selected character is specified. In this manner, an image that identifies the selected character is referred to as a character selection image.

  When the reach direction selection operation request image shown in FIG. 27B is displayed, for example, a character string such as “Select!” May be blinked or lit in the pressing operation unit 811. . In this case, for example, a character string such as “Choose!” May be printed on the display member 811A of the pressing operation unit 811 using a paint different from the red paint and the blue paint (for example, a green paint). Then, for example, by making the operation unit center lamp 82A, which is a multi-color LED, blink or light in green (the green single color LED may be blinked or lighted), the pressing operation unit 811 may “select”! The character string may blink or be lit.

  When the direction selection operation is performed by the pressing operation unit 811, as shown in (c), the icon image as the selection color is sequentially changed according to the direction selection operation, and the item of the character to be selected can be changed. . When a predetermined time elapses, the character selected at that time is determined as the character to be selected, and a message indicating that the selected character has been determined is displayed as shown in (c). A character selection decision image is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (d), the determined character C is displayed in the reach effect display.

  In this way, the player can arbitrarily select a character from a plurality of types of characters according to his / her preference based on the operation of the operation unit 81, so that the degree of freedom of effect display is increased, and the game Can improve the interest of

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (including steps S10 to S15, S44, and S45).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing for the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (Step S7). If it is confirmed that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing in step S41 and step S42, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of step S11 and step S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout An initial value is set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to a control state such as a stop flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for informing that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets an abnormality notification prohibition flag (step S44) and sets a value corresponding to the prohibition period value in the prohibition period timer (step S45). The prohibition period value is a value indicating a period during which an abnormal winning notification described later is prohibited. The abnormality notification prohibition flag is a flag indicating that notification of an abnormal winning is prohibited, and is maintained in the set state until the prohibition period timer times out. Therefore, the start of the abnormal winning notification is prohibited for a predetermined period after the initialization notification is started in the effect display device 9.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes random number circuit setting processing for initial setting of the random number circuit (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program so as to cause the random number circuit to update the value of the random R. In the random number circuit setting process, the CPU 56 also executes a random number circuit confirmation process for confirming the state of the random number circuit. In the random number circuit confirmation process, the CPU 56 monitors a random number confirmation signal output from the random number circuit for a predetermined time. The random number confirmation signal is ON when the clock signal generation circuit built in the random number circuit normally outputs the internal clock signal, and otherwise (for example, when the level of the internal clock signal decreases) Will be off). If the CPU 56 detects the OFF state of the random number confirmation signal continuously for a predetermined time, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormality has occurred in the random number circuit built in the game control microcomputer 560 and notifies the random circuit error of the main board 31. A process of transmitting a random number circuit error designation command for designating to the sub-board is executed. If the OFF state of the random number confirmation signal is not detected continuously for a predetermined time, the CPU 56 determines that the random number circuit is operating normally, and proceeds to step S15 as it is.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number for determining the value. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S36 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, These state determinations are performed (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a display control process for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage display 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 (step S22). For the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S34 and S35.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process for notifying an abnormal winning when it detects that a game ball has won a prize winning opening at a time other than the regular time (step S23: abnormal winning notifying process).

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S24). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S25 and S26).

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Decide a special symbol's off symbol (stop symbol) (for determining off symbol)
(2) Random 2: Determines the special symbol stop symbol when generating a big hit (for big hit symbol determination)
(3) Random 3: Determine the variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5: Random 4 initial value is determined (for determining random 4 initial value)
In step S24 in the game control process shown in FIG. 29, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot symbol determining random number of (2) and the random number for determining per regular symbol of (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may make it use random numbers other than the random number of said (1)-(5). In this embodiment, the big hit determination random number is a random number generated by the hardware (random number circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 560. However, the big hit determination random number is generated by the game control microcomputer 560 as the big hit determination random number. Software random numbers generated based on a program may be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S27). In the special symbol process, the corresponding symbol is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S29). In this embodiment, in step S29, the game control microcomputer 560 adds MODE data or EXT data (addresses of transmission destination serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619, 622, and 623) to the effect control command. Header data, mark bits, and end bits are added to the generated MODE data or EXT data) to perform transmission control. The effect control command is converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 78 and transmitted to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (Step S31). Specifically, the payout control is performed according to the winning detection based on any one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls. In the prize ball process, a process for determining whether or not a prize ball error has occurred is also performed. For example, when there is a discrepancy between the set value of the number of prize balls and the actual number of payouts, the CPU 56 determines that a prize ball error has occurred, and causes the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 to Control is performed to transmit a prize ball error notification designation command designating notification of occurrence of a prize ball error.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes an error detection process based on the detection signal of the full switch, the ball break switch, and the door opening sensor 155 (step S32). Specifically, a full tank error notification designation command for designating notification to the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 that a full tank error has occurred in response to the detection signal of the full tank switch. Send. In addition, in response to a detection signal from the ball-out switch, a ball-out error notification designation command for designating notification to the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 that a ball-out error has occurred. Send. In response to the detection signal of the door opening sensor 155, a door opening error notification designation command for designating that the door opening error has occurred is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. To do.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S33: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S34). For example, if the variation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a special signal on the special symbol display 8 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S35). For example, when the start flag relating to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S36), and the process ends.
With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S35 (excluding step S30) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table (see FIG. 31A) used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table (FIG. 31B) used in a probability change state. See). The numerical values described in the left column of FIGS. 31A and 31B are jackpot determination values. When the value of the random R matches any one of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 56 determines that the jackpot is to be made. The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the jackpot determination random value. If the jackpot determination random value matches the jackpot determination value shown in FIG. Is determined to be a big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit).

  The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot that shifts the gaming state after the jackpot game to a probability variation state in which there is a high probability of being determined to be a jackpot compared to the normal state. Usually, the big hit is a big hit that shifts the gaming state after the big hit game to a state that is not a probable change state. Note that the number of rounds in the case of a probable big hit and the normal big hit is larger than that in the case of a small hit and a sudden probable big hit, for example, 15 rounds.

  The small hit is a big hit in which the number of times of opening of the big winning opening is allowed up to two in the big hit gaming state. Note that when the small hit game ends, the gaming state does not shift to the probable change state. Suddenly probable jackpot is a jackpot where the number of times the big prize opening is allowed is 2 in the big hit gaming state, but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and the gaming state after the big hit game is shifted to the probable state It ’s a big hit. That is, in this embodiment, the number of rounds is the same between the sudden probability big hit and the small hit.

  In addition, in the big hit game of sudden probability change big hit, the number of rounds is smaller than that in the case of normal big hit and probability variable big hit, and the allowance opening allowance time of each round (for example, 29 seconds in the case of normal big hit and probability variable big hit) On the other hand, 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the case of the normal big hit and the probability variation big hit, but only the number of rounds may be reduced, or only the allowance opening allowance time may be shortened.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern used in this embodiment. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type).
In FIG. 32, “EXT” indicates EXT data of the second byte in the effect control command having a two-byte structure. The “variation time” indicates the variation time of special symbols (variation display period of identification information).

  “Normal fluctuation” is a fluctuation pattern without a reach mode. “Normal fluctuation / shortening” is a fluctuation pattern without a reach mode and a fluctuation time shorter than “normal fluctuation”. “Normal reach” is a variation pattern that is accompanied by a reach mode but whose display result (stop symbol) does not become a big hit symbol. “Reach A” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “normal reach”. When the reach mode is different, a change mode (speed, rotation direction, etc.), a character image, or the like of a different mode appears in the effect display device 9 during the reach change time (a period during which the reach effect is performed), or the effect display device 9 The background design is different. For example, in “normal reach”, a reach mode is realized by only one type of change mode, whereas in “reach A”, a reach mode including a plurality of change modes having different speeds and directions of change is realized. Further, “reach A / shortening” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “reach A”, but reach variation time is shorter than “reach A”. “Reach A / Extension” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “Reach A”, but the reach variation time is longer than “Reach A”.

  “Reach B” is a fluctuation pattern having a reach mode different from “Normal reach” and “Reach A”. Further, “reach B / shortening” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “reach B”, but the reach variation time is shorter than “reach B”. “Reach B / extension” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “reach B”, but reach variation time is longer than “reach B”. “Reach C” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “normal reach”, “reach A”, and “reach B”. “Reach C / shortening” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “reach C”, but reach variation time is shorter than “reach C”.

  “Super reach A” is a variation pattern having a reach mode different from “normal reach”, “reach A”, “reach B”, and “reach C”. is there. “Super reach B” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “normal reach”, “reach A”, “reach B”, “reach C” and “super reach A”. This is a variation pattern. “Reach A / Accuracy” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “Normal reach”, “Reach A”, “Reach B”, “Reach C”, “Super reach A” and “Super reach B”. It should be noted that the reach form of “reach A / accuracy” is a reach form similar to “reach A”.

  “Reach D” is different from “normal reach”, “reach A”, “reach B”, “reach C”, “super reach A”, “super reach B” and “reach A / accuracy”. And a variation pattern having a reach mode by character selection reach as described above. “Reach E” means “Normal Reach”, “Reach A”, “Reach B”, “Reach C”, “Super Reach A”, “Super Reach B”, “Reach A / Random” and “Reach D”. Is a variation pattern having a reach manner that is different from that of the reach reach as described above and not a super reach among the chance reach as described above. “Reach F” means “Normal Reach”, “Reach A”, “Reach B”, “Reach C”, “Super Reach A”, “Super Reach B”, “Reach A / Outstanding”, “Reach D”. And “reach E” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from that described above, and is a change pattern having a reach form when becoming a super reach among the chance reach as described above.

  In this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 is “reach A / shortening”, “reach A”, “reach B / shortening”, “reach B”, “reach C / shortening”. "Reach C", "Super Reach A", "Super Reach B", "Reach D" or "Reach E". In the case of a probable big hit, the microcomputer 560 for game control includes “reach A / extension”, “reach B / extension”, “reach C / shortening”, “reach C”, “super reach A”, “ Select "Super Reach B" or "Reach E". In case of sudden big odds, select “Reach A / Random”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the fluctuation pattern selected only in the case of the normal big hit, the fluctuation pattern selected only in the case of the probability big hit, and the normal big hit and the probability variable big hit can be selected. There are fluctuation patterns.

  In the short-time state, the fluctuation patterns of “normal fluctuation / shortening”, “reach A / shortening”, “reach B / shortening”, and “reach C / shortening” are selected. In the non-time-short state, other variation patterns are selected. However, the variation pattern of “reach A / accuracy” is used in both the short-time state and the non-short-time state.

  In this embodiment, when a big hit occurs and the big hit game ends, the gaming state becomes a short-time state until the execution of the variation (variation display) of 100 special symbols is completed. In addition, when it is decided to change to the probable state when starting the variable display of the special symbol when the big hit game is started when the variable display is finished, the game state is changed to the probable state when the big hit game is ended. To be migrated. If the gaming state at that time is a probability variation state, the probability variation state is continued.

  After the transition to the probability changing state, the state of the probability changing state is short and the time is shortened until the execution of the variation of the special symbol 100 (variation display) is completed. In addition, in the non-probability change state after the big hit game is over, the game state is changed to the normal state (the game state that is not the probability change state and not the short-time state) when the execution of 100 special symbol changes (change display) is completed. Transition.

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. In this embodiment, the effect control command is converted from parallel data to serial data by the serial output circuit 78 and transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the format of the effect control command transmitted as the serial data method. As shown in FIG. 33, when transmitting the effect control command, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first adds header data and mark bits to MODE data (MODE data to which an address is added), Transmission control is performed by adding an end bit. Then, the serial output circuit 78 converts the MODE data to which the header data, the address, the mark bit, and the end bit are added into serial data, and transmits the serial data to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs transmission control by adding header data, mark bits, and end bits to EXT data (EXT data with an address added). Then, the serial output circuit 78
Converts the EXT data to which the header data, the address, the mark bit, and the end bit are added into serial data, and transmits the serial data to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 34, commands 8001 (H) to 8012 (H) are effect control commands (variation) for designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of special symbols. Pattern command). The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives any of the commands 8001 (H) to 8012 (H), the production display device 9 performs control so as to start the variable display of the decorative symbols. In this embodiment, since the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the decoration symbol are synchronized (the variation display start time and the variation display end time are the same), the variation pattern (variation time) of the decoration symbol Determining also means determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of the big hit game. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the decorative symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H). Therefore, the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specifying commands.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the decorative symbol variation display (variation) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the decorative symbol variation display (variation) and derives and displays the display result. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration. The command 9F55 (H) is an effect control command (random number circuit error designation) for designating notification of a random number circuit error of the main board 31 when the occurrence of an abnormality in the random number circuit is detected in the random number circuit check process in the main process. Command).

  The commands A001 to A004 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). The jackpot start designation commands include jackpot start 1 designation to jackpot start designation 4 designation commands depending on the type of jackpot. The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) displays a jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game and an effect control command (special jackpot end 1 designation command: ending) that specifies that the jackpot game is a non-probable big hit (usually a big hit) 1 designation command). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a probable big hit (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command). is there.

  Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (abnormal winning notification designation command) for instructing abnormal winning notification.

  The command FF02 (H) notifies that a full tank error has occurred when the lower pan (the surplus ball receiving tray 4) is full (that is, when the full tank switch is turned on). This is an effect control command to be designated (full error notification designation command). The command FF01 (H) is an effect control command for designating cancellation of the full-tan error notification when the full-plate state of the lower pan is released (that is, when the full-tan switch is turned off). (Full tank error release specification command).

  The command FF04 (H) designates that when the game frame 11 is in an open state (that is, when a detection signal from the door open sensor 155 is detected), notification that a door open error has occurred is notified. This is a command (door opening error notification designation command). The command FF03 (H) is an effect control command (door opening error release specifying command) that specifies that the notification of the door opening error is released when the open state of the game frame 11 is released.

  Command FF06 (H) is an effect control command (out of ball) that specifies that a ball out error has occurred when the ball is out of state (that is, when the ball out switch is turned on). Error notification designation command). The command FF05 (H) is an effect control command (ball-out error cancel designation command) that designates cancellation of the ball-out error notification when the ball-out state is released.

  The command FF08 (H) is an effect control command (prize ball error notification designation command) for designating notification that a prize ball error has occurred when a prize ball error has occurred. The command FF07 (H) is an effect control command (prize ball error cancel designation command) that designates canceling the notification of the prize ball error when the prize ball error is canceled.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 34, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transmission timing of the effect control command. As shown in FIG. 35, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a change pattern command and a display result specifying command at the start of change. When the variable display time has elapsed, a symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted.

  Before transmitting the variation pattern command, a background designation command for designating a background image in the effect display device 9 according to the gaming state (for example, normal state / short time state / probability variation state) may be transmitted. Further, an effect control command indicating the number of reserved memories may be transmitted following the display result specifying command.

  FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of the special symbol process (step S27) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, if the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the start winning port 13 is turned on, that is, a start winning is generated. If so, start port switch passage processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed.

The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.
Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. The game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of reserved memories (the number of stored winning prizes) when the special symbol variation display can be started. The reserved memory number can be confirmed by the count value of the reserved memory number counter. If the number of reserved memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to step S301.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. The stop symbol after the special symbol variable display is determined. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variation display time: the time from when the variation display is started until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is the variation time of the special symbol variation display. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result specifying command transmission process (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. The variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process has elapsed (the variation time timer set in step S301 is subtracted and updated as time elapses, and the variation time timer is timed out, that is, the variation time timer value is Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the special symbol display 8 is stopped and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. Further, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 100. When the big hit flag is set and the small hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbols when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. A jackpot end 2 designation command is sent if the probability variation jackpot flag or the sudden probability variation jackpot flag is set, and a jackpot end 1 designation command is sent if the probability variation jackpot flag or the sudden probability variation jackpot flag is not set For example, the control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. If the probability variation big hit flag or sudden probability variation big win flag is set, the set flag (probability big hit flag or sudden probability variation big flag) is reset and the probability variation flag is set to change the gaming state to the certain probability state. Perform processing to shift to. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). It should be noted that although the pre-opening process for small hits is executed for each round, the pre-opening process for small hits is also a process for starting a small hit game when starting the first round.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. A control for transmitting a presentation control command for round display during the small hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for the presentation control, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended, such as transmitting a big hit end 1 designation command, is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the reserved storage number is 4 which is the upper limit value (step S211). If the number of reserved memories is 4, the process is terminated.

  If the number of reserved memories is not 4, the value of the reserved memory number counter indicating the number of reserved memories is incremented by 1 (step S212). Further, the CPU 56 extracts software random numbers (counter value for generating a big hit symbol determination random number, etc.) and random R (big hit determination random number), and uses them as an extracted random number value of the reserved memory number counter. A process of storing in the storage area in the storage buffer corresponding to the value is executed (step S213). In step S213, the CPU 56 extracts random values 1 to 3 (see FIG. 30) as software random numbers, and extracts the random R by reading the count value of the random number circuit. In the reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is secured. Further, a counter for generating a jackpot symbol determination random number and the like and a reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  39 and 40 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 checks the value of the number of reserved storage (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of reserved memories is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step). S52). Then, the value of the reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S53). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n−1. To store. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories is extracted always matches the order of the number of reserved memories = 1, 2, 3 and 4. Yes.

  Then, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area (step S61), and executes a jackpot determination module (step S62). The big hit judgment module compares the big hit judgment value (see Fig. 31) determined in advance with the big hit judgment random number, and if they match, the big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit) or small hit This is a program for executing the process to be determined.

  Note that when the gaming state is in the probability variation state, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot determination value in the table in which the jackpot determination value as shown in FIG. 31B is set, and the gaming state is in the normal state (non-probability variation state). Is, the jackpot determination value in the table in which the jackpot determination value as shown in FIG. 31 (A) is set is used. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S63), the process proceeds to step S81. Note that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol display 8 a big hit symbol. It is also a thing.

  If it is decided not to win, the CPU 56 reads out the design determining random number from the random number buffer area (step S64), and determines the stop design based on the out-of-design determining random number (step S65). In this case, an off symbol (for example, any of even symbols) is determined.

Further, when the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state is set (step S66), the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is decremented by 1 (step S67). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0, a time reduction end flag is set in order to shift the gaming state to the non-time reduction state when the variable display ends (steps S68 and S69). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

  In step S81, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag. Then, the big hit symbol determination random number is read from the random number buffer area (step S82), and the big hit symbol (for example, one of the odd symbols) as the stop symbol is determined based on the big hit symbol determination random number (step S83). Here, the stop symbol is determined without distinguishing between the probable big hit and the normal big hit.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation jackpot flag if it is determined to be a probability variation jackpot (steps S84 and S85). If it is determined that the sudden probability change big hit is suddenly set, the sudden probability change big hit flag is set (steps S86 and S87). If it is determined to be a small hit, a small hit flag is set (steps S88 and S89). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S90). When the probability variation big hit flag or the sudden probability variation big hit flag is set, the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state when the big hit game is finished.

  In this embodiment, whether or not to make a big hit and the type of jackpot are determined based on the big hit determination random number (see FIG. 31), but the big hit is determined based on the big hit determination random number. When a predetermined big hit symbol (predetermined probability variable big hit symbol or sudden probability variable big hit symbol) is determined based on the random number for determining the big hit symbol You may make it control to a probability change state.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number buffer area (step S100). Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination random number (step S101).

  Here, when the gaming state is the non-time saving state and it is determined to be out of play, “normal variation”, “normal reach”, “reach D” or “reach E” is selected (FIG. 32). reference). If the gaming state is a non-time-saving state and it is determined to be a big hit, “reach A”, “reach A / extension”, “reach B”, “reach B / extension”, “reach C” ”,“ Super Reach A ”,“ Super Reach B ”,“ Reach A / Accuracy ”,“ Reach D ”,“ Reach E ”or“ Reach F ”(see FIG. 32). “Leach A / Extension”, “Reach B / Extension”, “Reach C”, “Super Reach A”, “Super Reach B” or “Reach F” ”Is selected. In addition, when it is determined that the sudden probability change is a big hit, “reach A / accuracy” is selected. If it is determined to be a big hit (including the case where it is determined to be a small hit) among the big hits (including the case where it is determined to be a small hit), “ Select Reach A, Reach B, Reach C, Super Reach A, Reach D, Reach E, or Reach F.

  When the game state is the short time state and it is determined to be out of play, “normal variation / shortening” is selected (see FIG. 32). If the gaming state is a short-time state and it has been decided to win the game, select “Reach A / Shorten”, “Reach B / Short”, “Reach C / Short” or “Reach A / Success” Select (see FIG. 32). When it is determined to be a promising big hit out of the big hits, “reach C / shortening” is selected. When it is decided to suddenly change the probability big hit, select “reach A / accuracy”. When it is determined that the big hit is usually a big hit (including the case where it is decided to be a small hit), “reach A / shortening”, “reach B / shortening” or “reach C”・ Select “Short”.

  In order to facilitate the selection as described above, a variation pattern table is used according to the game state (whether or not it is a short-time state) and the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit (rejected and big hit types, respectively) . The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 54, but is prepared according to the gaming state and the determination result as to whether or not to win. In each variation pattern table, data indicating a variation pattern that can be selected and a numerical value corresponding to the data are set. Then, the CPU 56 selects a variation pattern table according to the gaming state and the determination result as to whether or not to win, and corresponds to a numerical value that matches the value of the variation pattern determination random number in the selected variation pattern table. Select a variation pattern. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 selects the variation pattern depending on whether or not the jackpot has already been determined and whether or not the probability variation jackpot is set.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command (see FIG. 32) corresponding to the variation pattern selected in step S101 to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 uses the address of the command transmission table (previously set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. set. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S29).

  Moreover, the variation of the special symbol is started (step S104). For example, a start flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S34 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time (see FIG. 32) corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302). In the display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 determines any one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 5 designation according to the determined type of jackpot (including the jackpot) (see FIG. 34). Control to transmit. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag (which is also set when the small hit is determined) is set (step S110). If it is not set, control is performed to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S111). When the big hit flag is set, when the probability variation big hit flag is set, control for transmitting the display result 4 designation command is performed (steps S112 and S113). When the sudden probability big hit flag is set, control for transmitting a display result 5 designation command is performed (steps S114 and S115). When the small hit flag is set, control for transmitting the display result 3 designation command is performed (steps S116 and S117). When none of the probability variation big hit flag, sudden probability variation big hit flag, and small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (step S118). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S34 to end the variation of the special symbol, and performs control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol on the special symbol display 8. (Step S131). Further, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S132). When the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S146 (step S133).

  When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to send a big hit start designation command (step S135). Specifically, when the probability variation big hit flag is set, a big hit start 3 designation command is transmitted, and when the probability variation big hit flag is suddenly set, a big hit start 4 designation command is transmitted. If it is set, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. Otherwise, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted.

  Also, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (time for notifying the fact that the big hit has occurred, for example, in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S136). If the small hit flag is set, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) (steps S137 and S138). If the small hit flag is not set, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S305) (step S139). The case where the small hit flag is not set is a case where the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit or the sudden probability variation big hit is determined.

  In step S146, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction end flag is set. If the time saving end flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S149. If the time reduction end flag is set, the time reduction end flag is reset (step S147), and the time reduction flag indicating that the gaming state is the time reduction state is reset (step S148). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S149).

  The time reduction end flag is set in step S69 in the special symbol normal process. In addition, the gaming state shifts to a non-time saving state by resetting the time saving flag. At this stage, if the gaming state is a probability variation state, the gaming state becomes a probability variation state of a non-short-time state. On the other hand, if it is in the non-probable change state, it shifts to a normal state (a state that is not in the probabilistic change state and is not in the time-short state).

  In the big winning opening opening pre-processing, when the big hit display time timer is set, the CPU 56 controls to open the big winning opening when the big winning display time timer times out, and sets the big winning opening opening time timer. Set a value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 29 seconds for normal big hits and probable big hits, and 0.5 seconds for sudden big odds), and the special symbol process flag value is processed while the big prize opening is open The value is updated to a value corresponding to (Step S306). The case where the big hit display time timer is set is the case before the start of the first round. When an interval timer (timer for determining the interval time between rounds) is set, when the interval timer times out, control is performed to open the big prize opening, and the opening time ( For example, a value corresponding to 29 seconds is set for a normal big hit and a probable big hit, and a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for a sudden probable big hit, and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the process for opening a big winning opening (step S306) ) To a value corresponding to.

  In the process during opening of the big prize opening, the CPU 56 does not finish the final round when the big prize opening time timer times out or the number of winning balls to the big prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). In this case, control for closing the special winning opening is performed, a value corresponding to the interval time is set in the interval timer, and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S305). Update. When the final round is completed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S307).

Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 100 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining an activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). .

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and executes a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, an operation detection process for detecting each operation of the pressing operation unit 811 and the rotation operation unit 812 in the operation unit 81 is executed (operation detection process: step S704a). Then, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed. In addition, a random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a predetermined random number (for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol) is executed (step S706). In addition, notification control process processing for performing notification using an effect device such as the effect display device 9 is executed (step S707). Furthermore, the serial input / output process which outputs the data set by the command analysis process, the effect control process process, and the notification control process process to the serial output circuit 353, and reads the data received from the input ICs 620 and 621 from the serial input circuit 354. Is executed (step S708). And the operation part failure determination process which detects failure of the press operation part 811 in the operation part 81 and the rotation operation part 812 is performed (step S709). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, the effect control commands stored in the buffer area are sequentially read (2 bytes, that is, read one command at a time), and which command (see FIG. 34) the read effect control command is analyzed.

  46 to 48 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When reading is performed, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 stores the display result specifying command in a display result specifying command storage area formed in the RAM (step S618). . Then, a display result specifying command reception flag is set (step S619).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is one of the jackpot start 1-4 designation commands (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets the jackpot start 1-4 designation command reception flag (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632A). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols. Also, an initial notification flag is set (step S632B), and a RAM clear flag is set (step S632C).

  Further, if the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634), and an initial notification flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (step S644).

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal prize notification designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormal prize notification designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is a random number circuit error designation command (step S647), the effect control CPU 101 sets a random number circuit error flag (step S648).

  If the received production control command is a full tank error release designation command (step S649), the production control CPU 101 resets the full tank error notification flag set in step S652 described later and sets an error notification release flag ( Step S650).

  If the received production control command is a full tank error notification designation command (step S651), the production control CPU 101 sets a full tank error notification flag (step S652).

  If the received effect control command is a door opening error release designation command (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 resets the door opening error notification flag set in step S656, which will be described later, and sets the error notification cancellation flag. (Step S654).

  If the received effect control command is a door opening error notification designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 sets a door opening error notification flag (step S656).

  If the received effect control command is a ball break error release designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 resets a ball break error notification flag set in step S660 described later and sets an error notification cancel flag. (Step S658).

  If the received effect control command is a ball-out error notification designation command (step S659), the effect control CPU 101 sets a ball-out error notification flag (step S660).

  If the received effect control command is a prize ball error release designation command (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 resets the prize ball error notification flag set in step S664 described later and sets the error notification release flag. (Step S662).

  If the received effect control command is a prize ball error notification designation command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 sets a prize ball error notification flag (step S664).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S665). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the operation detection process (step S704a). In the operation detection process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process. First, based on detection signals input from the first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press detector 81c, and the fourth press detector 81d, any one of these press detectors is selected. It is determined whether or not the two pressure detectors are in a state of detecting an operation (step S671). Specifically, the respective detection data of the first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press detector 81c, and the fourth press detector 81d stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM are read out, Based on the detection data, it is determined whether any one of the pressure detectors has detected an operation. When it is determined that any one of the pressure detectors has detected an operation, a direction selection operation detection flag for specifying the operation direction corresponding to the pressure detector that detected the operation is set (step S672). Then, the process proceeds to step S675 described later.

  The direction selection operation detection flag includes a front direction selection operation detection flag indicating that a front direction selection operation has been detected by operating the front direction portion of the pressing operation unit 811 and a rear direction portion of the pressing operation unit 811. A backward selection operation detection flag indicating that a backward selection operation has been detected, and a leftward selection operation detection indicating that a leftward selection operation has been detected by operating the leftward portion of the pressing operation unit 811. Including a flag and a right direction selection operation detection flag indicating that a right direction selection operation has been detected by operating the right direction portion of the pressing operation unit 811 and is selected corresponding to the pressure detector that has detected the operation. The For example, when the first pressure detector 81a detects an operation, the forward selection operation detection flag is set. When the second press detector 81b detects an operation, the left direction selection operation detection flag is set. When the third press detector 81c detects an operation, a backward selection operation detection flag is set. When the fourth press detector 81d detects an operation, a right direction selection operation detection flag is set.

  When it is determined in step S671 that any one of the pressure detectors has not detected the operation, the first pressure detector 81a, the second pressure detector 81b, the third pressure detector 81c, and the fourth pressure detector. Based on the detection signal input from the detector 81d, it is determined whether or not any of the plurality of press detectors has detected an operation (step S673). Specifically, the respective detection data of the first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press detector 81c, and the fourth press detector 81d stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM are read out, Based on the detection data, it is determined whether or not any of the plurality of press detectors has detected an operation. When it is determined that any of the plurality of press detectors has detected the operation, it can be determined that the determination operation for pressing the entire pressing operation unit 811 downward has been performed, so the determination operation is detected. The determination operation detection flag indicating that this is set, and the process proceeds to step S675 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the plurality of press detectors is not in a state in which an operation has been detected, none of the press detectors has been in a state in which an operation has been detected.

  In step S675, a rotation operation determination process for determining a rotation operation of rotation operation unit 812 is executed, and the process ends. The contents of the rotation operation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the rotation operation determination process (step S675). In the rotation operation determination process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process. First, the detection data of the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM are read as current determination data (hereinafter referred to as current determination data) (step S711). . Further, the previous determination data used as the previous determination data (hereinafter referred to as the previous determination data) and stored in a predetermined previous determination data storage area of the RAM is read (step S712).

  Next, the read previous determination data and current determination data are compared to determine whether or not these data are different (step S713). Specifically, when the level of at least one of the detection signals of the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f is different between the previous determination data and the current determination data, these data are Judged to be different. When it is determined that the previous determination data is not different from the current determination data, the process proceeds to step S718 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the previous determination data and the current determination data are different, the rotation determination table shown in FIG. 23 is referred to, and the previous determination data and the current determination data are determined based on the previous determination data and the current determination data. From the combination of the determination data and the relationship between the rotation direction and the rotation amount, the rotation direction and the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 812 are determined (determined). For example, the projection 8151 of the cover plate 815 has passed the apex of the convex portion of the dial base 816 by the right rotation operation as in the case where the previous determination data is “H, H” and the current determination data is “L, H”. When there is a change in the signal level, it is determined that the rotation direction is right rotation and the rotation amount is rotated by 15 degrees for the reason described above.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a rotation corresponding to a rotation amount for one click (a rotation amount of 15 degrees) has been detected (step S715). When it is determined that the rotation corresponding to the rotation amount for one click has not been detected, that is, when the combination of the corresponding determination data is not set in the rotation determination table of FIG. 23 (for example, the previous determination data is “ When there is a change in the signal level when the protrusion 8151 of the cover plate 815 enters the bottom of each recess in the dial base 816, as in the case of “H, L” and the current determination data is “H, H”, For the reason described above, the rotation is performed but the rotation for one click is not detected, so the rotation direction and the rotation amount are not determined), and the process proceeds to step S718 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation corresponding to the rotation amount for one click is detected, that is, when the combination of the corresponding determination data is set in the rotation determination table of FIG. 23, the determination is made at step S714. The rotation direction data and the rotation amount data are stored in a rotation detection data storage area provided in a predetermined area in the RAM (step S716). Then, a rotation operation detection flag indicating that the rotation operation has been detected is set, and the process proceeds to step S718.

  In step S718, by storing the current determination data as the previous determination data, the previous determination data is updated and stored, and the process ends.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S806 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801). Further, when the variation pattern command has not been received for a predetermined period of time, a display relating to the selection of the effect mode as shown in FIG. 24 is performed on the effect display device 9, and a process for enabling the selection of the effect mode is performed.

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process (step S802).

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Decoration symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the ornament symbol is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Take control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display processing (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805).

  Big hit game processing (step S805): Control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when receiving a special command during opening of the special prize opening or a designation command after opening the special prize opening, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S806).

  Big hit end process (step S806): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, an effect mode selection process for displaying an image as shown in FIG. 24 and enabling the selection of the effect mode is executed (step S814), and the process ends. The effect mode selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813), and the process ends.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an effect mode selection process (step S814) in the variation pattern command reception waiting process shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process. First, it is determined whether or not a production mode selection acceptance flag is set (step S721). The effect mode selection acceptance flag is a flag indicating that an effect mode selection operation is being accepted, and is set when the effect mode selection acceptance image shown in FIG. 24B is displayed. It is reset when the effect mode determination image shown in (d) is displayed.

  When it is determined that the effect mode selection acceptance flag as described above is set, the process proceeds to step S728 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect mode selection acceptance flag is not set, it is determined whether any direction selection operation detection flag or determination operation detection flag is set (step S723). When it is determined that none of these detection flags is set, the process is terminated. Thereby, when any operation of the direction selection operation and the determination operation is not performed by the pressing operation unit 811, the effect mode selection acceptance image as shown in FIG. 24B is not displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined that any one of these detection flags is set, the set detection flag is reset (step S724), and the process proceeds to step S725.

  In step S725, display of the effect mode selection acceptance image as shown in FIG. 24B is started (step S725). Then, after the effect mode selection acceptance image is displayed for a predetermined period, as described above, images indicating the three effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C that can be selected are displayed as shown in (c). Further, by rotating the operation unit center lamp 82A in blue, a character string such as “Turn it!” On the pressing operation unit 811 is lit (may be blinked) to rotate the rotation operation unit 812. A serial setting process is executed to perform a rotation operation guidance light emission operation for guiding (step S726). Then, the production mode selection acceptance flag is set, and the process ends. As a result, in the next effect mode selection process, the process proceeds from step S721 to step S728. As described above, when one of the direction selection operation and the determination operation is performed by the pressing operation unit 811, an effect mode selection acceptance image as shown in FIG. 24B is displayed, and the effect mode is changed. It becomes possible to select. In addition, not only the operation of the pressing operation unit 811 but also when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 is performed, an effect mode selection acceptance image as shown in FIG. 24B is displayed, and the effect mode is selected. It may be possible to do this.

  If it is determined that the effect mode acceptance flag is set and the process proceeds from step S721 to step S728, it is determined whether or not the rotation operation detection flag described above is set (step S728). When it is determined that the rotation operation detection flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S732 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation operation detection flag is set, an effect is selected according to the rotation operation (step S729). For example, such a rotation operation is performed in response to the display of images showing three effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C that can be selected as shown in FIG. Specifically, in step S729, the effect mode to be selected is switched for each rotation amount for one click. For example, in the initial state, the production mode A is selected, and when the left rotation operation is performed, the rotation operation is performed in the order of the production mode A → the production mode B → the production mode C → the production mode A. To select the production mode. When a clockwise rotation operation is performed, the effect mode is selected in the order of effect mode A → effect mode C → effect mode B → effect mode A. Then, an effect mode selection image for specifying the effect mode selected in step S729 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 24C and 24D (step S730).

  In addition, the example which switches the production | presentation mode to select for every rotation amount for 1 click was shown here. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control for switching the effect mode to be selected may be performed for each rotation amount for a plurality of clicks in the same rotation direction. When there are three effect modes to be selected as shown in FIG. 24, for example, control for switching the effect mode to be selected may be performed for every rotation amount (120 degrees) for eight clicks.

  Next, the rotation operation detection flag is reset (step S731), and the operation unit center lamp 82A emits red light so that a character string such as “push! ), A serial setting process is executed in order to perform a pressing operation guide light emission operation for guiding the pressing operation portion 811 to be pressed (step S731A). Then, the process proceeds to step S732.

  In step S732, it is determined whether the determination operation detection flag described above is set. If it is determined that the determination operation detection flag is not set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination operation detection flag is set, the effect is determined according to the determination operation (step S733). For example, such a determination operation is performed in response to the display of images showing three effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C that can be selected as shown in FIG. Specifically, in step S733, the effect mode selected at that time is determined as the effect mode to be executed, and the determined effect mode is stored (updated) in the determined effect mode storage area provided in the predetermined area of the RAM. Storage) is performed. Then, an effect mode determination image for specifying the effect mode determined in step S733 is displayed as shown in FIG. 24D (step S734). Next, the production mode selection acceptance flag is reset (step S735), and the determination operation detection flag is reset (step S736). Then, image display in the effect mode selected and determined in step S733 is started as shown in FIG. 24E (step S737), and the process is terminated.

  Note that it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received in step S811 in FIG. 52 after the effect mode selection image is displayed in response to the rotation operation in step S730 by the effect mode selection process and before the determination operation is performed ( When it is determined that the variation pattern command flag is set), as shown in steps S812 and S813 of FIG. 52, the process proceeds to the decorative symbol variation start process. Then, the image can be switched to an image that displays the decorative design in a variable manner. In such a case, the change in the selection of the production mode is not effective, and the production mode selected before the production mode reception image is displayed is continued.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 reads data indicating the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S816).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the display result specifying command reception flag is set (step S817). If the display result specifying command reception flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S830. When the display result specifying command reception flag is set, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is displayed according to the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). Determination is made (step S818).

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol stop pattern in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 55, when the received display result specifying command indicates a normal jackpot (when the received display result specifying command is a display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses the stop design as a stop symbol. A combination of decorative symbols in which the left middle right symbol is an even symbol (usually a stop symbol reminiscent of the occurrence of a big hit) is determined. When the received display result specifying command indicates a probable big hit (when the received display result specifying command is a display result 4 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses the left middle right symbol as an odd symbol as an odd symbol. A combination of decorative symbols arranged in accordance with (a stop symbol reminiscent of occurrence of a probable big hit) is determined. When the received display result specifying command indicates a small hit or suddenly probable big hit (when the received display result specifying command is a display result 3 specifying command or a display result 5 specifying command), the presentation control CPU 101 A combination of “135” (a stop symbol reminiscent of the occurrence of a small hit or suddenly probable big hit) is determined as the left middle right decorative symbol as the stop symbol. In the case of a loss (when the received display result specifying command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols that are aligned on the left and right is determined. The combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the decorative symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbol and the numerical value are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

  As for the decorative symbol, a stop symbol that recalls a big hit is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a probable big hit symbol, and a stop symbol reminiscent of a normal big hit is called a normal big hit symbol. A stop symbol that suddenly recalls a probable big hit is called a sudden probable big hit symbol, and a stop symbol that recalls a small hit is called a small hit symbol. And a stop symbol that reminds of a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the display result specifying command reception flag (step S819). Next, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step S833). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S834).

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the data set in the process table. In this embodiment, an error notification process table (error notification process table) used for various error notifications is prepared separately from the process table used for normal game effects shown in FIG. ing. Details of the error notification process table will be described later.

  The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation display time (variation time) of the decorative symbol variation display. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 56 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 displays an abnormal notification flag indicating that an abnormal winning notification is being made and other error flags (a RAM clear flag, a random number circuit error flag, a full tank error notification flag, a door opening error notification flag, a ball) Production device (variable display device as production component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1 and sound number data 1) on condition that the cut error notification flag and the prize ball error notification flag) are not set 9 and the control of the speaker 27 as a production component (steps S835A, S835B). For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the variable display device 9, a command is output to the VDP 109. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice synthesizing IC 173 in order to perform voice output from the speaker 27.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing in order to control various lamps as effect components in accordance with the lamp control execution data 1 (step S835C). For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the effect control CPU 101 supplies lamp control signals for lighting only the center decoration lamps LEDs 125a to 125f and the stage lamp LEDs 126a to 126f to a predetermined data storage area. set. When the gaming state is a probable change state, the LED 125a to 125f of the center decoration lamp and the LEDs 126a to 126f of the stage lamp are turned on, and all the lamps provided on the gaming frame 11 side (excluding the dish lamp) Lamp control signals for lighting the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f are set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S835C is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis, but the effect control CPU 101 controls the change pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  When the abnormality notification flag or other error flag is set, the rendering device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 excluding the sound number data 1 and the lamp control execution data 1 (steps S835A and S835D). That is, when the abnormality notification flag or other error flag is set, when a new variable display of a decorative design is started, a sound effect corresponding to the variable display and a display effect by a lamp are executed. Rather than an abnormal winning notification and various error notifications (RAM clear notification, random circuit error notification, full tank error notification, door open error notification, ball runout error notification, prize ball error notification) and sound display and lamp display The production continues.

  In addition, when performing the process of step S835D, the CPU 101 for effect control does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data 1 to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. That is, the display at that time on the variable display device 9 (notification of abnormal winning, notification of full tank error, notification of random circuit error) and the image of the display effect of variable display of the decorative symbols are variable at the same time. The display device 9 is controlled to display. That is, when the abnormality notification flag and other error flags are set, when a new variable display of a decorative design is started, only the display effect according to the variable display is not executed. Notifications according to abnormal winning notifications and various error notifications are also continued.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S836), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S802). (Step S837).

  In step S830, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command that can be used for both a normal big hit and a probable big hit is received. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the fluctuation pattern commands of “reach C / shortening”, “reach C”, and “super reach A” are used both in the normal big hit and the probable big hit. This is a variable pattern command. Therefore, the CPU 101 for effect control receives the variation pattern command that can be used for both the normal big hit and the probable big hit when the data indicating those fluctuation pattern commands is stored in the fluctuation pattern command storage area. It is determined that When it is determined that the variation pattern command that can be used for both the normal big hit and the probable big hit is received, the effect control CPU 101 determines the stop symbol as the normal big hit symbol (step S832). Also, if it is determined that a variation pattern command other than the variation pattern command that can be used for both a normal big hit and a probable big hit is received, the stop symbol is combined with a decorative symbol corresponding to the received variation pattern. (Step S831). In this embodiment, a variation pattern command other than the variation pattern command that can be used for both a normal jackpot and a probable variation jackpot is used at the time of losing or is used according to the type of jackpot ( (See FIG. 32). Therefore, when the variation control command 101 other than the variation pattern command that can be used for both the normal big hit and the probable big hit is received, the effect control CPU 101 determines the deviation based on the received variation pattern command. Whether or not a big hit (including a small hit) is determined, and if it is determined to be a big hit, the type of the big hit can be specified.

  In this way, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command that can be used for both the normal big hit and the probable big hit, and when the display result specifying command cannot be received, Since the display result (stop symbol) is determined to be a normal jackpot symbol, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not a specific gaming state occurs even if the display result specifying command cannot be received. In addition, by including information that can specify the decorative pattern display result in the variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 can display the display result identification command without using a command other than the variation pattern command and the display result identification command. Since the display result of the decorative design can be determined even if it cannot be received, the types of commands transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 do not increase, and as a result, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 does not increase.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 101 adds and updates the operation unit failure determination count timer by “1” (step S840). The operation unit failure determination count timer is a timer that cumulatively counts the decorative display variation display time as data for determining whether or not the operation unit 81 has failed. The decorative symbol variation display is when the player is playing a game with the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is a period in which the operation unit 81 is particularly used. In the operation unit failure determination process (FIG. 63) described later, failure determination is performed based on this period (operation unit failure determination count timer value), so that accurate failure determination can be performed.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the process timer (step S841), and 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable time timer (step S842). When the process timer times out (step S843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S844).

  Also, the abnormality notification flag and other error flags (RAM clear flag, random number circuit error flag, full tank error notification flag, door opening error notification flag, ball out error notification flag, prize ball error notification flag) are not set. As a condition, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data and sound number data set next (steps S845A and S845B).

  In step S845B, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a command to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9, for example. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice synthesizing IC 173 in order to output the voice from the speaker 27.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing in order to control various lamps as effect components according to the lamp control execution data (step S845C). For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the effect control CPU 101 supplies lamp control signals for lighting only the center decoration lamps LEDs 125a to 125f and the stage lamp LEDs 126a to 126f to a predetermined data storage area. set. Further, when the gaming state is a probable change state, the LED 125a to 125f of the center decoration lamp and the LEDs 126a to 126f of the stage lamp are turned on, and all the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side (on the hitting ball supply tray 3). Lamp control signals for lighting the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f (except for the provided lamp) are set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S845C is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a reach state (step S845D). When it is determined that the vehicle is in the reach state, after performing an operation-time effect process (step S845E) for performing an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 81 at the time of reach as shown in FIGS. move on. The operation effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the reach state, the process proceeds to step S846 described later.

  If the abnormality notification flag or other error flag is set in step S845A, the contents of process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (however, excluding sound number data i and lamp control execution data i) .), The rendering device is controlled (steps S845A and S845F). Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag or other error flag is set, the sound effect according to the fluctuating display of the decorative design and the display effect by the lamp are not executed, but the abnormal winning notification and various error notifications are performed. Sound output corresponding to (RAM clear notification, random number circuit error notification, full tank error notification, door opening error notification, ball runout error notification, prize ball error notification, operation unit failure notification) and display effects by lamps are continued.

  In addition, when the process of step S845F is performed, the presentation control CPU 101 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data i to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. . Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag or other error flag is set, not only the display effect according to the fluctuating display of the decorative design is executed, but the notification according to the abnormal winning notification or various error notifications is performed. Will continue.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S846), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S848). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S847), the process proceeds to step S848. Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control to stop variation.For example, a variation pattern command indicating a long variation time due to noise between substrates is received. Even in such a case, the variation of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol has ended).

  58 and 59 are flowcharts showing the operation time effect process (step S845E) in the decorative symbol changing process. In the effect process at the time of operation, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process.

  First, based on the process data being executed, it is determined whether or not the current reach state is a type of reach requiring a rotation operation (for example, when the above reach D, reach E, or reach F is displayed). Judgment is made (step S751). If it is determined that the type of reach requiring the rotation operation is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S764 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a type of reach that requires a rotation operation, is the rotation operation request period for requesting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 based on the process data being executed and the value of the process timer? It is determined whether or not (step S752). Here, the rotation operation request period is a period in which the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 is accepted, and is a period in which, for example, mini-games such as (c) and (d) in FIGS. 25 and 26 are executed. .

  When it is determined that it is not the rotation operation request period, the process proceeds to step S757 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the rotation operation request period, it is determined whether or not the rotation operation detection flag is set (step S753). When it is determined that the rotation operation detection flag is not set, the LED that guides the operation of the rotation operation unit, that is, the operation unit center lamp 82A emits blue light to “turn on the pressing operation unit 811!” A serial setting process is executed to perform a rotation operation guidance light emission operation that guides the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 by lighting up a character string such as a blinking (step S754), and step S757. Proceed to Note that a character string such as “Turn it !!” may be continuously displayed until the rotation operation request period ends. In this case, for example, the process of step S754 is performed immediately after step S752, and during the rotation operation request period, a character string such as “Turn! It may be blinking).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation operation detection flag is set, the effect display device 9 is controlled according to the rotation operation (step S755). Specifically, in step S755, the mallet 908 is operated by a predetermined amount of movement for each rotation amount of one click in the air hockey mini game images as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26C and 25D. While displaying, the display which advances a mini game is performed, such as the pack 907 being knocked back according to the operation of the mallet 908. Next, the rotation operation detection flag is reset (step S756), and the process proceeds to step S757.

  Here, an example is shown in which a display for operating the mallet 908 by a predetermined operation amount is shown for each rotation amount for one click. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control for displaying the mallet 908 by a predetermined amount of operation may be performed for each amount of rotation for a plurality of clicks in the same rotation direction.

  In step S757, based on the process data being executed, it is determined whether or not the current reach state is a super-reach effect display time. Specifically, in step S757, it is determined whether or not it is during execution of an effect that specifies super-reach as shown in (e) to (i) of FIG. If it is determined that it is not during the performance of specifying the super reach, the process is terminated. In the case of reach E in which the effect of specifying the super reach as shown in FIG. 26 is not executed, even if the determination operation is performed on the operation unit 81, display corresponding to the operation is not performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during execution of an effect that specifies super-reach, based on the process data being executed, the pressing operation unit 811 as shown in FIGS. It is determined whether or not it is a period for requesting a pressing operation (step S758).

  When it is determined that it is not the period for requesting the pressing operation, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the period for requesting the pressing operation, it is determined whether or not the above-described determination operation detection flag or any one of the direction selection operation detection flags is set (step S759).

  When it is determined that such a flag is not set, the LED for guiding the operation of the determination operation unit, that is, the operation unit center lamp 82A emits red light to “press!” On the pressing operation unit 811! A serial setting process is executed to perform a pressing operation guidance light emission operation for guiding the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 811 by blinking display of a character string such as (or lighting display) (step S760). finish. Note that a character string such as “Press!” May be continuously displayed until the determination operation request period ends. In this case, for example, the process of step S760 is executed immediately after step S758, and during the determination operation request period, a character string such as “Press!” Is continuously flashed and displayed on the pressing operation unit 811 ( It may be lit).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that such a flag is set, the effect display device 9 is controlled according to the determination operation or the direction selection operation (step S761). Specifically, in step S761, in the chance display as shown in FIG. 25G, the power displayed in a bar graph format in accordance with the increase in the number of pressing operations by the determination operation of the pressing operation unit 811 or the direction selection operation. Display to increase the value of. Note that the operation of the operation unit 81 is not involved in the effect in the effect display image that determines the stop symbol of the center decoration symbol displayed according to the accumulated power as shown in (h) and (i) of FIG. So it is done according to the process data. Then, in response to the determination operation or the direction selection operation of the pressing operation unit 811, LEDs corresponding to the determination operation (for example, the first pressing operation unit lamp 82 a to the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82 d) are caused to emit light. Therefore, serial setting processing is executed (step S762). Next, the set operation detection flag is reset (step S763), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in step S751 that the rotation operation is not of the kind that requires the rotation operation, the pressing operation unit as shown in FIGS. 27B and 27C based on the process data being executed. It is determined whether or not it is a period for requesting the direction selection operation 811 (step S764). When it is determined that it is not the period for requesting the direction selection operation, the process proceeds to step S771 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the period for requesting the direction selection operation, it is determined whether any of the direction selection operation detection flags described above is set (step S765).

  When it is determined that any one of the direction selection operation detection flags is not set, the LEDs for guiding the operation of the direction selection operation unit, that is, four LEDs of the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d. Guides the user to perform a direction selection operation to operate any of the four parts of the forward operation portion, the rearward operation portion, the leftward operation portion, and the rightward operation portion by blinking the lamp (may be turned on). The serial setting process for executing the serial setting process for performing the operation guidance light emission operation is executed (step S766), and the process proceeds to step S771 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that any one of the direction selection operation detection flags is set, a character is selected according to the direction selection operation (step S767). Specifically, in step S767, a character is selected every time a direction is selected. For example, in the initial state, the character A is selected, the character A is selected when the forward direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 is operated, and the character character is selected when the left direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 is operated. A direction selection operation is performed by selecting B, selecting character C when the rear direction portion of the pressing operation unit 811 is operated, and selecting character D when the right direction portion of the pressing operation unit 811 is operated. To select a character.

  In step S766 described above, there are four characters to be selected, and the direction in which one of the four parts of the pressing operation unit 811 including the front direction portion, the rear direction portion, the left direction portion, and the right direction portion is operated. Since it is necessary to perform a selection operation, an example in which an operation guidance light emission operation for blinking four lamps of the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when two images indicating the character to be selected are displayed side by side, the direction selection for operating one of the left direction part and the right direction part of the pressing operation unit 811 is performed. Since it is necessary to perform an operation, it is only necessary to perform an operation guidance light-emitting operation in which only two pressing operation unit lamps corresponding to the left direction part and the right direction part are blinked. In other words, in the operation guidance light emitting operation, only the lamp corresponding to the portion that needs to be operated may be blinked (may be lit) in relation to the image displayed on the display screen.

  Then, a character selection image for specifying the character selected in step S767 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 27B and 27C (step S768). Then, in response to the direction selection operation of the pressing operation unit 811 being performed, the LED corresponding to the direction selection operation among the four lamps of the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d, that is, Then, serial setting processing is executed to turn on the lamp corresponding to the operated direction (step S769). Next, the set direction selection operation detection flag is reset (step S770), and the process proceeds to step S771.

  In step S771, based on the process data being executed, it is determined whether or not the direction selection operation has ended, that is, whether or not a predetermined time for accepting the direction selection operation has elapsed. If it is determined that the direction selection operation has not ended, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the direction selection operation has ended, the character selected at that time is determined as the character to be selected and determined (step S772), and the selected and determined character is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM. The process of storing in the determined character storage area is performed. Then, the effect display device 9 is controlled according to the character determined in step S772 (step S773), and the process returns. Specifically, in step S773, processing for displaying the character image determined in step S772 as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stopping process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the confirmed command reception flag is set (step S851). If the confirmed command reception flag is set, the confirmed command reception flag is reset. (Step S852), and control for deriving and displaying the determined stop symbol is performed (Step S853). Then, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a big hit (step S854). Whether or not it is determined to be a big hit is confirmed by, for example, a display result specifying command stored in the display result specifying command storage area. In this embodiment, it can be confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a big hit based on the determined stop symbol.

  When it is determined to be a big hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S855).

  If it is determined not to win, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the time reduction state flag is set (step S856). The short time state flag is set when the gaming state is a short time state (see step S886 described later). If the time reduction state flag is set, the value of the time reduction variation counter is incremented by 1 (step S857).

  Then, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the time-varying variation number counter is 100 (step S858). If the value of the hour / short fluctuation counter is 100, the hour / short state flag is reset (step S859). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S860).

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 ends the decoration symbol variation (variation display) on the condition that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received (see steps S851 and S853). However, if the variation time timer based on the received variation pattern command times out, control may be performed so as to end the variation of the decorative symbol without receiving the symbol determination designation command. In that case, the game control microcomputer 560 may not transmit the symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variable display.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S806) in the effect control process. In the jackpot end process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the jackpot end effect timer is set (step S880). If the big hit end effect timer is set, the process proceeds to step S885. If the jackpot end effect timer is not set, a jackpot end designation command reception flag (a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag) indicating that the jackpot termination designation command has been received is set. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S881). When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set, the jackpot end designation command reception flag is reset (step S882), and a value corresponding to the jackpot end display time is set in the jackpot end presentation timer (step S883). Then, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a jackpot end screen (screen for notifying the end of the jackpot game) (step S884). Specifically, an instruction to display the big hit end screen is given to the VDP 109.

  In this embodiment, even if the type of jackpot is different, the same jackpot end screen is displayed on the effect display device 9. For example, the big hit end display and the small hit end display are the same. However, the big hit end display (including the small hit end display) may be divided according to the type of the big hit.

  In step S885, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end effect timer. Then, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end effect timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end effect time has elapsed (step S886). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, the time reduction state flag is set (step S887), and the time reduction number counter is set to 0 (step S888). If the jackpot end 1 designation command is received, the probability variation state flag is reset (steps S889 and S891). When the jackpot end 1 designation command has not been received (when the jackpot end 2 designation command has been received), the probability variation state flag is set (steps S889, S890). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S892).

  The probability change state flag and the time-short state flag are used, for example, when the effect control CPU 101 notifies the probability change state and the time-short state by a background or a decorative light emitter (lamp / LED) in the effect display device 9.

  Next, the notification control process process in step S707 will be described. First, various error notification modes executed in the notification control process will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of various error notification modes executed in the notification control process. As shown in FIG. 62, the RAM clear notification is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 31 seconds) after the gaming machine is turned on. When performing the RAM clear notification, the effect control CPU 101 lights the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) on the game frame 11 side, and causes the speaker 27 to generate a predetermined error sound. Control (for example, beep sound) is output.

  The door opening error notification is executed while the game frame 11 is opened (for example, while the detection signal of the door opening sensor 155 is input). When performing the door opening error notification, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to blink the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) on the game frame 11 side. In addition, control is performed so that a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound) is output to the speaker 27 together with a sound “the door is open”.

  Further, the ball break error notification is executed from the occurrence of a ball break until the ball break state is canceled (for example, while a detection signal of a ball break switch is input). The effect control CPU 101 performs control for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l of the top frame lamps on the game frame 11 side when notifying the ball break error. The full tank error notification is executed from the occurrence of the full tank state of the lower pan until the full tank state is canceled (for example, while the detection signal of the full tank switch is input). When performing the full tank error notification, the effect control CPU 101 blinks a lower tray lamp (not shown, four LEDs provided on the surplus ball receiving tray 4 in this example) on the side of the game frame 11 and “the lower tray is full”. Control to output the voice. Further, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display “The bottom plate is full”. In this case, when the display by the game effect (for example, the display of variation of the decorative pattern) is performed on the effect display device 9, the character string “bottom plate is full” is superimposed on the effect display device 9. .

  The prize ball error notification is executed from the occurrence of the prize ball abnormality until the prize ball abnormality state is canceled. When performing the prize ball error notification, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to blink the LEDs 281a to 281l of the top frame lamp on the game frame 11 side. Further, the random number circuit error notification is executed until the power is turned off after the random number circuit error is detected when the gaming machine is turned on. When performing the random number circuit error notification, the effect control CPU 101 lights up the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) on the game frame 11 side, and a predetermined error sound (for example, (Beep sound) is output. In addition, control is performed to display “error” on the effect display device 9. In this case, when a display based on a game effect (for example, a decorative pattern change display) is performed on the effect display device 9, the character string “error” is superimposed on the effect display device 9.

  The abnormal winning error notification is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the occurrence of the abnormal winning. When performing the abnormal winning notification, the effect control CPU 101 blinks the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) on the game frame 11 side, and a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep). Sound) is output.

  Further, the operation unit failure notification is notified while it is determined that the operation unit 81 is in failure (during failure) or during a predetermined fixed period. When performing the operation unit failure notification, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to turn on the LEDs 281a to 281l of the top frame lamps on the game frame 11 side, and performs control to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Next, the operation unit failure determination process in step S709 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an operation unit failure determination process (step S709) in the main process shown in FIG. In the operation unit failure determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the failure determination operation detection flag is set (step S781). The failure determination operation detection flag is a flag that is set based on the detection of the operation of the pressing operation unit 811 (see step S976 in the serial input / output process, FIG. 79). If set (Y in step S781), the effect control CPU 101 resets the failure determination operation detection flag (step S782) and resets the operation unit failure determination count timer (step S783). Then, the process is finished. If the failure determination operation detection flag is not set (N in step S781), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the operation unit failure determination count timer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 30 days). Confirmation is made (step S784). If the operation unit failure determination count timer value is 30 days or more (Y in step S784), the effect control CPU 101 sets the operation unit failure flag (step S785). Then, the process is finished.

  In this embodiment, the example in which the pressing operation unit 811 is a failure determination target of the operation unit 81 in the operation unit 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation unit failure determination process is performed with the rotation operation unit 812 as the failure determination target of the operation unit 81. It may be. In addition, the operation unit failure determination process is performed with both of the pressing operation unit 811 and the rotation operation unit 812 as the failure determination target of the operation unit 81. You may make it perform.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the notification control process (step S707) in the main process shown in FIG. In the notification control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S1900 and S1901 according to the value of the notification control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  The notification start processing (step S1900) includes error flags (initial notification flag, random number circuit error flag, abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag, RAM clear flag, full tank error notification flag, prize ball error notification set in the command analysis processing. This is a process of starting notification of an error based on a flag and a ball breakage error notification flag. When the error notification is started, the value of the notification control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the notification process (step S1901).

  The in-notification process (step S1901) is based on each error flag (initial notification flag, random number circuit error flag, abnormality notification flag, RAM clear flag, full tank error notification flag, winning ball error notification flag, and out of ball error notification flag). Thus, the error notification process is continued. Also, the error notification is terminated based on the fact that the error notification period (initial notification period, RAM clear notification period) has elapsed, or the error notification cancellation flag set in the command analysis process. When the error notification is finished, the value of the notification control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the notification start process (step S1901).

  65 to 67 are flowcharts showing the notification start process (step S1900) in the notification control process shown in FIG. In the notification start process, the production control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the initial notification flag is set (step S1911). If set, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the initial notification period value in the period timer 1 (step S1912). The initial notification period is a period in which initialization notification is performed in response to reception of an initialization designation command. The effect control CPU 101 ends the initialization notification when the initial notification period elapses. The initial notification period is the same as the prohibition period set by the game control microcomputer 560 in step S45. Therefore, when the initialization notification is being performed, the abnormality notification designation command is not received.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets the initial notification flag and sets an initial notification flag indicating that the initial notification is being performed (step S1912A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  If the initial notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the door opening error notification flag is set (step S1913). If set, the effect control CPU 101 selects error process data corresponding to the door opening error (step S1914). In this embodiment, error process data (error process data) for controlling the speaker 27 and the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 82A, 82a to 82l when various error notifications are made. ) Is prepared in advance. Details of the error process data will be described later.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts an error process timer (step S1915) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the error process data 1 (step S1916). For example, the production control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound) together with a sound such as “the door is open”.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 82A, 82a to 82l to set the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area (FIG. 77) is executed (step S1917). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sends lamp control signals for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. Set to. The lamp control signal set in step S1917 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602 to 604.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets the door opening error notification flag and sets a door opening error notification flag indicating that the door opening error notification is being performed (step S1917A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  If the door opening error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the random number circuit error flag is set (step S1918). If set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display on the effect display device 9 a random number circuit error display screen indicating a random circuit error (step S1919). Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects error process data corresponding to the random circuit error (step S1920). Next, the production control CPU 101 starts an error process timer (step S1921) and controls the speaker 27 according to the contents of the error process data 1 (step S1922). For example, the effect control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 82A, 82a to 82l. (Step S1923). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sends lamp control signals for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. Set to. The lamp control signal set in step S1923 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602 to 604.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets the random number circuit error flag and sets a random number circuit error reporting flag indicating that the random number circuit error notification is being performed (step S1923A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  If the door opening error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set (step S1924). If set, the production control CPU 101 selects error process data corresponding to the abnormal winning notification (step S1925). Next, the production control CPU 101 starts an error process timer (step S1926) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the error process data 1 (step S1927). For example, the effect control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 82A, 82a to 82l. (Step S1928). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sends lamp control signals for lighting the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. Set to. The lamp control signal set in step S1928 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to each of the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  Therefore, thereafter, sound output (output of an abnormal alarm sound) and lamp display (abnormal alarm flashing) corresponding to the abnormal winning notification are performed. Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag and sets an abnormal notification flag indicating that the abnormal notification is being performed (step S1929). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  If the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step S1930). If set, the effect control CPU 101 selects error process data corresponding to the RAM clear notification (step S1931). The RAM clear notification is processing for notifying that the initialization process has been executed and the RAM has been cleared.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts an error process timer (step S1932) and controls the speaker 27 according to the contents of the error process data 1 (step S1933). For example, the effect control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 82A, 82a to 82l. (Step S1934). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sends lamp control signals for lighting the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. Set to. The lamp control signal set in step S1934 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Is output to each of the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604. Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the RAM clear notification period value in the period timer 2 (step S1935). The RAM clear notification period is a period during which the RAM clear notification is being notified. When the RAM clear notification period elapses, the effect control CPU 101 ends the RAM clear notification. The initial notification period and the RAM clear notification period may be the same period.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets the RAM clear flag and sets a RAM clear notification flag indicating that the RAM clear notification is being performed (step S1935A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  If the RAM clear flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the full error notification flag is set (step S1936). If it is set, the CPU 101 for effect control performs control to display a full tank error display screen indicating that it is full error on the effect display device 9 (step S1937). Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects error process data corresponding to a full tank error (step S1938). Next, the production control CPU 101 starts an error process timer (step S1939) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the error process data 1 (step S1940). For example, the production control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a sound such as “the bottom plate is full”.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 82A, 82a to 82l. (Step S1941). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sets lamp control signals for causing the lamps 82a to 82d of the dish lamps provided in the game frame 11 to blink in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1941 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. To the frame-side IC substrate 605.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets the full tank error notification flag and sets a full tank error notification flag indicating that the full tank error notification is being performed (step S1941A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  If the full tank error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the prize ball error notification flag is set (step S1942). If set, the production control CPU 101 selects error process data corresponding to the prize ball error (step S1943) and starts an error process timer (step S1944).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 82A, 82a to 82l. (Step S1945). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1945 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets the prize ball error notification flag and sets a prize ball error notification flag indicating that the prize ball error notification is being performed (step S1945A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  In this embodiment, a case where only a notification process using a lamp is performed and a notification process using sound using a speaker 27 is not performed when a prize ball error is notified will be described. The used notification may be performed.

  If the prize ball error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the ball break error notification flag is set (step S1946). If set, the effect control CPU 101 selects error process data corresponding to the ball-out error (step S1947) and starts an error process timer (step S1948).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 82A, 82a to 82l. (Step S1949). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1949 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets the ball-out error notification flag and sets a ball-out error notification flag indicating that the ball-out error notification is being performed (step S1949A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  In this embodiment, a case where only a notification process using a lamp is performed and a notification process using a sound using the speaker 27 is not performed when a ball break error is notified will be described. The used notification may be performed.

  If the out-of-ball error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the operation unit failure flag is set (step S1951). If set, the production control CPU 101 selects error process data corresponding to the operation unit failure (step S1952) and starts an error process timer (step S1953).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 82A, 82a to 82l. (Step S1954). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lamp control signal for turning on the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. Note that the lamp control signal set in step S1954 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602. After step S1954, the process proceeds to step S1950.

  In step S1950, the effect control CPU 101 changes the value of the notification control process flag to a value corresponding to the notification-in-progress process (step S1901), and ends the process.

  68 to 71 are flowcharts showing the in-notification processing (step S1901) in the notification control process shown in FIG. In the notifying process, the production control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the initial notifying flag is set (step S1960). If the initial notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1965. If the initial notification flag is set, the value of the timer 1 set in step S1912 is decremented by 1 (step S1961). When the value of the period timer 1 becomes 0, that is, when the initial notification period has elapsed, the initial notification flag is reset (steps S1962, S1963). If the value of the period timer 1 is not 0, the process is terminated as it is.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for deleting the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen in the effect display device 9 to the VDP 109 (step S1964). The VDP 109 erases the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen from the effect display device 9 according to the command. Then, the process proceeds to step S2010.

  If the initial notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the door opening error notification flag is set (step S1965). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1971. If set, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S1966), and when the error process timer times out (step S1967), switches the error notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the error process timer (step S1968).

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of an error notification process table. The error notification process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 performs control of the effect device and performs various error notifications is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 performs error notification by controlling the speaker 27 and each lamp in accordance with the data set in the error notification process table. The error notification process table includes data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, error lamp control execution data, and error sound number data. In the process timer set value, the duration in the sound output state and the lamp display state is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the error notification process table and controls the lighting / non-lighting state of each lamp in a manner set in the lamp display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. The sound output using the speaker 27 is controlled.

  The error notification process table shown in FIG. 72 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The error notification process table is prepared according to the error type (RAM clear notification, random number circuit error, full tank error, door opening error, out of ball error, prize ball error). Further, in this embodiment, every time the error process timer times out, the lighting of the pattern A and the lighting of the pattern B are switched, and the lighting or blinking is controlled.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 based on the error sound number data (step S1969). In step S1969, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the corresponding error notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174, and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the production control CPU 101 causes the speaker 27 to output a sound “the door is open” and a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S1970). For example, in step S1970, the effect control CPU 101 generates lamp control signals for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. Set to a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1970 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the door opening error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the random number circuit error notification flag is set (step S1971). If set, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S1972), and when the error process timer times out (step S1973), switches the error notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the error process timer (step S1974).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 based on the error sound number data (step S1975). In step S1975, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the corresponding error notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174, and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the effect control CPU 101 causes the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing in order to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S1976). For example, in step S1976, the effect control CPU 101 outputs lamp control signals for lighting the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. Set to a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1976 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the random circuit error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the abnormality notification flag is set (step S1977). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1984. If set, the effect display device 9 outputs a command to superimpose and display the abnormality notification screen on the screen displayed at that time to the VDP 109 (step S1978). In response to the command, the VDP 109 superimposes and displays an abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 57C).

  Further, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S1979), and when the error process timer times out (step S1980), the error notification process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the error process timer (step S1981).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 based on the error sound number data (step S1982). In step S1982, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output in response to the abnormal winning notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174, and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the effect control CPU 101 causes the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the production control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing in order to control each lamp in accordance with the abnormal winning notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S1983). In step S1983, the CPU 101 for effect control provides lamp control signals for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. Set in the data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1983 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the abnormality notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the RAM clear notification flag is set (step S1984). If the RAM clear notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1993. If the RAM clear notification flag is set, the process timer is decremented by -1 (step S1985), and the value of the timer 2 set in step S1935 is decremented by 1 (step S1986). When the process timer times out (step S1987), the error notification process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the process timer (step S1988).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 based on the error sound number data (step S1989). In step S 1989, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the speech synthesis IC 173 in order to cause the speaker 27 to output a sound. For example, the effect control CPU 101 causes the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing in order to control various lamps as effect parts in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S1990). In step S1990, the CPU 101 for effect control provides predetermined lamp control signals for lighting the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. Set in the data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1990 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602 to 604.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the period timer 2 has become 0 (step S1991). When the value of the period timer 2 becomes 0, that is, when the RAM clear notification period has elapsed, the RAM clear notification flag is reset (step S1992), and the process proceeds to step S2010. If the value of the period timer 2 has not timed out, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the RAM clear notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the full error notification flag is set (step S1993). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1999. If set, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S1994), and when the error process timer times out (step S1995), switches the error notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the error process timer (step S1996).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 based on the error sound number data (step S1997). In step S1997, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the corresponding error notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174, and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the production control CPU 101 causes the speaker 27 to output a sound “the bottom plate is full”.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S1998). For example, in step S1998, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lamp control signal for blinking a pan lamp (not shown, four LEDs in this example) in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1998 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the full tank error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the prize ball error notification flag is set (step S1999). If not set, the process proceeds to step S2005. If set, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S2000), and when the error process timer times out (step S2001), switches the error notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the error process timer (step S2002).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S2003). For example, in step S2003, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S2003 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the award ball error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the ball out error notification flag is set (step S2004). If not set, the process proceeds to step S2008a described later. If set, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S2005), and when the error process timer times out (step S2006), switches the error notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the error process timer (step S2007).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S2008). For example, in step S2008, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S2008 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the ball breaking notification flag is not set in step S2004, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation unit failure flag is set (step S2008a). If not set, the process proceeds to step S2009. If set, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S2008b), and when the error process timer times out (step S2008c), switches the error notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the error process timer (step S2008d).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 based on the error sound number data (step S2008e). In step S2008e, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the corresponding error notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174, and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S2008f). For example, in step S2008f, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lamp control signal for turning on the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S2008f is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, when a ball break error or a prize ball error is notified, no sound is output from the speaker 27, but a ball break error or a prize ball error is reported. In this case, sound output control using the speaker 27 may be performed.

  In step S2009, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not an error notification release flag is set. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S2010. If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. In step S2010, the production control CPU 101 changes the value of the notification control process flag to a value corresponding to the notification start process (step S1900), and ends the process.

  By executing the processing as described above, notification of various errors is executed. In addition, initial notification, door opening error notification, random number circuit error notification, abnormal winning notification, RAM clear notification, full tank error notification, prize ball error notification and ball runout error notification, and error notification are executed in priority order. Is done.

  The effect control CPU 101 determines Y in steps S1960, S1965, S1971, S1977, S1984, S1993, S1999, S2004, and S2008a, and then an initial notification flag, a door opening error notification flag, a random number circuit error flag, an abnormal prize. It is determined whether or not any one or more of a notification designation command reception flag, a RAM clear flag, a full tank error notification flag, a winning ball error notification flag, a ball shortage error notification flag, and an operation unit failure flag are set. May be. If it is set, the value of the notification control process flag may be changed to a value corresponding to the notification start process (step S1900), and the notification start process may be repeated.

  Next, a lamp control signal set in a predetermined data storage area according to the error lamp control execution data will be described. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a lamp control signal output as a serial data method in the notification control process. As shown in FIG. 73, in this embodiment, two patterns of error lamp control execution data (pattern A and pattern B) are used for each error type. In this embodiment, the blinking display of the lamp is controlled by switching the error lamp control execution data for pattern A and pattern B and using them. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the lamp control signal shown in FIG. 73 in a predetermined lamp control signal storage area provided in advance in the ROM in association with the error lamp control execution data. Then, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a lamp control signal from a predetermined lamp control signal storage area based on the error lamp control execution data, and outputs it to the serial output circuit 353.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73, each lamp control signal is stored in a predetermined lamp control signal storage area with the addresses of the output destination serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 added thereto. For example, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 that supplies a control signal to some of the LEDs 281a to 281f among the ceiling lamps is “01”, the address “0001” is stored in the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp. "Is added and stored. Further, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 that supplies the control signal to the other part of the top frame lamps 281g to 281l is “02”, the address of the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp is addressed. Stored with “0010” added. Further, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 613 that supplies the control signal to the LEDs 283a to 283f of the right frame lamp is “03”, the address “0011” is added to the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp. Stored in state. Since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 that supplies the control signal to the LEDs 282a to 282f of the left frame lamp is “04”, the address “0100” is added to the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp. Stored in state.

  In the case of RAM clear notification, as shown in FIG. 73, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted to each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 whose addresses are “01” to “04”. Is done. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l and 282a to 282f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. , 283a to 283f are turned on. In addition, when the RAM clear notification is made, the same lamp control signal is output when the error lamp control execution data is pattern A and pattern B. Therefore, during the error notification, the game frame 11 side The LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding dish lamps) provided in are continuously lit.

  In the ramp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611, the first bit is an input signal to the LED 281a, the second bit is an input signal to the LED 281b, the third bit is an input signal to the LED 281c, and the fourth bit is The input signal to the LED 281d corresponds to the input signal to the LED 281e, the fifth bit corresponds to the input signal to the LED 281f. In the ramp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612, the first bit is an input signal to the LED 281g, the second bit is an input signal to the LED 281h, the third bit is an input signal to the LED 281i, and the fourth bit is The input signal to the LED 281j, the fifth bit corresponds to the input signal to the LED 281k, and the sixth bit corresponds to the input signal to the LED 281l. In the ramp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613, the first bit is an input signal to the LED 283a, the second bit is an input signal to the LED 283b, the third bit is an input signal to the LED 283c, and the fourth bit is The input signal to the LED 283d corresponds to the input signal to the LED 283e, the fifth bit corresponds to the input signal to the LED 283f. In the ramp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614, the first bit is an input signal to the LED 282a, the second bit is an input signal to the LED 282b, the third bit is an input signal to the LED 282c, and the fourth bit is The input signal to the LED 282d corresponds to the input signal to the LED 282e, the fifth bit corresponds to the input signal to the LED 282f.

  When notifying the door opening error, as shown in FIG. 73, first, based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern A, each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 having addresses from “01” to “04” is set. In 614, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l and 282a to 282f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. , 283a to 283f are turned on. Further, when the process data is switched, the control data body is “00000000” in the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 whose addresses are “01” to “04” based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern B. A lamp control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 0 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are turned off. Is done. When notifying the door opening error by repeating such control, the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are blinked at predetermined time intervals. Control is performed.

  When notifying a ball break error, as shown in FIG. 73, first, serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 having addresses “01” and “02” based on error lamp control execution data for pattern A, respectively. In addition, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of the ceiling lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are turned on. Further, at the time of process data switching, based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern B, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 having addresses “01” and “02” and the lamp whose control data body is “00000000” A control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of the ceiling lamp are all 0 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are turned off. When such a control is repeatedly performed and a ball-out error is notified, control is performed such that only the LEDs 281a to 281l of the top frame lamp provided on the game frame 11 side blink at predetermined time intervals.

  When notifying of a full tank error, as shown in FIG. 73, first, based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern A, the control data body is “00001111” in the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is “05”. Lamp control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of all the bits corresponding to a dish lamp (not shown; four LEDs in this example) are all 1 is output, and the dish lamp is turned on. At the time of process data switching, based on the error lamp control execution data for pattern B, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is “05”. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the dish lamp are all 0 is output, and the dish lamp is turned off. By repeating such control, when notifying that a full tank error has occurred, control is performed such that only the pan lamp blinks at predetermined time intervals.

  When notifying the prize ball error, as shown in FIG. 73, first, based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern A, the control data body is “00111111” in the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 whose address is “01”. Is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 whose address is “02”, and the lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to some of the LEDs of the ceiling lamp are all 1 is output, and only some of the LEDs 281a to 281f of the ceiling lamp provided on the game frame 11 side are lit. Is done. At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 whose address is “01” based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern B, and the address is A lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 of “02”. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of all the bits corresponding to the other part of the ceiling lamps are all 1 is output, and the other part of the ceiling lamps 281g to 281g˜ Only 281l is lit. When such a control is repeatedly performed and a prize ball error is notified, the LED 281a to 281f and the LEDs 281g to 281l of the top frame lamp provided on the game frame 11 side are alternately blinked at predetermined time intervals. Is done.

  When a prize ball error is notified by repeating the above-described control, the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are alternately staggered at a predetermined time interval. Control is performed so as to blink.

  When notifying the random circuit error, as shown in FIG. 73, the lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is sent to each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to 614 with addresses “01” to “04”. Is sent. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l and 282a to 282f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. , 283a to 283f are turned on. In addition, when a random number circuit error is notified, the same lamp control signal is output when the error lamp control execution data is pattern A and pattern B. The LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the 11 side are continuously turned on.

  When notifying an abnormal winning error, as shown in FIG. 73, first, serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 having addresses from “01” to “04” based on the error lamp control execution data for pattern A. A lamp control signal whose control data body is “00101010” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of all the bits corresponding to some of the LEDs of the lamp provided on the game frame 11 side are 1 is output, and some of the LEDs 281b of each lamp provided on the game frame 11 side. , D, f, h, j, l, 282b, d, f, 283b, d, f only are lit. As described above, in the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611, 1 in the second bit is an input signal to the LED 281b, 1 in the fourth bit is an input signal to the LED 281d, and 1 in the sixth bit is This corresponds to an input signal to the LED 281f. In the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612, the second bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 281h, the fourth bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 281j, and the sixth bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 281l. It corresponds to. In the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613, the second bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 283b, the fourth bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 283d, and the sixth bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 283f. It corresponds to. In the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614, the 1st bit is the input signal to the LED 282b, the 1st bit is the input signal to the LED 282d, and the 1st bit is the input signal to the LED 282f. It corresponds to.

  Further, when the process data is switched, based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern B, the lamp control whose control data body is “00010101” in the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 with addresses “01” to “04”. A signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of all the bits corresponding to some other LEDs of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are all 1 is output, and each lamp provided on the game frame 11 side. Only some of the other LEDs 281a, c, e, g, i, k, 282a, c, e, 283a, c, e are lit. As described above, in the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611, 1 in the first bit is an input signal to the LED 281a, 1 in the third bit is an input signal to the LED 281c, and 1 in the fifth bit is It corresponds to the input signal to the LED 281e. In the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612, the first bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 281g, the third bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 281i, and the fifth bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 281k. It corresponds to. In the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613, the first bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 283a, the third bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 283c, and the fifth bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 283e. It corresponds to. In the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614, the first bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 282a, the third bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 282c, and the fifth bit 1 is an input signal to the LED 282e. It corresponds to.

  When notifying the operation unit failure, as shown in FIG. 73, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is sent to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 having addresses “01” and “02”. Sent. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of the ceiling lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are turned on. Further, when notifying the operation unit failure, since the lamp control signal having the same content is output when the error lamp control execution data is the pattern A and the pattern B, the operation unit failure notification is being executed. The LEDs 281a to 281l of all the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are continuously turned on.

  In the example shown in FIG. 73, when performing error notification, the lamp control signal is also supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 of lamps that are not subject to display control. For example, when the RAM clear notification is given, it is not necessary to control the lighting or blinking of the pan lamp, but in the example shown in FIG. 73, the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is “05” is also supported. A lamp control signal whose bit logical values are all 0 is output. By doing so, it is possible to make sure that the LED that is not the control target in the error notification is turned off.

  When performing error notification, lamp control signals may not be output (transmitted) to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 of lamps that are not subject to display control. FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the lamp control signal output as the serial data method in the notification control process.

  When performing RAM clear notification, door opening error notification, random number error notification, or abnormal winning error notification, the dish lamp is not subject to display control, and as shown in FIG. 74, the serial whose address is “05”. -A ramp control signal is not output to the parallel conversion IC 615. In addition, when the ball break error notification or the prize ball error notification is performed, the left frame lamp and the right frame lamp are not subject to display control in addition to the dish lamp, and as shown in FIG. The lamp control signal is not output to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 613 to 615 that are "to" 05 ". Further, when performing full tank error notification, only the dish lamp is subject to display control. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 74, serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 614 whose addresses are “01” to “04” are displayed. Does not output the lamp control signal. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the lamp control signals output from the production control microcomputer 100 to the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the case where various error notifications are performed using only the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, and 82a to 82d of the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side has been described. However, in addition to these, various error notifications may be performed using center decoration lamps or stage lamp LEDs 125a to 125f and 126a to 126f provided on the game board 6 side. Further, each lamp provided in the operation unit 81 (first press operation unit lamp 82a to eighth press operation unit lamp 82h, operation unit center lamp 82A, first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l. Various error notifications may be performed using.

  Next, motor control signals that are output when the trolley 151 and the beam 152, which are game effects, are operated will be described. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a motor control signal output as a serial data system in a game effect. The motor control signal shown in FIG. 75 is, for example, when the change display including the notice effect using the trolley 151 and the beam 152 which are movable members is executed in the decorative symbol changing process shown in FIG. It is set in a predetermined data storage area in the serial setting process. The effect control microcomputer 100 stores the motor control signal shown in FIG. 75 in a predetermined motor control signal storage area provided in advance in the ROM in association with, for example, display control execution data. Then, the production control CPU 101 extracts a motor control signal from a predetermined motor control signal storage area based on the display control execution data, and outputs the motor control signal to the serial output circuit 353.

  As shown in FIG. 75, each motor control signal is stored in a predetermined lamp control signal storage area with the address of the output destination serial-parallel conversion IC 616 added thereto. In this embodiment, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 that supplies a control signal to each motor 151a, 152a is “06”, the address “0110” is added to the 8-digit data body for controlling the motor. It is stored in the state that was done.

  When the trolley 151 is operated in the forward direction as a movable member, a motor control signal whose control data body is “00000001” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is “06”. That is, a motor control signal in which the logical value of the bit (first bit of the control data) corresponding to the forward operation of the motor 151a for driving the truck 151 is 1 is output, and the truck 151 is driven by driving the motor 151a. Is operated. When the operation of the truck 151 is stopped, a motor control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is “06”. That is, a motor control signal whose logical value of the bit corresponding to the forward operation of the motor 151a (the first bit of the control data) is 0 is output, and the operation of the truck 151 is stopped by stopping the driving of the motor 151a. Is done. In this embodiment, when the trolley 151 is moved in the forward direction, the trolley 151 is detected by the position sensor 151b, and the driving time of the motor 151a has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). Then, the driving of the motor 151a is stopped.

  When the trolley 151 is operated in the reverse direction as a movable member, a motor control signal whose control data body is “00000010” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is “06”. That is, a motor control signal in which the logical value of the bit (second bit of the control data) corresponding to the reverse operation of the motor 151a for driving the trolley 151 is 1 is output, and the trolley 151 is driven by driving the motor 151a. Is operated. When the operation of the truck 151 is stopped, a motor control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is “06”. That is, a motor control signal having a logical value of 0 corresponding to the reverse operation of the motor 151a (the second bit of the control data) is output, and the operation of the truck 151 is stopped by stopping the driving of the motor 151a. Is done. In this embodiment, when the trolley 151 is operated in the reverse direction, the trolley 151 is not detected by the position sensor 151b, and the driving time of the motor 151a has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). Then, the driving of the motor 151a is stopped.

  When the beam 152 is moved in the forward direction as a movable member, a motor control signal whose control data body is “00000100” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is “06”. That is, a motor control signal in which the logical value of the bit (the third bit of the control data) corresponding to the forward operation of the motor 152a for driving the beam 152 is 1 is output, and the beam is driven by driving the motor 152a. Is operated. When the operation of the beam 152 is stopped, a motor control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is “06”. That is, a motor control signal having a logical value of 0 corresponding to the positive direction operation of the motor 152a (the third bit of the control data) is output, and the operation of the beam 152 is stopped by stopping the driving of the motor 152a. Is done. In this embodiment, when the beam 152 is moved in the forward direction, the beam 152 is detected by the position sensor 152b, and the driving time of the motor 152a has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). The driving of the motor 152a is stopped.

  When the beam 152 is moved in the reverse direction as a movable member, a motor control signal whose control data body is “00001000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is “06”. That is, a motor control signal having a logical value of 1 corresponding to the reverse operation of the motor 152a for driving the beam 152 (the fourth bit of the control data) is output, and the motor 152a is driven to drive the beam 152. Is operated. When the operation of the beam 152 is stopped, a motor control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is “06”. That is, a motor control signal having a logical value of 0 corresponding to the reverse operation of the motor 152a (the fourth bit of the control data) is output, and the operation of the beam 152 is stopped by stopping the driving of the motor 152a. Is done. In this embodiment, when the beam 152 is operated in the reverse direction, the beam 152 is not detected by the position sensor 152b, and the driving time of the motor 152a has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). The driving of the motor 152a is stopped.

  Further, in this embodiment, in steps S726 and S731A in the effect mode selection process and steps S754, S760, and S766 in the effect process at the time of operation, a lamp control signal for operating instructions to the serial-parallel conversion IC 622 and the serial-parallel conversion IC 623. Is output in the serial data format, the lamp display on the operation unit 81 is performed.

  FIG. 76A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an operation instruction process table. The operation instruction process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the production control CPU 101 performs lamp display control of the operation unit 81 to display various operation instructions is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls each lamp of the operation unit 81 according to the data set in the operation instruction process table and displays various operation instructions. The operation instruction process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values and operation instruction lamp control execution data are collected. In the process timer set value, the duration time in the lamp display state is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the operation instruction process table, and controls the lighting / non-lighting state of each lamp in a manner set in the lamp display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The operation instruction process table shown in FIG. 76A is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The operation instruction process table is prepared according to the type of operation instruction (decision operation instruction, rotation operation instruction, selection operation instruction). Further, in this embodiment, every time the operation instruction process timer times out, the lighting of the pattern A and the lighting of the pattern B are switched, and the lighting or blinking is controlled.

  FIG. 76B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a lamp control signal output as a serial data format in the effect mode selection process and the operation effect process. As shown in FIG. 76 (B), in this embodiment, operation instruction lamp control execution data of two patterns (pattern A and pattern B) is used for each operation instruction type. In this embodiment, the blinking display of the lamp is controlled by switching the operation instruction lamp control execution data of the patterns A and B. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the lamp control signal shown in FIG. 76B in a predetermined lamp control signal storage area provided in advance in the ROM in association with the operation instruction lamp control execution data. ing. Then, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a lamp control signal from a predetermined lamp control signal storage area based on the operation instruction lamp control execution data, and outputs the lamp control signal to the serial output circuit 353.

  Each lamp control signal is stored in a predetermined lamp control signal storage area with the address of the output destination serial-parallel conversion ICs 622 and 623 added thereto, as shown in FIG. 76 (B). For example, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 622 that supplies the control signal to the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to the eighth pressing operation unit lamp 82h is “12”, the 8-digit data main body for controlling the lamp is used. The address “00010010” is added and stored. Further, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 that supplies the control signal to the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l and the operation unit center lamp 82A is “13”, the lamp is controlled. Are stored with the address “00010011” added to the 8-digit data body.

  When performing the determination operation instruction display (see steps S731A and S760), first, based on the operation instruction lamp control execution data of pattern A, the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is “13” is transferred to the control data body. A lamp control signal with “00000001” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal having a logical value of 1 corresponding to the red light emission input terminal of the operation unit central lamp 82A, which is a multi-color LED, is output. A character string such as “!” Is lit. At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is “13” based on the lamp control execution data for pattern B operation instruction. The That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 0 is output, and the operation unit central lamp 82A is turned off. When the determination operation instruction display is performed by repeatedly performing such control, control is performed such that a character string such as “Press!” In red is blinked at predetermined time intervals in the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81. Done.

  When the rotation operation instruction display is performed (see steps S726 and S754), first, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000010” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is “13”. That is, a lamp control signal having a logical value of 1 corresponding to the blue light emission input terminal of the operation unit central lamp 82A, which is a multi-color LED, is output. A character string such as “!” Is lit. Further, when the rotation operation instruction display is performed, the lamp control signal having the same content is output when the operation instruction lamp control execution data is pattern A and pattern B. In 811, a character string such as “Turn it !!” in blue is continuously lit.

  When performing the selection operation instruction display (see step S766), first, based on the operation instruction lamp control execution data of the pattern A, the control data body is displayed in the serial-parallel conversion IC 622 whose address is “12”. A lamp control signal “00001111” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal having a logical value of 1 corresponding to the first pressing operation unit lamp 82 a to the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82 d is output, and the first pressing operation unit lamp is pressed in the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81. The lamps 82a to 82d are turned on. At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 622 whose address is “12” based on the lamp control execution data for pattern B operation instruction. The That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 0 is output, and the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d are turned off. When the selection operation instruction display is performed by repeatedly performing such control, the first operation button lamp 82a to the fourth operation button lamp 82d are blinked at predetermined time intervals in the operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81. Such control is performed.

  Next, the serial setting process will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the serial setting process. The serial setting process is, for example, when displaying decorative symbols in the effect control process (see Steps S835C and 845C) or when giving various error notifications (Steps S1970, S1976, S1983, S1990, S1998, S2003, S2008). , S2008d).

  In the serial setting process, the production control CPU 101 first reads lamp control execution data (lamp lighting pattern data accompanying the variation pattern, motor control data (step S835C only), etc.) from the ROM (step S950). . In this case, for example, when performing the serial setting process during the execution of the decorative symbol display, the effect control CPU 101 reads the lamp control execution data in the process table shown in FIG. When serial setting processing is performed in the notification control process, error lamp control execution data in the error notification process table shown in FIG. 72 is read. Further, when performing the serial setting process when performing the operation instruction display in the effect mode selection process or the operation effect process, the operation instruction lamp control execution data in the operation instruction process table shown in FIG. Will be read.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the display state of each lamp is changed based on the read lamp control execution data (step S951). If the display state of each lamp is changed, the CPU 101 for effect control extracts the lamp control signal to which the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC of the lamp to be displayed is added from a predetermined lamp control signal storage area ( Step S952). Next, header data (1FFh), a mark bit, and an end bit shown in FIG. 19 are added to the extracted ramp control signal and set in a predetermined data storage area provided in the RAM (step S953). Then, a lamp control signal output request flag is set (step S954).

  For example, when the serial setting process is executed in steps S907, S922, and S929 in the notification control process, one of the lamp control signals with an address shown in FIG. 73 is read in step S952, and the data is stored in step S953. It will be set to the area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads display control execution data from the ROM (step S955). In this case, for example, when performing the serial setting process during the execution of the decorative symbol display, the effect control CPU 101 reads the display control execution data in the process table shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the serial setting process is performed in the notification control process, the error notification process table shown in FIG. 72 does not include display control execution data, so that it is determined as N in the next step S956. become. When serial setting processing is performed in the effect mode selection process or the operation effect process, the operation instruction process table shown in FIG. 76A does not include display control execution data, so the next step S956. Thus, N is determined as it is.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the movable effect of any of the movable members 151 and 152 is included in the game effect based on the read display control execution data (step S956). When the movable members 151 and 152 are movable, the effect control CPU 101 adds a motor control signal to which the address (“06” in this example) of the serial-parallel conversion IC of the movable members 151 and 152 to be moved is added. Are extracted from a predetermined motor control signal storage area (step S957). Next, header data (1FFh), a mark bit, and an end bit shown in FIG. 19 are added to the extracted motor control signal and set in a predetermined data storage area provided in the RAM (step S958). Then, a motor control signal output request flag is set (step S959).

  For example, if a decorative display includes a notice effect or the like and any one of the movable members 151 and 152 is moved, when the serial setting process is executed in steps S835C and S845C, the display is changed in step S952. One of the motor control signals with an address shown in 75 is read out and set in the data storage area in step S953.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a data storage area in which a lamp control signal and a motor control signal to be output are set. In this example, nine data storage areas for storing the lamp control signal or the motor control signal are prepared, and the lamp control signal and the motor are sequentially output to the panel side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605. Control signals are sequentially stored in step S953.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the serial input / output process (step S708). In the serial input / output process, the production control CPU 101 first checks whether the lamp control signal output request flag or the motor control signal output request flag is set (step S970). If set, the lamp control signal output request flag or the motor control signal output request flag is reset (step S971), and the lamp control signal and the motor control signal stored in the data storage area are transferred to the serial output circuit 353. Output (step S972). In this case, when a plurality of lamp control signals are set in the data storage area, the effect control CPU 101 sequentially reads each lamp control signal and outputs it to the serial output circuit 353 in step S972. The output lamp control signal and motor control signal are converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353 and serially transmitted to the board side IC board 601 and the frame side IC boards 602 to 605 via the relay boards 606 and 607. It will be output as a data method.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 causes the input capture signal output unit 357 to output an input capture signal (latch signal) to the board side IC substrate 601 via the relay substrates 606 and 607 (step S973). The input IC 621 mounted on the panel-side IC board 601 latches the detection signals of the position sensors 151b and 152b based on the input input signal being input, and passes through the relay boards 606 and 607 as a serial data system. And output to the effect control board 80. Then, the effect control CPU 101 reads the input data from the serial input circuit 354 and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the RAM (step S974). In step S974, the effect control CPU 101 controls the serial input circuit 354 to read the input data from the serial input circuit 354 after delaying the time by which the serial input circuit 354 receives the input data from the input IC 621.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 causes the input capture signal output unit 357 to output an input capture signal (latch signal) to the frame side IC substrate 605 via the relay substrate 607 (step S975). The input IC 620 mounted on the board-side IC board 605 has the first press detector 81a to the fourth press detector 81d, the first rotation detector 81e, and the second rotation based on the input input signal being input. The detection signal of the detector 81f is latched and output to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 607 as a serial data system. Then, the effect control CPU 101 reads the input data from the serial input circuit 354 and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the RAM (step S976). In step S976, when the operation (pressing operation) of the pressing operation unit 811 in the operation unit 81 is detected, the effect control CPU 101 sets the above-described failure determination operation detection flag. In step S976, the CPU 101 for effect control controls the serial input circuit 354 to read the input data from the serial input circuit 354 after delaying the input data from the input IC 620 by a time.

  FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the situation of the display effect in the effect display device 9, the sound effect by the speaker 27, and the display effect by each lamp. FIG. 80 (A) shows an example when the decorative display is displayed on the effect display device 9 in a variable manner.

  FIG. 80 (B) shows an example in which initialization notification is performed in the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 80 (B), when the initialization display command 9 is received and initialization notification is performed in the effect display device 9, a predetermined period (for example, 31 seconds) after receiving the initialization specification command, The LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (except the dish lamp) provided in the game frame 11 are turned on, and a predetermined error sound is output from the speaker 27, and the RAM is cleared. Inform you.

  In FIG. 80C, abnormality notification is performed in the effect display device 9, abnormality notification sound is output by the speaker 27, and abnormality notification display (for example, LED 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f of each lamp) An example in the case of blinking) is shown. When receiving the abnormal prize notification designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to display an abnormality notification screen on the production display device 9, and outputs an abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27. Control is performed to display abnormality notification on the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of each lamp. Further, even when the decorative pattern variation display is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9, the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27, and the LEDs 281a to 281l of the respective lamps, The abnormality notification display of 282a to 282f and 283a to 283f is continued. Even when the decorative symbol variation display is finished, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9, the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27, and the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f of the respective lamps. The abnormality notification display is continued.

  Since the production control microcomputer 100 does not execute control for deleting the abnormality notification screen, control for stopping the output of the abnormality notification sound, and control for stopping the abnormality notification display, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 is not performed. The output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 and the abnormality notification display of the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of each lamp continue until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. However, when the predetermined time has elapsed after the display of the abnormality notification screen, the output of the abnormality notification sound, and the abnormality notification display is started, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the abnormality notification screen, the output of the abnormality notification sound, and the abnormality notification. You may control to stop a display.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 does not detect abnormal winnings for a predetermined period after the power supply to the gaming machine is started (period in which the initialization notification is executed), and controls the game control. The abnormal winning notification designating command is not transmitted from the microcomputer 560. However, the game control microcomputer 560 always detects an abnormal winning when the value of the special symbol process flag is less than a predetermined value (5 in this embodiment), so that the effect control microcomputer 100 can play the game. If an abnormal winning notification designation command is received during a predetermined period after the power supply to the machine is started, the abnormal winning notification may not be performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 detects that one game ball has won a big winning opening when it is not in the big hit game state, the abnormal control notification designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer. Although it is transmitted to 100, when it is detected that a predetermined number (a plurality of) game balls have won the big winning opening when not in the big hit gaming state, an abnormal winning notification designation command may be transmitted. Further, when it is not in the big hit gaming state, when it is detected that a predetermined number (a plurality of) gaming balls have won within a predetermined time, an abnormal winning notification designating command may be transmitted. When receiving the abnormal winning notification designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the abnormality notification screen, outputs the abnormality notification sound, and displays the abnormality notification as described above.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the pressing operation unit 811 that can be pressed by the player and the rotation operation unit 812 that can be rotated by the player are provided. Therefore, by providing a plurality of operation means, it is possible to further improve the game playability. Further, when a predetermined game condition is established, a display member 811A is provided that displays in a visible manner that either the pressing operation unit 811 or the rotation operation unit 812 should be operated by the light from the operation unit central lamp 82A. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player which operation means is used. Therefore, even when a plurality of operation means are provided, the player can easily recognize which operation means should be operated, and the gaming machine in which the operation by the operation means is smoothly advanced. be able to.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the rotation operation unit 812 is arranged in a shape surrounding the periphery of the pressing operation unit 811, whereby the pressing operation unit 811 and the rotation operation unit 812 are integrally configured. . Therefore, a plurality of operation means can be installed without taking up more space than necessary.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the display member 811A is provided inside the pressing operation portion 811. Therefore, as long as the display of the pressing operation unit 811 is confirmed, the player can easily recognize which operation means should be operated.

  Further, according to this embodiment, a character string such as “Press!” Indicating that the pressing operation unit 811 should be operated is displayed on the display member by causing the operation unit center lamp (multi-color LED) 82A to emit red light. 811A is displayed so as to be visible. Further, by causing the operation unit center lamp 82A to emit light in blue, a character string such as “Turn!” Indicating that the rotation operation unit 812 should be operated is displayed on the display member 811A so as to be visible. Therefore, which operation means should be operated can be recognized by a character string, and the player can easily recognize which operation means should be operated.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 is based on the effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 560, and the LEDs 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282a to A control signal for controlling 282f, 283a to 283f is output by a serial signal system. Further, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619, 622, and 623 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 provide one system wiring. Are connected to each other in advance, different address information is assigned in advance, and only the control signal with its own address information added is converted into a parallel signal system and output. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 can specify the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 when outputting a control signal for controlling the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619, 622, and 623 provided in the game board 6. A control signal with appropriate address information is output in a serial signal system. In addition, when the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a control signal for controlling the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 provided in the game frame 11, address information that can identify the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 is provided. The added control signal is output by the serial signal system. Therefore, the number of wirings between the game board 6 and the game frame 11 can be reduced. Therefore, in a gaming machine in which the game frame 11 and the game board 6 are configured to be detachable, the detachment work between the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be easily performed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the relay boards 606 and 607 are mounted on the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619, 622 and 623 mounted on the board side IC board 601 and the frame side IC boards 602 to 604. The connection with the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 is relayed. Further, the relay board 607 relays the connection between the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC boards 602 to 604 and the effect control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the detachment work between the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be easily performed only by performing the connection work to and the removal work from the relay boards 606 and 607.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the frame side IC substrate 602 as a collective substrate on which two serial-parallel conversions 611 and 612 are mounted is provided on the game frame 11 side. Further, a board-side IC board 601 as a collective board on which four serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619, 622, and 623 are mounted is provided on the game board 6 side. Therefore, the boards on which the serial-parallel conversion ICs are mounted can be integrated, and the number of parts in the gaming machine can be reduced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619, 622, and 623 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 are provided. Are connected through one line of wiring using a connector. Therefore, the wiring work between the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be performed only by attaching / detaching the connector, and the work of attaching / detaching the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be performed more easily.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the serial signal system using the serial output circuit 78. Therefore, the number of wires between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 can also be reduced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619, 622, 623 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601. A clock signal used in common for the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 and the input ICs 620 and 621 is output. Therefore, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619, 622, and 623 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 and the input ICs 620 and 621 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 can be easily performed. The number of clock signal wirings can also be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 may store the device IDs of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619 and 622 as addresses in a predetermined address storage area of the RAM in advance. With such a configuration, ID information unique to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619, 622, and 623 is used as address information, and the lamps 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283a. 283f and 82a to 82i can be controlled.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the initialization notification is given priority over the abnormality notification, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization notification is difficult to recognize. That is, the initialization notification is performed prominently. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits an initialization designation command when a user reset that causes the program to start executing from the top address (for example, address 0000) occurs even when power supply to the game machine is started. As a cause of the occurrence of the user reset, for example, in the case where the watchdog timer is configured to be used, there is a case where the watchdog timer has timed out due to an illegal act that prevents the smooth progress of the program. Such fraudulent acts are configured to be controlled in a probabilistic state, particularly when a predetermined jackpot symbol (predetermined probability variation jackpot symbol or sudden probability variation jackpot symbol) is determined based on a random number for determining the jackpot symbol It is likely to occur when it is. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is initialized, and a counter for generating a jackpot symbol determining random number is initialized, and it is easy to receive an illegal act that makes it easy to grasp the count value of the counter. By making the initialization notice conspicuous as in this embodiment, it is possible to easily grasp from the outside of the gaming machine that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has been initialized. Is easily recognized.

  In this embodiment, the production control board 80, the relay board 606, and the relay board are connected as the production control board 80, the board side IC board 601, the frame side IC boards 602-605, and the relay boards 606 and 607. 607 is connected to the bus type by one system wiring route, and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619, 622, and 623 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604 are one system in the bus type. Although the case where it connects by wiring route was demonstrated, each serial-parallel conversion IC616-619,622,623 mounted in the board | substrate side IC board | substrate 601 is connected in series (henceforth daisy chain type connection), The serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 605 are connected in series (daisy chain). By type connection) may reduce the number of wires.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 of the effect control board 80 outputs a clock signal to the relay board 607 together with serial data as a control signal, and the relay board 607 receives the serial data input from the effect control microcomputer 100 and The clock signal may be further supplied to the board side IC board 601 through the relay board 606.

  Further, as the LED of the lamp provided in the game frame 11 or the game board 6, an LED that performs gradation control (for example, a multi-color LED) may be used so that the brightness can be controlled. When the gradation control of the LED is performed, the production control microcomputer 100 uses a serial output circuit 353 to transmit a control signal including information on the number of pulses according to the luminance (for example, logical value 0 or 1). Output as. The production control microcomputer 100 is not limited to the number of pulses, and may output a control signal including information on a pulse width corresponding to the luminance as a serial data system using the serial output circuit 353. When controlling the brightness using the LED of the lamp that performs such gradation control, the serial-parallel conversion IC that outputs a control signal to the LED of the lamp that adjusts the luminance, and the control signal to the LED of the lamp that does not adjust the luminance May be different from the serial-parallel conversion IC that outputs.

  Further, gradation control may be performed by the LEDs 125a to 125f and 126a to 126f of the respective lamps mounted on the game board 6 side. In this case, the panel-side IC board 601 also has a serial-parallel conversion IC that outputs a control signal to the LED of the lamp that does not adjust the brightness, and a serial-parallel conversion IC that outputs a control signal to the LED of the lamp that adjusts the brightness. Will be installed separately.

  When adjusting the brightness in this way, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the number of pulses according to the brightness when the LED of the lamp emits light as a control signal for controlling the light emission state of the LED of the lamp. Output a signal. Thereby, gradation control for adjusting the luminance of the LED of the lamp can be performed. Note that gradation control is not limited to the case where gradation control is performed by outputting a signal with a changed number of pulses, and gradation control is performed using other methods as long as a signal with a changed pulse amount is output. May be. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may perform gradation control of the LED of the lamp by outputting a signal in which the pulse width is changed.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 ends the initialization notification when a predetermined period has elapsed (see steps S901 to S905), but ends the initialization notification at another timing. Also good. For example, the initialization notification is ended when the decorative symbol variation display is started for the first time after the initialization notification is started, or the abnormal winning notification designation command is received before the decorative symbol variation display is started. Sometimes the initialization notification may be terminated. Alternatively, the initialization notification may be terminated when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received or when the first effect control command other than the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received after the initialization notification is started. That is, it is preferable that the initialization notification is continued for a period sufficient for the game shop clerk or the like to recognize the initialization notification.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control means receives the variation pattern command, but when the display result specifying command cannot be received, the variation pattern command that can be used for both a normal big hit and a probable big hit. When it is determined that a change pattern command other than a change pattern command that can be used for both a normal big hit and a probable big hit is received is determined. Since the stop symbol is determined to be a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the received variation pattern, the effect display device 9 can notify that a big hit will occur even if the display result specifying command cannot be received due to noise or the like. Furthermore, immediately after receiving the variation pattern command, when it is determined that an effect control command other than the display result specifying command has been received, the above-described control based on the received variation pattern command may be performed. In other words, the effect control means determines that the regular command has not been received (for example, the display result specifying command cannot be received) or determines that the non-normal command has been received (for example, the display result subsequent to the variation pattern command). When an effect control command other than the specific command is received), it is preferable to execute effect control (for example, to determine a stop symbol of a decorative symbol) based on the received regular command. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged due to non-reception of a regular command or reception of a non-regular command.

  The same control may be performed for other effect control commands. For example, when a jackpot start designation command that can identify the start of a specific gaming state is received, if it does not match the display result identification command that has already been received (for example, a display result 2 designation command indicating a normal jackpot is a display result identification When it is stored in the command storage area, when the jackpot start 3 designation command indicating the probability variation jackpot is received, the production control based on the jackpot start designation command (eg, the probability change jackpot is notified by the rendering device) ) Or when a jackpot end designation command that can identify the end of a specific gaming state is received, if it does not match the jackpot start designation command that has already been received (for example, a jackpot start 1 designation command indicating a normal jackpot) After receiving a jackpot end designation command when a jackpot end designation 2 command indicating a probability big hit is received) The basis effect control (e.g., the background of the effect display device 9 on the background corresponding to the probability variation state) is executed. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the control of the effect control means from being confused as much as possible with the control of the game control means.

  Further, in this embodiment, the pressing operation is performed during a period in which the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 811 is requested at the time of performing the effect that specifies the super reach as shown in (e) to (i) of FIG. Only when the pressing operation is detected by any one of the first press detector 81a to the fourth press detector 81d when the pressing operation of the part 811 is performed, the operation shown in FIG. The effect display device 9 may be controlled so that the display shown in (g) of FIG.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing another example of the operation time effect process. The operation time effect process of FIG. 81 is different from the operation time effect process of FIG. 58 in that steps S759a and S761a to S763a are provided instead of steps S759 and S760 to S762.

  When it is determined in step S758 that it is a period for requesting a pressing operation, it is determined whether or not the above-described determination operation detection flag is set (step S759a). When it is determined that the determination operation detection flag is set, the effect display device 9 is controlled according to the determination operation (step S761a). Specifically, in step S761, in the chance display as shown in FIG. 25G, the value of the power displayed in the bar graph format increases in accordance with the increase in the number of pressing operations by the determination operation of the pressing operation unit 811. Display. Then, in response to the determination operation of the pressing operation unit 811 being performed, serial setting is performed to cause the LEDs corresponding to the determination operation (for example, the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d) to emit light. Processing is executed (step S762a). Then, the determination operation detection flag is reset (step S763a), and the process ends.

  When the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 811 is performed during the period in which the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 811 is requested by such an effect process during operation, the first press detector 81a to the fourth press detector 81d. Only when a pressing operation is detected by any of the plurality of pressing detectors, it is determined that the pressing operation is effective.

  In this embodiment, when the determination operation is displayed as an instruction, a character string such as “Press!” Is displayed in red on the pressing operation unit 811. When the rotation operation is displayed as an instruction, blue is displayed on the pressing operation unit 811. However, the mode of displaying the operation instruction on the operation unit 81 is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment. For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), when the determination operation is displayed as an instruction, the pressing operation unit 811 blinks (may be lit), and when the rotation operation is displayed as an instruction, as shown in FIG. As shown in b) and (c), the lamps on the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 811 may be rotated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 82 (d), the operation unit 81 includes first to eighth pressing operation unit lamps 82h, which are monochromatic LEDs, on the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 811. In addition, an operation unit center lamp 82 </ b> A that is a monochromatic LED is provided in the center of the pressing operation unit 811. In this case, when the determination operation is instructed and displayed, control is performed so that the pressing operation portion 811 blinks (may be lit) as shown in FIG. 82A by causing the operation portion central lamp 82A to emit light. To do. In the case of displaying the rotation operation, for example, the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a, the eighth pressing operation unit lamp 82h, the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d, the seventh pressing operation unit lamp 82g, the third pressing operation, for example. As shown in FIGS. 82B and 82C, the lamps are lit in the order of the partial lamp 82c, the sixth pressing operation unit lamp 82f, the second pressing operation unit lamp 82b, and the fifth pressing operation unit lamp 82e. Control is performed so that the lamp on the outer peripheral portion of the pressing operation unit 811 is rotated and displayed in the clockwise direction. In addition, you may control so that the lamp | ramp of the outer peripheral part of the press operation part 811 may be rotated and displayed counterclockwise.

  FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the lamp control signal output as a serial data format in the effect mode selection process and the operation effect process. In the example shown in FIG. 83, when the determination operation instruction display is performed (see steps S731A and S760), first, the serial-parallel whose address is “13” based on the pattern A operation instruction lamp control execution data. A lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000001” is transmitted to the conversion IC 623. That is, a lamp control signal having a logical value of 1 corresponding to the operation unit central lamp 82A, which is a single color LED, is output, and the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 is turned on. At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is “13” based on the lamp control execution data for pattern B operation instruction. The That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 0 is output, and the operation unit central lamp 82A is turned off. When the determination operation instruction display is performed by repeatedly performing such control, as shown in FIG. 82A, control is performed such that the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 blinks at predetermined time intervals. .

  When rotating operation instruction display is performed (see steps S726 and S754), the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a and the eighth pressing operation unit are performed according to the operation instruction lamp control execution data from pattern 1 to pattern 8 shown in FIG. A lamp 82h, a fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d, a seventh pressing operation unit lamp 82g, a third pressing operation unit lamp 82c, a sixth pressing operation unit lamp 82f, a second pressing operation unit lamp 82b, and a fifth pressing operation unit lamp 82e. A lamp control signal whose logical value of the corresponding bits is 1 is output, and as shown in FIGS. 82 (b) and 82 (c), the lamp on the outer peripheral portion of the pressing operation portion 811 is rotated and displayed in the clockwise direction. .

  Note that the lamp control signal and the output mode of the lamp control signal when the selection operation instruction display is performed (see step S766) are the same as the control contents described with reference to FIG.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the display member 811A in which character strings are printed with different paints for the determination operation instruction and the rotation operation instruction is shown, but the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 is determined. A display member may be provided separately for the operation instruction and the rotation operation instruction. FIG. 84C is a cross-sectional view showing another structural example of the operation unit 81. As illustrated in FIG. 84C, the operation unit 81 includes a display member 811B for determining operation display and a display member 811C for instructing rotation operation. Each of the display members 811B and C is a resin-made translucent member, and is formed into a sheet having a constant thickness and a circular shape slightly smaller than the inner peripheral size of the pressing operation portion 811. Further, the display member 811B has a character string such as “push!” Engraved on the upper surface of a plate formed of a resin member such as an acrylic material. The display member 811C has a character string such as “Turn it!” Engraved on the upper surface of a plate formed of a resin member such as an acrylic material. In addition, not only a character string but a figure, a pattern, etc. may be engraved on the display members 811B and 811C, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (c), a red (or colorless) single color LED 82B is provided on the side of the display member 811B. In addition, a blue (or colorless) single color LED 82C is provided on the side of the display member 811B. In the example shown in FIG. 84, when the determination operation instruction is displayed, the red single color LED 82B blinks (may be turned on), thereby pressing the operation unit 81 as shown in FIG. In 811, control is performed to display a character string such as “Press!” In red. Further, when the rotation operation instruction display is performed, the blue single-color LED 82C is turned on (may be blinking), and as shown in FIG. It is controlled to display a character string such as “Turn it!”.

  FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of addresses given to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615, 622, and 623. In the example shown in FIG. 85, the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is 13 converts serial data into parallel data, and the red LED 82B provided in the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 and the pressing operation of the operating unit 81 The blue LED 82C provided in the unit 811 and the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l (four LEDs in this example) provided in the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 are supplied. When a signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 to the red LED 82B, as shown in FIG. 84A, a character string such as “Press!” Is displayed in red on the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81. To be controlled. When a signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 to the blue LED 82C, as shown in FIG. 84B, a character string such as “Turn !!” is displayed in blue on the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81. To be controlled.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the determination operation is instructed and displayed, the pressing operation unit 811 is made to blink (may be lit), and when the rotation operation is instructed and displayed, As shown in 86 (b), the rotation operation unit 812 may be turned on (may be blinking). In this case, the operation unit center lamp 82A need not be a multi-color LED, but may be a single-color LED.

  In the example shown in FIG. 86 (b), the rotation operation unit 812 is turned on (may be blinking). Generally, however, the rotation operation unit 812 is made of an opaque member by performing a plating process or the like. In this case, the rotation operation unit 812 cannot be turned on or blinked. Therefore, you may make it further provide the light emission part for the rotation operation part 812 formed with the member made from a translucent resin on the outer side of the rotation operation part 812. FIG. Then, the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l are arranged in the light emitting unit for the rotation operation unit 812 provided outside the rotation operation unit 812, and the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to The player may be urged to operate the rotation operation unit 812 by lighting the fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l to light (or blink) the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 812. .

  FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing still another example of addresses given to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615, 622, and 623. In the example shown in FIG. 87, the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is 13 converts serial data into parallel data, and is provided in the operation unit center lamp 82 </ b> A that is a single color LED and the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81. The first rotation operation section lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation section lamp 82l (four LEDs in this example) are supplied. When a signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 to the operation unit center lamp 82A, the pressing operation unit 811 is controlled to blink (may be lit) as shown in FIG. 86 (a). When a signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 to the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l, the rotation operation unit 812 is turned on (blinks as shown in FIG. 86B). ) Controlled to display.

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing still another example of a lamp control signal output as a serial data format in the effect mode selection process and the operation effect process. In the example shown in FIG. 88, when the determination operation instruction display is performed (see steps S731A and S760), first, the serial-parallel whose address is “13” based on the pattern A operation instruction lamp control execution data. A lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000001” is transmitted to the conversion IC 623. That is, a lamp control signal having a logical value of 1 corresponding to the operation unit central lamp 82A, which is a single color LED, is output, and the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 is turned on. At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is “13” based on the lamp control execution data for pattern B operation instruction. The That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 0 is output, and the operation unit central lamp 82A is turned off. When the determination operation instruction display is performed by repeating such control, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), control is performed such that the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 blinks at predetermined time intervals. .

  When the rotation operation instruction display is performed (see steps S726 and S754), first, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111100” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is “13”. That is, a lamp control signal having a logical value of 1 corresponding to the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l is output, and the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 is turned on. In addition, when the rotation operation instruction display is performed, the same lamp control signal is output when the operation instruction lamp control execution data is pattern A and when pattern B is shown in FIG. 86B. As described above, the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 is continuously turned on.

  Note that the lamp control signal and the output mode of the lamp control signal when the selection operation instruction display is performed (see step S766) are the same as the control contents described with reference to FIG.

  In this embodiment, characteristic configurations of gaming machines as shown in the following (1) to (8) are shown.

(1) A gaming machine in which a player can perform a predetermined game using a game medium, and is a first operating means that can be pressed by the player (for example, pressing in the first embodiment) An operation unit 811), a second operation means that can be rotated by a player (for example, the rotation operation unit 812 in the first embodiment), and a light source unit that emits light in a plurality of types of light emission modes (for example, a first operation unit). If the predetermined game condition is established with the operation unit center lamp 82A) which is a multi-color LED in the embodiment, either the first operation unit or the second operation unit should be operated by the light from the light source unit A gaming machine comprising a display member (for example, the display member 811A in the first embodiment) that displays the effect in a visible manner.
According to such a configuration, since the first operation means that can be pressed by the player and the second operation means that can be rotated by the player, the plurality of operation means are provided. By providing, it is possible to further improve the playability. In addition, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied, the display device is configured to include a display member that visibly displays that either the first operation unit or the second operation unit should be operated by the light from the light source unit. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player which operation means is used. Therefore, even when a plurality of operation means are provided, the player can easily recognize which operation means should be operated, and the gaming machine in which the operation by the operation means is smoothly advanced. be able to.

(2) In the gaming machine, the first operation means and the second operation means are integrally formed by arranging the second operation means so as to surround the first operation means. (For example, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10 and the like, the rotation operation unit 812 that is a jog dial is arranged in a shape surrounding the press operation unit 811 that is a push button switch). It may be configured.
According to such a configuration, the first operating means and the second operating means are integrally configured by arranging the second operating means in a shape surrounding the first operating means. Therefore, a plurality of operation means can be installed without taking up more space than necessary.

(3) The display member is provided inside the first operation means (for example, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the display member 811A is arranged inside the pressing operation portion 811. May be configured).
According to such a configuration, since the display member is configured to be provided inside the first operation means, the player can perform any operation only by confirming the first operation means. It can be easily recognized whether the means should be operated.

(4) The display member displays a character or a character string indicating that the first operation means should be operated by light from the light source unit so as to be visible (for example, in the first embodiment, the display member 811A 8 (b) includes a character string display such as “Press!” Printed with red paint 811b that emits red light by red light), and second light by light from the light source unit. A display unit (for example, in the first embodiment, the display member 811A is displayed in blue by blue light as shown in FIG. 8B) so that the character or character string indicating that the operation means should be operated is displayed. And the light source unit emits light in a predetermined first light emission mode (for example, emits red light). All the operation means First operation display control means (for example, in the first embodiment, the step of executing steps S731A and S760 in the production control microcomputer 110) that displays the character or the character string to the effect on the display member. By causing the light source unit to emit light in a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode (for example, emitting blue light), a character or a character string indicating that the second operating means should be operated can be visually recognized on the display member. It may be configured to include second operation display control means (for example, in the first embodiment, the portion for executing steps S726 and S754 in the production control microcomputer 100 in the first embodiment).
According to such a configuration, by causing the light source unit to emit light in the predetermined first light emission mode, the first display unit displays the character or the character string indicating that the first operation unit should be operated in a visible manner. By causing the operation display control means and the light source unit to emit light in a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, a character or a character string indicating that the second operation means should be operated can be visually recognized on the display member. Since it is configured to include the second operation display control means to be displayed, it is possible to recognize which operation means should be operated by characters or character strings, and which operation means should be operated by the player Can be easily recognized.

(5) The gaming machine has an effect display device (for example, the effect display device 9 in the first embodiment) that performs a predetermined effect, and effect control means (for example, the first embodiment) that controls the effect display device. And the first operating means is a pressing operation member (for example, a pressing operation member that can be pressed by a player in a plurality of predetermined directions (for example, four directions of front, rear, left, and right). The pressing member 811a) in the first embodiment and a plurality of pressing operation detection means (corresponding to each of a plurality of predetermined directions) and detecting a pressing operation by the pressing operation member in the corresponding direction ( For example, the first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press detector 81c, and the fourth press detector 81d) in the first embodiment and one of the plurality of press operation detection means. When a pressing operation is detected by the pressing operation detecting means, a first pressing detection signal (for example, one pressing in the first embodiment) that can specify the direction of the pressing operation detected by the pressing operation detecting means. The first press detection signal output means (for example, the first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press in the first embodiment) that outputs the detection signal output from the detector) to the effect control means. When any one of the detector 81c and the fourth press detector 81d and the input IC 620) and at least two press operation detection means among the plurality of press operation detection means are detected, A second pressure detection signal (for example, detection signals output from at least two pressure detectors in the first embodiment) different from the first pressure detection signal is output to the effect control means. Second press detection signal output means (for example, at least one of the first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press detector 81c, and the fourth press detector 81d in the first embodiment) The effect control means corresponds to the operation direction of the pressing operation specified by the first press detection signal based on the input first press detection signal. First display control means for performing display control for performing the first display (for example, the display of the character selection image shown in FIGS. 27B and 27C in the first embodiment) on the effect display device. (For example, in the first embodiment, steps S671, S672, S765, and S768 in the production control microcomputer 100 are executed) and the input second The second display that performs a display operation different from the first display (for example, the display of the effect mode determination image in FIG. 24D of FIG. 24 in the first embodiment) based on the press detection signal 2nd display control means (for example, the part which performs step S673, S674, S732, S734 in the production control microcomputer 100 in the first embodiment) that performs display control performed in the apparatus. It may be.
According to such a configuration, the pressing operation member that can be pressed in a plurality of predetermined directions is provided as the operating member, and the pressing operation is detected when the pressing operation is detected by one pressing operation detecting means. A first display that performs a display operation corresponding to a direction is performed, and when a pressing operation is detected by at least two pressing operation detection means, a second display that performs a display operation different from the first display is performed. It is. By doing so, since different display operations can be performed based on operating one operation member in different operation modes, the operation member can be made multifunctional. In addition, such multi-functionality can prevent an increase in the number of operation members in the operation means, so that the installation area of the operation means can be saved. Further, such multi-functionalization diversifies the display operation performed in accordance with the operation of the operation means, so that the fun as a game can be improved.

(6) The gaming machine includes an effect display device (for example, the effect display device 9 in the first embodiment) that performs a predetermined effect, and effect control means (for example, the first embodiment) that controls the effect display device. And the first operating means is a pressing operation member (for example, a pressing operation member that can be pressed by a player in a plurality of predetermined directions (for example, four directions of front, rear, left, and right). The pressing member 811a) in the first embodiment and a plurality of pressing operation detection means (corresponding to each of a plurality of predetermined directions) and detecting a pressing operation by the pressing operation member in the corresponding direction ( For example, the first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press detector 81c, and the fourth press detector 81d) in the first embodiment and one of the plurality of press operation detection means. When a pressing operation is detected by the pressing operation detecting means, a pressing operation detection signal (for example, one pressing detector in the first embodiment) that can specify the direction of the pressing operation detected by the pressing operation detecting means. Detection operation signal output means (for example, the first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, and the third press detector 81c in the first embodiment). And any one of the fourth press detectors 81d and the input IC 620), and the effect control means is a press specified by the press operation detection signal based on the input press operation detection signal. The first display that performs the display operation corresponding to the operation direction of the operation (for example, the display of the character selection image of FIGS. 27B and 27C in the first embodiment) is displayed. Display control means (for example, the portion in steps S671, S672, S765, and S768 in the production control microcomputer 100 in the first embodiment) and predetermined game conditions (for example, in the first embodiment) When the super-reach effect display condition in the first embodiment is established, the operation direction of the pressing operation specified by the pressing operation detection signal is determined based on the input pressing operation detection signal. First, display control is performed in which the third display that performs a display operation different from the first display (for example, the display that stores the power shown in FIG. 25G in the first embodiment) is performed in the effect display device. 3 display control means (for example, step S in the production control microcomputer 100 in the first embodiment) 671 to S674, S759 and S761).
According to such a configuration, the pressing operation member that can be pressed in a plurality of predetermined directions is provided as the operating member, and the pressing operation is detected when the pressing operation is detected by one pressing operation detecting means. When the first display that performs the display operation corresponding to the direction is performed and a predetermined game condition is satisfied, when the pressing operation is detected, the operation direction of the pressing operation specified by the pressing operation detection signal is detected. Regardless, a third display that performs a display operation different from the first display is performed. By doing so, different display operations can be performed based on operating one operating member, so that the operating member can be multifunctional. In addition, such multi-functionality can prevent an increase in the number of operation members in the operation means, so that the installation area of the operation means can be saved. In addition, such multi-functionalization diversifies the display operation performed in accordance with the operation of the operation means, so that the fun as a game can be improved. Furthermore, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied, the second display is performed when the pressing operation is detected regardless of the operating direction of the pressing operation, so that the operability of the operating means can be improved. .

(7) The gaming machine includes game medium lending operation means (for example, the ball lending switch 91 in the first embodiment) for performing a game medium lending request operation, and the first operation means and the second operation. The means is arranged on substantially the same plane as the portion of the gaming machine where the game medium lending operation means is provided (for example, in the first embodiment, in FIGS. 3 and 4). As shown, the operation unit 81 including the pressing operation unit 811 and the rotation operation unit 812 is disposed on the surface on which the operation unit 81 of the hit ball supply tray 3 is provided), and the game medium lending operation means is a player In the state where it is not operated by (1), it is disposed at a position recessed from the surface of the part of the gaming machine (for example, in the first embodiment, as shown in the sectional view in FIG. Recessed from the surface where the operation unit 81 is provided As a location, a sphere rental switch 91 is arranged) may be configured so.
According to such a configuration, the game medium lending operation means is configured to be disposed at a position recessed from the surface of the part of the gaming machine in a state where it is not operated by the player. When the operation means or the second operation means is being operated, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the lending operation by the game medium lending operation means is erroneously performed.

(8) The gaming machine includes an effect display device (for example, the effect display device 9 in the first embodiment) that performs a predetermined effect, and effect control means (for example, the first embodiment) that controls the effect display device. And the first operating means is a pressing operation member (for example, a pressing operation member that can be pressed by a player in a plurality of predetermined directions (for example, four directions of front, rear, left, and right). The pressing member 811a in the first embodiment, and a pressing detection means for detecting the pressing operation by the pressing operation member (for example, the first pressing detector 81a, the second pressing detector 81b in the first embodiment, the second 3 pressure detector 81c, 4th pressure detector 81d), and pressure detection signal output means (for example, output to the effect control means) a pressure detection signal capable of specifying the direction of the pressure operation detected by the pressure detection means. The first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press detector 81c, the fourth press detector 81d, and the input IC 620) in the first embodiment, and the press detection signal output means The pressure detection signal is output by a serial signal method (for example, in the first embodiment, the input IC 620 latches the detection signals of the first pressure detector 81a to the fourth pressure detector 81d and uses the serial data method). It may be configured to output to the production control microcomputer 100 via the relay boards 606 and 607).
According to such a configuration, since the press detection signal output means is configured to output the press detection signal in a serial signal system, the wiring between the first operation means and the effect control means is simplified. can do.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 89 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine as seen from the front. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out as prizes according to the game. It can also be applied to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2B formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding a game board described later). Is a structure including

  There is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 on the lower surface of the glass door frame 2B. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for launching the game balls are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a substantially circular game area 7 inside the rail 82 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  The player plays a game by operating the hitting operation handle 5 in order to launch a game ball toward the game area 7. In response to the launching operation, a hitting ball launching device (not shown) launches a game ball. The game ball launched by the hit ball launching device enters the game area 7 through the hit ball rail.

  The plate-like body constituting the game board 6 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate (for example, an acrylic plate) having transparency. The game area 7 includes a transparent game area 71 and an opaque area 72. In the opaque region 72, for example, a decorated film (opaque member) is attached to the front or back surface of the transparent synthetic resin plate, or the decoration is drawn on the transparent synthetic resin plate itself. Further, the opaque region 72 may be formed by attaching an opaque decorative member to the back surface of the transparent synthetic resin plate having transparency. The opaque region 72 includes an upper opaque region 72A, a side opaque region 72B, and a lower opaque region 72C.

  On the back side of the game board 6, an image display device (variable display device) 9 including a plurality of variable display units each variably displaying a decorative pattern for performance is provided. The screen of the image display device 9 is visible. In the image display device 9, for example, three decorative symbols “left”, “middle”, and “right” as decorative (effect) symbols are variably displayed, and effect display is performed. The image display device 9 performs variable display of decorative symbols during the variable display period of special symbols by the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The image display device 9 that performs variable display of decorative designs is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board and a drawing processor.

  In the transparent game area 71, a gate (passing gate) 32A is provided at the bottom. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32A is detected by the gate switch 32a. In the transparent game area 71, a decoration member 73 is attached to the left side. In this example, the decorative member 73 is a star-shaped opaque frame. On the display screen of the image display device 9, a special effect display is performed at a portion corresponding to the inside of the decorative member 73 (inside the frame). Therefore, it is visually recognized by the player as if a special effect display is performed inside the decorative member 73. In addition, a decoration member 82 is installed in the central portion of the transparent game area 71 so as to surround a portion on the display screen of the image display device 9 where variable display of identification information and display effects accompanying variable display are performed.

  Note that the gate switch 32a and the decoration member 73 are opaque members, and in the transparent game area 71, in the portion where the gate switch 32a is provided and the portion where the decoration member 73 is provided (frame-like portion), the player Cannot visually recognize the display screen of the image display device 9. However, the decorative member 73 may be formed of a transparent member. Further, it may be integrally formed with a transparent plate-like body constituting the game board 6.

  A gate 32B is provided across both the transparent game area 71 and the lower opaque area 72C. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32B is detected by a gate switch 32b (not shown).

  A first start winning opening 13 is provided in the lower opaque area 72C. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a. A variable winning ball device 15 that forms a second starting winning port 14 is provided below the first starting winning port 13. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16, and when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, a game ball can be won in the second start winning port 14. It is not possible to win a prize in the closed state. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a.

  Below the variable winning ball apparatus 15, a special variable winning ball apparatus 20 that is opened by a solenoid 21 in a specific gaming state (big hit state) is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 has an opening / closing plate, and the large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) is opened by controlling the opening / closing plate to be opened. The winning ball that has won the special variable winning ball device 20 is detected by the count switch 23.

  The lower opaque area 72C is provided with a plurality of winning holes (ordinary winning holes) 29, 30, 33, and 39. Detected by 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Each winning opening 29, 30, 33, 39 constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game media and allowing winning. The start winning openings 13, 14 and the big winning opening also constitute a winning area that accepts game media and allows winning.

  The upper opaque area 72A is provided with a first special symbol display (first special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display (second special symbol display device) 8b that variably display special symbols as identification information. It has been. In this embodiment, the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are realized by a simple and small indicator (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, for example. Yes. The image display device 9 performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) during the variable display period of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b have more types such as 0 to 99 in order to make it difficult to grasp whether the stop symbol is a probability variation symbol or a non-probability variation symbol. It may be configured to variably display numbers. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a may be referred to as a first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as a second special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Some of them may be different. As an example, the first special symbol type includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the second special symbol type is a character other than numbers 0 to 5 and the first special symbol. Different characters may be included.

  In the upper opaque area 72A, four first special symbol hold memories for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the number of first hold memories (also referred to as start memories or start prize memories). A display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory display 18a displays up to four first storage numbers in order of winning. The first special symbol storage memory display 18a increases the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 each time there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. Then, each time the variable display is started by the first special symbol display device 8a, the first special symbol hold storage display device 18a decreases the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 (that is, turns off one LED). Specifically, the first special symbol storage memory display 18a shifts the lighting state every time variable display is started on the first special symbol display 8a.

  The upper opaque area 72A is provided with four second special symbol storage memory indicators 18b for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. The second special symbol reserved memory display 18b displays up to four second reserved memory numbers in the order of winning. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of lit LEDs by 1 each time there is a start winning in the second start winning opening 14. Then, each time the variable display is started on the second special symbol display unit 8b, the second special symbol hold storage display unit 18b decreases the number of lit LEDs by 1 (that is, turns off one LED). Specifically, the second special symbol hold storage display 18b shifts the lighting state each time variable display is started on the second special symbol display 8b.

  In this example, an upper limit number (up to 4) is provided for the number of starting memories by winning to the first start winning opening 13, 14, but the upper limit number may be 4 or more.

  The upper opaque area 72A is provided with a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols. When a game ball wins the gate 32A or the gate 32B and is detected by the gate switch 32a or the gate switch 32b, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting left and right lamps (designs can be visually recognized when lit). For example, if the right lamp is lit at the end of variable display, it is a win. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In addition, a normal symbol start memory display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls entered into the gates 32A and 32B is provided. Each time there is a prize at the gate 32, the normal symbol start memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  In the side opaque area 72B, a prize ball display 51 for displaying the number of payouts during the payout of a prize ball as a prize to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball in the prize area, and the number of rounds during a big hit game Is displayed.

  Two speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  Further, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter also simply referred to as a “card unit”) that enables ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown). The card unit includes, for example, a use indicator lamp that indicates whether or not the card unit is in a usable state, a connection table direction indicator that indicates which side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 corresponds to the card unit, When checking the card insertion indicator lamp indicating that the card is inserted, the card insertion slot into which the card as a recording medium is inserted, and the card reader / writer mechanism provided on the back of the card insertion slot A card unit lock is provided to release the unit.

  The game balls launched from the hit ball launching device enter the game area 7 through the hit ball rail, and then descend the game area 7. If the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, the first special symbol display unit 8a can display the first special symbol variably if the variable display of the symbol can be started. (Fluctuation) is started, and the decorative pattern is variably displayed (variation) on the image display device 9. If the variable display of the symbol cannot be started, the first start winning memorized number is increased by one. When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, the second special symbol display unit 8b displays the second special symbol if the variable display of the symbol can be started. While the variable display (variation) is started, the decorative design in the image display device 9 starts variable display (variation). If the variable display of the symbol cannot be started, the second start winning memory number is increased by one.

  The variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 9 are stopped when a certain time has passed. If the special symbol (stop symbol) at the time of stoppage is a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is released until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls wins.

  When the game ball wins the gate 32A or the gate 32B, the normal symbol display unit 10 is variably displayed. Further, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. Further, in the probability variation state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided with an operation portion 81 as an operation means that can be operated by a player. The operation unit 81 includes a plurality of operation units including a pressing operation unit 811 that can perform a pressing operation and a rotation operation unit 812 that can perform a rotating operation. In this embodiment, the configuration of the operation unit 81 and the detection method of the operation signal from the operation unit 81 (specifically, the pressing operation unit 811 and the rotation operation unit 812) are the same as those in the first embodiment. Since it is the same as the structure shown, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the mechanism portion of the gaming machine. FIG. 91 is a cross-sectional view showing a longitudinal section of the gaming machine. The game board 6 is attached to the game frame 2A in the outer frame 2, and an LCD image display device 9 attached to the attachment plate 90 is installed on the back side of the game frame 2A. A space 76 exists between the game frame 2 </ b> A and the image display device 9. In the space 76, a movable member 78 is installed on the back surface of the upper opaque region 72 </ b> A (a position corresponding to the upper opaque region 72 </ b> A). The movable member 78 is attached to the game board 6 by a base portion attachment portion 78B integrated with the movable member 78, is attached to the shaft of the motor 78A, and is rotated about the shaft of the motor 78A. 78 moves. Note that FIG. 90 also shows a stopper 2C for stopping the game frame 2A.

  On the back surface of the image display device 9, a main unit 31A including a game control board and an effect unit 80A including an effect control board are attached. 90 and 91, the rectangular parallelepiped movable member attachment portion A is attached over both the back surface of the upper opaque region 72A and the back surface outside the game region, and is integrated with the movable member 78. A member for attaching 78B. In addition, the movable member mounting portion A is formed so as to cover the electrical component group provided in the upper opaque region 72A. As an electrical component (unit) in the electrical component group provided in the upper opaque region 72A, a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold memory display There are electrical components including each of 18a, the second special symbol storage memory indicator 18b and the normal symbol start memory indicator 41. The rectangular parallelepiped cover portion B is attached to both the back surface of the side opaque region 72B and the back surface outside the game region, and is formed so as to cover the electrical component group provided in the side opaque region 72B. Yes. As electrical components in the electrical component group provided in the side opaque region 72 </ b> B, there are electrical components including the prize ball display 51 and the round number display 75. The rectangular parallelepiped cover C is attached to both the back surface of the lower opaque region 72C and the back surface outside the game region, and is formed to cover the electrical component group provided in the lower opaque region 72C. As electrical components in the electrical component group provided in the lower opaque region 72C, the first start winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, the variable winning ball apparatus 15, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and the winning opening (ordinary winning opening) ) There are electrical parts including 29, 30, 33, and 39 (including a detection switch for the prize opening). The side opaque region 72B and the lower opaque region 72C need not be provided.

  Further, the upper opaque area 72A includes an electrical component including the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, an electrical component including the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol storage memory display 18a and the first special symbol display memory 18a. 2 An electrical component including the special symbol storage memory display 18b, an electrical component including the normal symbol start memory display 41, and an electrical component including the prize ball display 51, and an electrical component including the round number display 75 Alternatively, an electrical component including any one of the first start winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, the variable winning ball apparatus 15, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 may be installed. Good. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the electrical components is installed.

  Moreover, although the movable member attachment part A is attached over both the back surface of 72 A of upper opaque area | regions, and the back surface outside a game area | region, you may make it attach to either one back surface. Further, it is not always necessary to cover the electrical component group provided in the upper opaque region 72A.

  In addition, the movable member 78 is attached to the upper opaque region 72A. Further, a movable member attachment portion for attaching an attachment portion integrated with the movable member to the side opaque region 72B and the lower opaque region 72C is provided. May be attached. Further, the movable member attaching portion may be attached to the cover portions B and C.

  The wiring A1 indicates a wiring that connects the electrical component group provided in the upper opaque region 72A and the main unit 31A. A wiring B1 indicates a wiring for connecting the electrical component group provided in the side opaque region 72B and the main unit 31A. The wiring C1 is a wiring that connects the electrical component group provided in the lower opaque region 72C and the main unit 31A. A wiring D1 indicates a wiring that connects the motor 78A and the rendering unit 80A. A wiring E1 indicates a wiring for connecting the image display device 9 and the effect unit 80A.

  The wirings A1, B1, C1, and D1 are holes provided in the lower side portion of the mounting plate 90 that passes through the lower side of the image display device 9 on the back side of the game board 6 and to which the image display device 9 is attached. It passes through a certain common wire passing part 79. The wiring E1 passes through, for example, a rectangular wiring passage portion 79B provided at a part of the mounting plate 90 corresponding to the back surface of the image display device 9. Note that the wiring F1 connected to the gate switch 32a passes under the image display device 9 on the back side of the game board 6, similarly to the wiring A1, the wiring B1, the wiring C1, or the wiring D1, and the image display device. 9 is attached to the main unit 31 </ b> A through a common wiring passage 79 which is a hole provided on the lower side of the attachment plate 90 to which 9 is attached.

  Moreover, you may install decoration members, such as LED, in any one of the upper opaque area 72A, the side part opaque area 72B, and the lower opaque area 72C, or a plurality of back surfaces. For example, when a decorative member is installed on the back surface of the upper opaque region 72A, the wiring connected to the decorative member passes under the image display device 9 on the back surface side of the game board 6 in the same manner as the wiring D1. Then, it passes through the common wiring passage 79 which is a hole provided on the lower side of the attachment plate 90 to which the image display device 9 is attached, and is connected to the effect unit 80A. The game balls that have won the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 20 and the like, and the game balls that have entered the out port 26 pass through a ball passage (not shown) provided in the space 76. It is discharged outside the gaming machine.

  The image display device 9 is preferably configured to be movable in the front-rear direction (the direction connecting the front side of the gaming machine and the back side of the gaming machine) in the gaming machine. For example, the image display device 9 can be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction by interposing a column between the image display device 9 and the mounting plate 90 and changing the height of the column. According to such a configuration, when the display unit including the image display device 9 is used in another model, it can be easily handled even when the width of the space 76 is different. In addition, when the thickness of the electrical component arrange | positioned on the back side of the upper opaque area 72A or the side opaque area 72B is different, the width of the space 76 is different.

  FIG. 92 is a front view for explaining the transparent game area 71 and the movable member 78 in the game area. In FIG. 92, the hatched portion from the upper left to the lower right indicates an opaque region (upper opaque region 72A, side opaque region 72B, lower opaque region 72C), and the portion not hatched is transparent. A game area 71 is shown. An area that is not the game area 7 on the surface of the game board 6 is referred to as “out of game area” 6B. The game area 7 is formed of a transparent game area 71 and an opaque area. The transparent game area 71 and the opaque area overlap with the area of the display screen 9A (inside the broken-line rectangle), that is, the display area of the image display device 9, but the display area also overlaps with the outside of the game area 6B.

  FIG. 92 shows a case where the movable member 78 is driven by the motor 78A to move to the transparent game area 71 and a case where the movable member 78 is stored in a position where it is not visually recognized by the player. The movable member 78 can be accommodated in a position (in the example shown in FIG. 92, outside the game area 6B and the upper opaque area 72A) that is not visually recognized by the player by the motor 78A. In this embodiment, the motor 78A is driven based on the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 by the player, and the movable member 78 is moved from the position where it is not visually recognized by the player to the transparent game area 71. Moving. In FIG. 92, an example is shown in which the movable member 78 is accommodated across the outside of the game area 6B and the side opaque area 72B (overlapping the outside of the game area 6B and the upper opaque area 72A). The movable member 78 may be accommodated so as to overlap only outside the game area 6B, or may overlap only in any opaque area (upper opaque area 72A, side opaque area 72B, or lower opaque area 72C). It may be stored. Actually, the movable member 78 is housed in the outside of the game area 6B or in the space 76 on the back surface of the transparent area. Hereinafter, the movable member 78 is expressed as “stored in the outside of the game area 6B (or the transparent area)”. There are things to do. In FIG. 92, four mounting brackets (a bracket for mounting the image display device 9 to the mounting plate 90: see FIG. 90) are also shown on the outside of the game board 6.

  FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which one effect is realized by the display effect in the image display device 9 and the movable member 78 stopped at a predetermined fixed position cooperating. In FIG. 93, a “dragon” -shaped member is the movable member 78, and a flame-shaped member expressed as a “dragon” -shaped member is displayed on the display screen 9 </ b> A of the image display device 9. 9c. As shown in FIG. 93, an image 73a having a different taste from that of the other part is displayed in the part corresponding to the inside of the decorative member 73 in the display screen 9A.

  A part of the movable member 78 (for example, the eye part of the “dragon” shape) may be transparent. In that case, on the display screen of the image display device 9, a special effect display (for example, an image such as a glowing eye) is performed on the portion corresponding to the transparent portion of the movable member 78. Therefore, it is visually recognized by the player as if a special effect display is performed on the transparent portion.

  FIG. 94 is a front view for explaining another type of movable member 78. FIG. 94 shows a case where the movable member 78 is driven by the motor 78A to move to the transparent game area 71 and a case where the movable member 78 is stored in a position where it is not visually recognized by the player. Also in the example shown in FIG. 94, the motor 78A is driven based on the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 by the player, and the movable member 78 is transparent from the position where the player cannot see it at all. Move to the game area 71. In the example shown in FIG. 94, the movable member 78 is connected to one end of the support member 78a, and the other end of the support member 78a is connected to the shaft of the motor 78A. The support member 78a is formed of a transparent material (for example, a transparent acrylic plate). Therefore, the part which overlaps with the transparent game area | region 71 is transparent. In the example shown in FIG. 93, when the movable member 78 moves to a position where it overlaps with the transparent game area 71, a part of the movable member 78 exists in the opaque area. However, in the example shown in FIG. 94, all parts of the movable member 78 overlap with the transparent game area 71.

  FIG. 95 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 95 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  In addition, detection signals from the gate switches 32a and 32b, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a are input to the game control microcomputer 560. A driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31. Further, a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control microcomputer 560 when the power is turned on, and an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state are sent to an external device such as a hall computer. An information output circuit (not shown) for outputting is also mounted on the main board 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a that variably displays the first special symbol, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays the second special symbol, and a normal symbol that variably displays the normal symbol. The display control of the display 10, the first special symbol hold memory display 18a, the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, and the normal symbol hold memory display 41 is performed.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control of the image display device 9 that receives and displays the decorative design variably is performed.

  FIG. 96 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 96, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103a. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the drawing processor (VDP: video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the image display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a rendering processor 109 that controls the display of the image display device 9 in cooperation with the rendering control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the rendering control board 80. The drawing processor 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the drawing processor 109 outputs the image data in the drawing area to the image display device 9. Hereinafter, writing image data in the drawing area is referred to as “drawing”. An image corresponding to the image data in the drawing area is displayed on the image display device 9.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM (not shown) to the drawing processor 109 in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including decorative designs), and background image data in advance. ROM. The drawing processor 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the drawing processor 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 96 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, the lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp, and the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to the eighth pressing operation unit lamp 82h, the operation unit center lamp 82A, the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation. This is supplied to each lamp provided in the operation unit 81 such as a unit lamp 82l.

  The LED driver 353 drives the winning ball display 51 and the round number display 75. When the payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 for paying out a prize ball, the payout control microcomputer pays out one game ball as a prize ball or a predetermined number of prizes. Each time the ball payout is completed, a prize ball payout command is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560. When the game control microcomputer 560 receives a prize ball payout command from the payout control microcomputer, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits an effect control command including the same information as the prize ball payout command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The effect control microcomputer 100 performs control for displaying the number of prize balls paid out on the prize ball display 51 in accordance with the effect control command. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs control for displaying the number of rounds on the round number display 75 according to the effect control command indicating the number of rounds received from the game control microcomputer 560 during the big hit game.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  Further, the production control CPU 101 inputs a detection signal from the operation unit 81 via the input port 103b. Specifically, the CPU 101 for effect control includes the first press detectors 81a to 81a provided in the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 as described in the first embodiment via the input port 103b. The detection signal from the 4-press detector 81d is input. Further, detection signals from the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f provided in the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 are input.

  FIG. 97 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the drawing processor 109. FIG. 97 also shows an effect control CPU 101 and a CGROM 83.

  When executing the display control of the image display device 6, the effect control CPU 101 gives a command corresponding to the effect control command to the drawing processor 109 via the CPU interface (CPU I / F) 92. If the command is a command to read image data from the CGROM 83, the drawing circuit 91 of the drawing processor 109 gives an instruction to read necessary data from the CGROM 83 to the CG bus interface (CG bus I / F) 93. The decoder 95 expands (decodes) the frame image data (image data of each frame constituting the moving image) subjected to data compression, and writes the expanded frame image data to the drawing material data memory 96A. The drawing circuit 91 in the drawing processor 109 generates image data to be displayed on the image display device 9 according to the input data, and writes the image data in the drawing area of the frame buffer 96B. The display circuit 98 outputs R (red), G (green), and B (blue) image signals and synchronization signals based on the image data in the drawing area to the image display device 9. The image display device 9 performs, for example, screen display by a dot matrix system that drives a large number of pixels (pixels).

  In the drawing processor 109, drawing material data read from the CGROM 83 is stored in a drawing material data memory (hereinafter referred to as VRAMRS) 96 </ b> A. As drawing material data, still image data or sprites constituting moving image data obtained by decoding (decompressing) moving image data encoded (data compressed) by the MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group phase 2) method or the like Image data (image data of a non-moving image (original still image)) is stored. In a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as VRAMFB) 96B, a drawing area that is a data storage area corresponding to the display screen can be secured. The drawing processor 109 has a built-in VRAM (video RAM), and the VRAMRS 96A and the VRAMFB 96B are formed in the VRAM. Hereinafter, when either the VRAMRS 96A or the VRAMFB 96B may be used when the drawing processor 109 executes the process, the expression “VRAM” may be used.

  Further, when playing back a moving image, the drawing processor 109 reads frame image data (data compressed) constituting the moving image data from the CGROM 83. Then, the decoder 95 expands the compressed frame image data and writes the expanded frame image data to the VRAMRS 96A. Hereinafter, writing the image data in the VRAMRS 96A or VRAMFB 96B may be referred to as developing the image data.

  A CG bus and a VRAM bus are provided inside the drawing processor 109. A CG bus interface (CG bus I / F) 93 is installed between the CGROM 83 and the CG bus. The CPU I / F 92 is also connected to the CG bus, and the effect control CPU 101 can access the portion connected to the CG bus via the CPU I / F 92. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 can access the drawing control register 95 connected to the CG bus.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the gaming machine is turned on and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether the contents of the program are valid. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is interrupted. It is a mode that indicates a cover address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process. In this example, if “55H” is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (ON state), and if a value other than “55H” is set, it means that there is no backup (OFF state).

  After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 56 performs a data check of the backup RAM area (parity check in this example) (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (first special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid This is a portion where data indicating the number of winning balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process (step S43). In the gaming state recovery process, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a power failure recovery command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery. Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, initial values are set for flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as the total number of winning balls storage buffer and the first special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets an initialization command transmission request flag in order to transmit an initialization command for initializing the sub board to the sub board (step S13). Examples of the initialization command include a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the image display device 9.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a big hit determination random number generation counter). A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 itself controls game devices such as an image display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the gaming machine. In a process to transmit, a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game device control process), the count value of the jackpot determination random number generation counter or the like is one round (a jackpot determination random number generation counter or the like) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value that can be taken, the initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S35 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switches 32a and 32b, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58. Then, the state determination is performed (switch process: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S33 and S34. Execute control.

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Decide whether or not to generate a big hit in response to the variable display of a special symbol based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening (for big hit determination)
(2) Random 2: Determines the special symbol detachment symbol (stop symbol) (for detachment symbol determination)
(3) Random 3: Determines the special symbol stop symbol when generating a big hit (for big hit symbol determination)
(4) Random 4: Determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (for variation pattern determination)
(5) Random 5: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(6) Random 6: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the random 1 initial value)
(7) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the random 5 initial value)

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 99, the game control microcomputer 560 determines (1) big hit determination random number, (3) big hit symbol determination random number, and (5) normal symbol hit determination. The counter for generating a random number for use is incremented (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may make it use random numbers other than the random number of said (1)-(7). In this embodiment, the big hit determination random number is a software random number generated based on a program by the game control microcomputer 560. However, as the big hit determination random number, hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560 is used. Alternatively, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560 may be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a first special symbol process (step S26A). In the first special symbol process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a second first special symbol process (step S26B). In the second first special symbol process, the corresponding processing is executed in accordance with the second first special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol indicator 8b and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the second first special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a hold storage process (step S28). In the hold storage process, the CPU 56 manages the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number, respectively, and calculates the total number (total hold memory number) that is the sum of the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number. Execute processing to calculate and manage.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (Step S31). Specifically, the payout control is performed in accordance with winning detection based on any one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S32: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data in accordance with the value of the first special symbol process flag. This is performed (step S33). For example, if the start speed set in the first special symbol process is set and the end flag is set, the CPU 56 passes 0.2 seconds if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds. Each time, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby variably displaying special symbols on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. Execute.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S34). For example, when the start flag for normal symbol variation is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (left side lighting and right side lighting) every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. In the case of the speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating left side lighting and 0 indicating right side lighting) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S35), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S34 (excluding step S30) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the jackpot determination value. The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the counter for generating the big hit determination random number at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the big hit determination random value. If it coincides with the judgment value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (probability big hit or normal big hit). Note that in FIG. 101B, numerical values are not shown and the number of numerical values is shown. In the normal state, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number value with the jackpot determination value described in FIG. In the probability variation state, the jackpot determination random number value is compared with the jackpot determination values set for the number described in FIG. The numerical values described in FIG. 101 (A) are set in the ROM 54 as normal jackpot judgment values, and the numerical values for the number shown in FIG. 101 (B) are set in the ROM 54 as probabilistic jackpot judgment values. Yes. The probability variation big hit is a big hit that shifts the gaming state after the big hit game to a probable state where there is a high probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state. Usually, the big hit is a big hit that shifts the gaming state after the big hit game to a state that is not a probable change state.

  In the probability variation state, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is determined as a winning symbol may be increased, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be increased, or the number of times of opening may be increased.

  FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions on the display screen of the image display device 9. In this embodiment, in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” variable display portions provided on the display screen of the image display device 9, the symbols indicating the numbers “1” to “9” are, for example, It is variably displayed in combination with a predetermined figure such as a quadrangle, a circle, a substantially diamond, or a star hexagon. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. The arrangement of decorative symbols displayed in each variable display section includes a common symbol displayed in the same display mode regardless of whether the production state (production mode) is production mode # 1 to # 3, and production. Selection symbols displayed in different display modes according to modes # 1 to # 3 are included.

  For example, symbols indicating numbers “1” to “6”, “8”, and “9” are combined with a rectangular figure regardless of which of the production modes # 1 to # 3. The symbol indicating the number “7” is combined with a circular figure when in the production mode # 1, combined with a substantially rhombus figure when in the production mode # 2, and a star-shaped hexagon when in the production mode # 3. Combined with the figure. The decorative symbols corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “6”, “8”, and “9” are common symbols, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol number “7” is a selected symbol.

  In this embodiment, the effect mode is controlled to effect mode # 1 when the game state is the normal state, and the effect mode is controlled to effect mode # 2 when the game state is the short time state, and the game state The production mode is controlled to the production mode # 3 when is in a certain change state. However, such a method of dividing the production mode is an example. For example, the player can select the production mode by operating means such as a push button provided on the gaming machine, or according to the time. You may comprise so that production mode may be switched.

  Further, in FIG. 89, the decorative design is shown without a quadrilateral, circular, approximately diamond-shaped, or star-shaped hexagonal figure.

  Further, in this embodiment, the display screen of the image display device 9 includes the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number, and the variable winning ball device 15 can easily accept the game balls. An area for displaying the total number (total number of reserved memory) that is the sum of the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14 formed in this state, that is, the second reserved memory number (hereinafter, symbol reserved memory display) Part)). In this embodiment, the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is easy to accept the game ball is when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state. Thus, in this embodiment, by displaying the total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number on the variable display device 9, the player can be notified of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. Difficult to grasp each of the numbers. In this embodiment, each of the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b is composed of four indicators such as lamps and LEDs smaller than the symbol reserved memory display unit. However, in order to make it difficult to grasp the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, a display device of another aspect may be used. As an example, each of the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b is composed of one display, and the display color is different according to the number of reserved memories or the display density is different. I will let you.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the total pending storage number that can be displayed, that is, the total pending storage number is 8. The symbol holding storage display unit increments the number of display areas to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Each time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of display areas to be lit is reduced by one. Alternatively, among the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit, the number of areas displayed in a color determined in advance as an effective start winning is increased by one. Each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of areas displayed in the color determined as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

  In this embodiment, the case in which the symbol hold storage display unit is provided in a part of the display area of the image display device 9 has been described, but it may be provided in a place different from the image display device 9. For example, a symbol holding storage display unit may be provided in a display area of a liquid crystal display device provided separately from the image display device 9. Further, for example, the symbol reservation storage display unit may be configured by eight indicators such as small lamps and LEDs. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where the number of lighting of the display area of a symbol reservation memory | storage display part is increased / decreased according to the start of an effective start winning prize or a variable display is shown, a symbol reservation memory | storage display part shows the sum total number of reservation memory | storage numbers. The number shown may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is set to 4. Accordingly, when the first reserved memory number is 4, and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13, the win becomes an invalid start win that does not satisfy the first start condition. When the first reserved memory number is less than 4 and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13, the win becomes an effective start win (first effective start win) that satisfies the first start condition. Similarly, when the second reserved memory number is 4, and a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14, the win becomes an invalid start win that does not satisfy the second start condition. When the second reserved memory number is less than 4 and a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14, the win becomes an effective start win (second effective start win) that satisfies the second start condition. In this example, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the combined reserved memory number is set to 8, but these values are an example. . Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to display the symbol hold storage display unit. As shown in FIG. 103 (A), the symbol hold storage display unit 18c provided in the image display device 9 can display up to eight total numbers as the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number. is there. When the first start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the first special symbol is not in a state that can be started, the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c is provided on the condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by one. In addition, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the variable display of the second special symbol is not in a state that can be started, the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c is provided on the condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by one (see FIG. 103B).

  FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern used in this embodiment. In FIG. 104, “EXT” indicates the second byte of EXT data in the effect control command having a two-byte structure. “Variation time” indicates the variation time of the special symbol (variable display period of identification information).

  In the example shown in FIG. 104, 10 types of first variation patterns # 1 to # 10 for the first special symbol and decorative design and 10 types of second variation patterns # 1 to # 10 for the second special symbol and decorative design. Types are used. Note that each of the first variation patterns # 1 to # 10 is the same as each of the second variation patterns # 1 to # 10, but is separately shown as an effect control command, and thus is shown separately in FIG. Yes. Hereinafter, for example, the variation pattern #n (n = 1 to 10) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

  “Normal fluctuation” is a fluctuation pattern without a reach mode. “Normal reach” is a variation pattern that is accompanied by a reach mode but whose display result (stop symbol) does not become a big hit symbol. “Reach A” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “normal reach”. Different reach modes mean that different modes of change (speed, direction of rotation, etc.), characters, etc. appear in the reach change time (the period during which the reach effect is performed). For example, in “normal reach”, a reach mode is realized by only one type of change mode, whereas in “reach A”, a reach mode including a plurality of change modes having different speeds and directions of change is realized.

  “Reach B” is a fluctuation pattern having a reach mode different from “Normal reach” and “Reach A”. “Reach C” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “normal reach”, “reach A”, and “reach B”.

  “Super reach” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “normal reach”, “reach A”, “reach B” and “reach C”. “Super Reach” includes “Super Reach A” and “Super Reach B”, and “Super Reach B” is realized by cooperating the display effect of the image display device 9 and the effect of the movable member 78. It is a fluctuation pattern with a production. Hereinafter, “super reach A” and “super reach B” may be collectively referred to as “super reach”.

  Note that “reach A”, “reach B”, and “reach C” may or may not be a big hit. In addition, “Super Reach” may be a big hit or not a big hit, but if variable display by “Super Reach” is executed, the stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol at a very high rate. In “Super Reach”, it may always be a big hit.

  “Normal variation / shortening” is a variation pattern that does not involve a reach mode, but the variation time (variable display time) is shorter than “normal variation”. “Reach A / shortening” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “reach A”, but the reach variation time is shorter than “reach A”. “Reach B / shortening” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “reach B”, but the reach variation time is shorter than “reach B”.

  105A to 105D are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of a variation pattern table. The CPU 56 extracts a count value of a counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the variation pattern determination random number. The variation pattern determination random number is shown in FIG. When the number of determination values matches the number of determination values, the variation pattern corresponding to the determination value is determined as the variation pattern to be used. Therefore, the variation pattern table is a table in which a determination value to be compared with the variation pattern determination random number is set in correspondence with the variation pattern. The variation pattern table is set in the ROM 54.

  FIG. 105A shows a variation pattern table (outlier variation pattern table) used when the gaming state is the normal state and it is determined to be out of play. FIG. 105 (B) is a variation pattern table (big hit variation pattern table) used when the gaming state is a normal state and it is determined to be a big hit. FIG. 105 (C) shows a variation pattern table (shift variation pattern table at the time reduction) that is used when the gaming state is a probability change state or a time reduction state and is determined to be out of play. FIG. 105 (D) shows a variation pattern table (short-time big hit variation pattern table) used when the gaming state is a probability variation state or a short-time state and it is determined to be a big hit.

  In the probability variation state and the short time state, the variation time of the special symbol is shortened compared to the normal state. In addition, the normal symbol variation time may be shortened in the probability variation state and the short time state.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the hold storage process. In the hold storage process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 (whether or not it has been detected by the first start opening switch 13a) (step S2751). If the game ball has won a prize, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for storing the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit of 4 (step S2752). If the value of the first reserved memory number counter has not reached the upper limit value, the value of the first reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1 (step S2753).

  Also, software random numbers (such as the value of a counter for generating a jackpot determination random number) are extracted and stored in the first reserved memory buffer corresponding to the value of the first reserved memory number counter as the extracted random number value. Processing to store in the area is executed (step S2754). In the first reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number are secured. Further, a counter for generating a jackpot determination random number and the like and a holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM. In step S2754, random values 1 to 4 (see FIG. 100) are extracted and stored in the storage area. Further, control is performed to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S2755). Then, control goes to a step S2756.

  When transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, specifically, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S29).

  In step S2756, the display state of the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a is changed to a state corresponding to the changed value of the first reserved memory number counter. That is, the first reserved memory number displayed on the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a is set to a number corresponding to the changed value.

  Then, the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number, that is, the total pending memory number counter for counting the total pending memory number is incremented by 1 (step S2757), and the process proceeds to step S2758.

  When the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (whether or not it has been detected by the second start opening switch 14a) (step S2758). Note that if the game ball has not won the first start winning opening 13 in step S2751, or if the value of the first reserved storage number counter has reached the upper limit of 4 in step S2752, step S2758 is also executed. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14. If a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for storing the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit of 4 (step S2759). . If the value of the second reserved memory number counter has not reached the upper limit value, the value of the second reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1 (step S2760).

  Also, software random numbers (such as a counter value for generating a big hit determination random number) are extracted and stored in the second reserved memory buffer corresponding to the value of the second reserved memory number counter as the extracted random number value. Processing to store in the area is executed (step S2761). In the second reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number are secured. Further, a counter for generating a jackpot determination random number and the like and a holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM. In step S2761, random values 1 to 4 (see FIG. 100) are extracted and stored in the storage area. Further, control is performed to transmit the second effective start winning command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S2762). Then, control goes to a step S2763.

  In step S2763, the display state of the second special symbol storage memory display 18b is changed to a state corresponding to the changed value of the second reservation memory number counter. That is, the second reserved memory number displayed on the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b is set to a number corresponding to the changed value.

  Then, the value of the total pending storage number counter indicating the total pending storage number, that is, the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is incremented by 1 (step S2764).

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing a signal line of an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 107, in this embodiment, the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 using eight signal lines of the effect control signals D0 to D7. Further, between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, a signal line of the effect control INT signal for transmitting the capture signal (effect control INT signal) is also wired.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. Therefore, when viewed from the effect control microcomputer 100, the effect control INT signal corresponds to a signal that triggers the capture of effect control command data.

  The effect control command is sent only once so that the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize it. In this example, “recognizable” means that the level of the effect control INT signal changes, and that it is sent only once so as to be recognizable means that, for example, each of the first and second bytes of the effect control command data Accordingly, the production control INT signal is output in a pulse shape (rectangular wave shape) only once. The effect control INT signal may have a polarity opposite to that shown in FIG.

  FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 109, commands 8001 (H) to 800A (H) are effect control commands for designating decorative pattern variation patterns that are variably displayed on the image display device 9 in response to variable display of the first special symbol. (First variation pattern command). The commands 8011 (H) to 801A (H) are effect control commands (second variation patterns) for designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 9 in response to variable display of the second special symbol. Command). The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives any of the commands 8001 (H) to 800A (H) and 8011 (H) to 801A (H), the image display device 9 starts variable display of the decorative symbols. To control. In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol are synchronized (the variable display start time and the variable display end time are the same), so the decorative pattern variation pattern (variation time) Determining also means determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and a gaming state after the big hit game. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the decorative symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H). Therefore, the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specifying commands.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the special symbol variable display (variation) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbols and derives and displays the display result. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, designates power-on. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Command A000 (H) displays the first fanfare screen, that is, starts the big hit game (also called the first big hit game) based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is the big hit symbol. This is an effect control command to be designated (first big hit start designation command: first fanfare designation command). The command A001 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the first jackpot end screen, that is, designating the end of the first jackpot game (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command). Command A002 (H) displays the second fanfare screen, that is, starts the big hit game (also called the second big hit game) based on the fact that the display result of the second special symbol variable display becomes the big hit symbol. This is an effect control command to be designated (second big hit start designation command: second fanfare designation command). Command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for displaying the second jackpot end screen, that is, for ending the second jackpot game.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached four. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached four. In this embodiment, a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first effective start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second effective start winning specified command. The first valid start winning designation command and the second valid start winning designation command are commands indicating that there has been a start winning. Further, instead of providing the first effective start winning designation command and the second effective start winning designation command separately, a common effective start winning designation command may be used.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 109, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  The special winning opening open designation command also serves as a round number designation command for designating the number of rounds. In addition to the effect control command shown in FIG. 109, an effect control command that can specify the number of prize balls to be paid out is also used.

  In this embodiment, similarly to FIG. 35 shown in the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a change pattern command and a display result specifying command at the start of change. When the variable display time has elapsed, a symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted.

  Note that before transmitting the variation pattern command, a background designation command for designating a background image in the image display device 9 according to the gaming state (eg, normal state / short time state / probability variation state) may be transmitted. In this case, out of the display result specifying commands shown in FIG. 109, the display result specifying commands (display result 1 specifying command, display result 2 specifying command, display result 3 specifying command) specified for losing may be combined into one command. it can.

  FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process (step S26A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the first special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special winning opening is executed.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed by two indicators, the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b. In this embodiment, control is performed so as not to simultaneously execute the special symbol variation display on the two displays, and the big hit based on the derivation display of the big hit symbol on the two displays does not occur simultaneously. Such control is performed.

  In the first special symbol process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the second big hit flag is set (step S311). If the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 ends the process as it is. The second jackpot flag is determined to be a big hit based on the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state based on the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol. It is a flag indicating that The second big hit flag is set when it is determined that the big hit is determined in the second first special symbol stop symbol setting process, and is reset in the second first big hit end process.

  If the second big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second changing flag is set (step S312). If the second changing flag is set, the CPU 56 ends the process as it is. The second changing flag is a flag indicating that the second special symbol is being changed. The second changing flag is set in the second first special symbol normal process when the second special symbol changing display is executed, and when the second special symbol changing display is stopped, It is reset by the second big hit symbol stop process.

  If the second changing flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs any one of steps S300 to S309. The processes in steps S300 to S309 are as follows.

  First special symbol normal process (step S300): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the first reserved memory number buffer (the number of reserved memories). The number of numerical data stored in the first reserved memory number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the first reserved memory number counter. If the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is checked whether the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is larger than the count value of the first reserved memory number counter. The state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301.

  First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S301): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. The stop symbol after the variable display of the first special symbol is determined. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  First variation pattern setting process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. The variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from when variable display is started until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variable display variation time of the first special symbol. Decide to do. Moreover, the 1st variation time timer which measures the variation time of the determined 1st special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  First display result specifying command transmission process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304.

  First special symbol changing process (step S304): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the first variation pattern setting process elapses (the first variation time timer set in step S302 times out, that is, the value of the first variation time timer becomes 0), the internal state (first 1 special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305.

  First special symbol stop process (step S305): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is stopped and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. If the first big hit flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S306. If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the image display device 9 to stop the decorative symbols when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  First jackpot display process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. A predetermined period is measured by the first jackpot display time timer, and when the predetermined period elapses, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  First big winning opening opening pre-process (step S307): This is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. In the first grand prize opening pre-processing, control for opening the special prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the first big prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). The first big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round. However, when starting the first round, the first big winning opening opening pre-processing is also a process of starting a big hit game.

  First big prize opening opening process (step S308): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. A control for transmitting a presentation control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for the presentation control, a process for confirming that the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S307. When all the rounds have been completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example).

  First big hit end process (step S309): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 9. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Further, a process for setting a flag (for example, a probability variation flag) indicating a gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S300) in the first special symbol process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is a state in which the second special symbol display unit 8b does not display the variation of the second special symbol and is not in the second big hit game. This is a case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300 is a state in which the first special symbol display unit 8a does not display the variation of the first special symbol, and This is a case where the first big hit game is not in progress.

  In the first special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is confirmed. Note that other methods may be used as long as the presence or absence of the first reserved memory number can be confirmed, for example, by confirming whether or not data such as a random number is stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is larger than the count value of the first reserved memory number counter.

  In step S52, the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number (that is, both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are not 0, and the second reserved memory number is larger). Means that both the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied at the same time. In this case, when the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number, the CPU 56 does not execute the processes after step S53 and does not start the variable display of the first special symbol. By doing so, when the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number, control is performed so that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol. Is done. When the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number, or when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are the same, the process proceeds to step S53, and the first special symbol changes. The display is controlled to be executed.

  When the second reserved memory number is not larger than the first reserved memory number in step S52, the CPU 56 determines each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S53), the value of the first reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and each storage area The contents are shifted (step S54). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is expressed as the first reserved memory number = n−. 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers are extracted always coincides with the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that. Then, the CPU 56 sets a first changing flag indicating that the first special symbol is changing (step S55), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S301). ) Is updated to a value corresponding to (step S56).

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S301) in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, the CPU 56 reads random 1 (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area (step S61), and executes the jackpot determination module (step S62). The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 101) determined in advance with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. When the gaming state is a probable change state, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot determination value in the table in which jackpot determination values for the number as shown in FIG. 101 (B) are set, and the gaming state is in the normal state (short time). (Including the state), the jackpot determination value in the table in which the jackpot determination value as shown in FIG. 101 (A) is set is used. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S63), the process proceeds to step S81. Note that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a a big hit symbol. It is also to do.

  If it is decided not to win, the CPU 56 reads out the design symbol random number from the random number buffer area (step S64), and determines the stop symbol based on the design symbol random number (step S65). In this case, an off symbol (for example, any of even symbols) is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

  In step S81, the CPU 56 sets a first big hit flag. Then, the big hit symbol determining random number is read from the random number buffer area (step S82), and the big hit symbol (for example, any of the odd symbols) is determined as the stop symbol based on the big hit symbol determining random number (step S83). Here, the stop symbol is determined without distinguishing between the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit, but the stop symbol may be determined separately. For example, when it is determined that the probability variation big hit, the stop symbol is determined to be “77”, and when it is determined that the normal big hit is determined, the stop symbol is determined to be any set of odd symbols other than “77”. You may do it.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation jackpot flag if it is determined to be a probability variation jackpot (steps S84 and S85). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S302) (step S86). When the probability change big hit flag is set, the game state is shifted to the probability change state when the big hit game is finished.

  In step S90, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S95. If it is set, the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S91). When the value of the probability variation counter reaches 0, a probability variation end flag is set (steps S92 and S93), and the process proceeds to step S86. If the value of the probability variation counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S86 as it is. When the probability change end flag is set, the gaming state is shifted from the probability change state to the time-short state when the variable symbol special display is ended.

  In step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S86. If it is set, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step S96). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0, the time reduction end flag is set (steps S97 and S98), and the process proceeds to step S86. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S86 as it is. In addition, when the short time end flag is set, the game state is shifted from the short time state to the normal state when the variable symbol special display ends.

  In this embodiment, it is determined based on the big hit determination random number whether or not to make a big hit and whether or not to control the probability variation state (see FIG. 101), but based on the big hit determination random number Whether or not to make a big hit, and when a predetermined big hit symbol (predetermined probable variable big hit symbol) is determined based on the random number for determining the big hit symbol, it is determined to control the probability change state. You may do it.

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S302) in the first special symbol process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number buffer area (step S101).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the total pending storage number counter is a predetermined value (for example, 4) or more (step S102A). If the value of the total pending storage number counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number to change the variation pattern of the shortened variation (first variation patterns # 1, # 4, # 6 shown in FIG. 104). A variation pattern is selected from a variation pattern table including only (step S102B). In step S102A, if the value of the total pending storage number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the CPU 56 may determine whether or not to reach using, for example, a reach determination random number. In this case, if the CPU 56 determines to reach, the CPU 56 may select a variation pattern with reach. If the CPU 56 decides not to reach, the CPU 56 may select a variation pattern of the shortening variation.

  If the value of the total pending storage number counter is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the CPU 56 selects a variation pattern from the normal variation pattern table (see FIG. 105) based on the variation pattern determination random number (step S102C). Here, if the gaming state is the normal state and it is determined to be out of play, a variation pattern is selected from the out-of-range variation pattern table (see FIG. 105A). When the gaming state is the normal state and it is determined to be a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the big hit fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 105 (B)). If the gaming state is a probability change state or a time reduction state and it is determined to be out of play, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 105C) during the time reduction. When the gaming state is a probability change state or a time saving state and it is determined to be a big hit, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the time reduction big hit fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 105D).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number counter and subtracts 1 from the value of the combined reserved memory number counter (step S102D), and proceeds to step S102E. In step S102E, the display state of the first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a is changed to a state corresponding to the changed value of the first reservation memory number counter. That is, the first reserved memory number displayed on the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a is set to a number corresponding to the changed value.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first variation pattern command (see FIG. 109) corresponding to the variation pattern selected in step S102 to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Moreover, the variation of the first special symbol is started (step S104). For example, a start flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time is set in the first variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first display result specifying command transmission process (step S303) (step S106).

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the first display result specifying command transmission process (step S303). In the first display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit any effect control command (see FIG. 109) from the display result 1 designation to the display result 5 designation (step S107). Here, if it is decided to win the probability big hit, a display result 5 designation command is transmitted, and if it is decided to make the normal big hit, a display result 4 designation command is transmitted. If the probability change end flag is set in the process of step S93, a display result 2 designation command is transmitted. If the time reduction end flag is set in the process of step S98, a display result 3 designation command is transmitted. To do. Otherwise, a display result 1 designation command is transmitted. Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol changing process (step S304) (step S108).

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S305) in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol variation processing, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (step S121), and when the first variation time timer times out (step S122), the CPU 1 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first value. Update to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S305) (step S123). If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated as it is.

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process (step S305) in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 to end the variation of the first special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the first special symbol display 8a. Control to derive and display is performed (step S131). Moreover, control which transmits the symbol determination designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for production control is performed (step S132). And when the 1st big hit flag is not set, it transfers to step S141 (step S133).

  If the first jackpot flag is set, control is performed to transmit a first jackpot start designation command (step S135). Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the big hit in the image display device 9, for example) is set in the first big hit display time timer (step S136), and the first changing flag is reset ( Step S136A). Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first jackpot display process (step S307) (step S137). In the first jackpot display process, when the first jackpot display time timer times out, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first jackpot opening pre-process (step S307). .

  In step S141, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation end flag is set. If the probability variation end flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S146. If the probability variation end flag is set, the probability variation end flag is reset (step S142), the probability variation flag is reset and the probability variation state is terminated (step S143). Further, the time reduction flag is set to change the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S144). 50 is set in the hour / hour counter indicating the number of possible fluctuations in the hour / short state (step S145). Then, the process proceeds to step S148A.

  In step S146, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction end flag is set. If the time saving end flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S149. If the time reduction end flag is set, the time reduction end flag is reset (step S147), and the time reduction flag is reset to end the time reduction state (step S148). The gaming state shifts to the normal state by resetting the time reduction flag.

  Next, the CPU 56 resets the first changing flag (step S148A), and updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S149).

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the process of the first big hit end process (step S309) in the first special symbol process. In the first jackpot end process, the CPU 56 resets the first jackpot flag (step S151) and performs control to transmit a first jackpot end designation command (step S152).

  Then, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S153). If the probability variation jackpot flag is set, the probability variation jackpot flag is reset (step S154). The probability variation flag is set and the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state (step S155). If the gaming state at that time is a probability variation state, the probability variation flag has already been set. Further, if the gaming state at that time is the time saving state, the time saving flag is reset (step S156). Then, 100 is set in the probability variation counter indicating the number of possible variations in the probability variation state (step S157), and the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S300) ( Step S158).

  If the probability variation big hit flag is not set, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step S161). If the probability change flag is set, the probability change flag is reset (step S162), the time reduction flag is set (step S163), and the gaming state is shifted from the probability change state to the time reduction state. Further, 50 is set in the time reduction counter (step S164), and the process proceeds to step S158.

  If the probability change flag is not set, if the gaming state at that time is a short-time state, the short-time flag is reset to shift the gaming state from the short-time state to the normal state (step S165), and the process proceeds to step S158. Transition.

  FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process (step S26B) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the second special symbol process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 8b and the special variable winning ball apparatus is executed.

  In the second special symbol process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step S311B). If the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 ends the process as it is. The first jackpot flag is determined to be a jackpot based on the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first jackpot flag is shifted to the jackpot gaming state based on the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol. It is a flag indicating that The first jackpot flag is set when it is determined to be a big hit in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, and is reset in the first jackpot end process.

  If the first big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first changing flag is set (step S312B). If the first changing flag is set, the CPU 56 ends the process as it is. The first changing flag is a flag indicating that the first special symbol is being changed. The first changing flag is set in the first special symbol normal process when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, the first off symbol stop process or the first It is reset by the big hit symbol stop process.

  If the first changing flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are the same number (step S313B). Specifically, it is checked whether the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is equal to the count value of the second reserved memory number counter. If the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are the same, the CPU 56 ends the process as it is. In this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are the same, the CPU 56 does not execute the processes of steps S300B to S309B and does not start the variable display of the second special symbol. To do. By doing so, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are the same, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the second special symbol. To be controlled. That is, in this embodiment, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are the same number, it is set in advance so that the variable display of the first special symbol is given priority.

  Note that when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are the same number, it may be set in advance so that the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority. In this case, in the first special symbol process (step S26A) shown in FIG. 110, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the second pending storage number and the second reserved memory number are not set in step S312. It may be confirmed whether or not the number of reserved memories is the same. If the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are the same number, the process is terminated as it is, and if it is not the same number, the process of any of steps S300 to S309 may be executed. That is, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are the same, the CPU 56 does not execute the processes of steps S300 to S309 and does not start the variable display of the first special symbol. . In this case, in the second special symbol process shown in FIG. 118, the CPU 56 does not perform the process of step S313B when the first variation flag is not set in step S312B.

  If the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are not the same number, the CPU 56 performs any one of steps S300B to S309B.

  Second special symbol normal process (step S300B): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the storage number (holding storage number) of the numerical data stored in the second holding storage number buffer. The number of numerical data stored in the second reserved memory number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the second reserved memory number counter. If the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is checked whether the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is larger than the count value of the second reserved memory number counter. The state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301B.

  In addition, the program of step S301B-S309B is comprised similarly to the program of step S301-S309 in a 1st special symbol process process (step S26A). That is, in the description of the processing of steps S301 to S309 in the first special symbol process, if “first” is read as “second” and “second” is read as “first”, steps S301B to S309B are executed. The process will be explained.

  FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is a state in which the first special symbol indicator 8a is not displaying the variation of the first special symbol and is not in the first big hit game. This is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. The case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process is a state where the second special symbol display unit 8b does not display the variation of the second special symbol. This is a case where the second big hit game is not in progress.

  In the second special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 checks the value of the second reserved memory number (step S51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is confirmed. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number (step S52B). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is larger than the count value of the second reserved memory number counter.

  In step S52B, the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number (that is, both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are not 0, and the first reserved memory number is larger). Means that both the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied at the same time. In this case, when the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number, the CPU 56 does not execute the processing after step S53B and does not start the variable display of the second special symbol. By doing so, when the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number, control is performed so that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the second special symbol. Is done. Further, when the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number, the process proceeds to step S53B, and control is performed so that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. When the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are the same number, control is performed so as not to proceed to steps S300B to S309B in the second special symbol process. The variable display of the first special symbol is executed in preference to.

  When the first reserved memory number is not larger than the second reserved memory number in step S52B, the CPU 56 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S53B), the value of the second reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and each storage area The contents are shifted (step S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is expressed as the second reserved memory number = n−. 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved memory numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that. Then, the CPU 56 sets a second changing flag indicating that the second special symbol is changing (step S55B), and the value of the second special symbol process flag corresponds to the second special symbol stop symbol setting process. The value is updated (step S56B).

  Next, an example of the variation of the decorative design will be described. 120 and 121 are explanatory diagrams showing the display state of the image display device 9 when the reach effect by the super reach A is executed. A rectangle shown in FIGS. 120A to 121P shows a display screen 9A in the image display device 9. FIG. When the variable display start timing comes, the left middle right symbol indicating the previous variable display result as shown in FIG. 120A starts rotating, and the left middle right symbol as shown in FIG. It will be in a rotated state. After high-speed rotation is performed for a predetermined period and the left symbol is rotated at a low speed for several symbols, when the left symbol is temporarily stopped, the left symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. The temporary stop state is a state where the stop symbol is stopped at a stage before the stop symbol is confirmed (finally stopped). In the temporary stop state, for example, the symbol fluctuates up and down or from side to side.

  Next, after the right symbol is rotated at a low speed for several symbols, when the temporary stop timing of the right symbol is reached, the right symbol is also temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. In this example, the left and right symbols are both “7” and the reach is temporarily stopped. This is called reach establishment. After reaching the reach display state as shown in FIG. 120D, a reach effect by super reach is executed.

  In the reach production by the super reach A, first, the production by the medium speed rotation is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (E), after “reach” is displayed to notify that the reach state has been reached, the middle symbol is rotated at a low speed by several symbols, and then the middle symbol is displayed. When the temporary stop timing is reached, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. When the middle symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect by the medium speed rotation ends.

  When the effect by the medium speed rotation is finished, the effect by the high speed rotation is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (G), after the display of “high-speed reach” for notifying that the reach effect by high-speed rotation is executed, high-speed rotation of the middle symbol is performed for a predetermined period. When the intermediate symbol temporary stop timing is reached, the intermediate symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. When the middle symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect of high-speed rotation ends.

  When the effect by the high speed rotation is finished, the moving image effect is executed. In the moving image effect, as shown in FIG. 121 (I), the display of “special reach” for notifying that the effect further developed than the effect by the high-speed rotation is executed is displayed, and the left and right during the temporary stop are displayed. The symbol is reduced and moved to the lower part of the screen, and the middle symbol starts rotating at high speed. Next, moving image display based on the moving image data is started, and display control is performed in which the character image gradually appears as shown in FIG. 121 (J). As shown in FIG. 121 (K), after the character image is completely displayed, when the temporary stop timing of the intermediate symbol is reached, the intermediate symbol is temporarily stopped. In the middle symbol temporarily stopped state, as shown in FIG. 121 (L), a moving image in which the character image swings down the hammer is displayed. In this example, moving image data for displaying a character image as a moving image is created so that the place where the middle symbol during the temporary stop is located coincides with the place where the hammer is swung down. Therefore, on the display screen of the image display device 9, an effect display is realized in which the character image swings down the hammer and hits the middle symbol that is temporarily stopped.

  Next, the temporarily stopped middle symbol disappears from the screen, and as shown in FIG. 121 (M), the middle symbol (“7” in this example) displayed next to the disappeared symbol descends from the top of the screen. A coming display is made. As shown in FIG. 121 (N), when the middle symbol that has descended from the upper part of the screen is in a temporary stop state, the moving image performs a motion such that the character image poses with the right hand based on the moving image data. An image is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (O), a display is made such that the character image gradually disappears. When the character disappears completely, the moving image effect based on the moving image data ends, and the left middle right symbol is finally stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 121 (P). When the left middle right symbol is stopped and displayed, the moving image effect ends, and the super reach A effect is completed.

  In the super reach B effect, after the display of “special reach” as shown in FIG. 121 (I) for informing that the effect further developed than the effect by the high speed rotation is executed, FIG. 122 (J) is displayed. , (K), the movable member 78 advances into the transparent game area 71 from outside the non-transparent area or the game area. Then, when reaching the position where the overlapping portion of the movable member 78 with the transparent game area 71 becomes the maximum, as shown in FIG. 122 (L), the image display device 9 is as if it is discharged from the movable member 78. A flame image is displayed. The image is displayed in the vicinity of the changing middle symbol. Note that the rectangles shown in FIGS. 122J to 122P indicate the display screen 9A in the image display device 9.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (M), an effect is performed as if the change of the middle symbol is stopped by the flame, and the movable member 78 is moved so as to leave the transparent game area 71 (not shown). First, as shown in FIG. 122 (P), the left middle right symbol is finally stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, the super reach A effect and the super reach B effect are effects in which an effect due to medium speed rotation, an effect due to high speed rotation, and an effect due to moving images are executed in order. Therefore, the contents of the effects of other reach effects (normal reach, reach A, etc.) are developed. In such a case, the appearance of the moving image display makes it possible for the player to have great expectation for the big hit, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect aspect of reach effect used in the normal state in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 123, the reach effects used in the normal state include six types of reach effects: normal reach, reach A, reach B, reach C, super reach A and super reach B. Normal reach rotates the special symbol (medium symbol) that stops last with medium speed after the special symbol display state reaches the reach mode (the left and right symbols are aligned in the same pattern) at medium speed. ). That is, the normal reach is a normal reach effect that is not a special effect that raises the player's expectation for the big hit. Reach A and Reach B are an extension of normal reach, and the special symbol (medium symbol) that stops last while maintaining the reach mode is rotated at medium speed, and the special symbol is rotated at high speed when a predetermined period has elapsed. Or it is an effect of reverse rotation. Reach B is an effect including a so-called return effect (an effect by a display in which the symbol rotates backward after the symbol stop position and the symbol returns to the stop position).

  Reach C, Super Reach A, and Super Reach B are an extension of Reach A, and the special symbol (medium symbol) that stops last while maintaining the reach mode was rotated at medium speed, and the special symbol was rotated at high speed. Thereafter, the frame advance or the moving image effect is performed.

  In this embodiment, the probability of jackpot occurrence for the appearance of reach production increases in the order of normal reach, reach A, reach B, reach C, super reach (super reach A and super reach B). . Specifically, for example, when super reach appears, the probability of winning a big hit is configured to be higher than when other reach effects appear (see FIG. 105). 120 to 122, the decorative design is shown without a quadrilateral, circular, approximately rhombus, and star hexagonal figure (see FIG. 102).

  Next, a data transfer method in the rendering processor 109 and a command (command) output from the rendering control CPU 101 to the rendering processor 109 will be described.

  FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram for explaining transfer of image data. The image data stored in the CGROM 83 can be transferred to the VRAMRS 96A. The image data stored in the CGROM 83 can be transferred to the VRAF 96B via the transfer area in the VRAM RS 96A. Also, the image data stored in the fixed area of VRAMRS 96A can be transferred to VRAFB 96B. Furthermore, the image data stored in VRAFB 96B can be transferred to VRAMRS 96A. Note that, for example, when the power supply is started, the drawing processor 109 fixes image data having a relatively high frequency of execution of effects by the effect image corresponding to the image data from the CGROM 83 to the VRAMRS 96A in response to a command from the effect control CPU 101. Transfer to region. Further, when writing the image data read from the CGROM 83 into the VRAMFB 96B, the drawing processor 109 once writes the image data into the VRAMRS 96A, reads the image data from the VRAMRS 96A, and writes it into the VRAMFB 96B.

  FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a command related to data transfer among commands output from the rendering control CPU 101 to the drawing processor 109. The CGROM transfer command is a command that is output when image data is transferred from the CGROM 83 to the VRAMRS 96A. The VRAMFB transfer command is a command that is output when image data is transferred from the VRAMRS 96A to the VRAMFB 96B. The inter-VRAMRS transfer command is a command that is output when the image data stored in the VRAMRS 96A is transferred to another region in the VRAMRS 96A.

  The drawing effect command is a command for designating a drawing effect when image data is transferred from the VRAMRS 96A to the VRAMFB 96B. The VRAMFB copy command is a command that is output when image data is transferred from the VRAMFB 96B to the VRAMRS 96A. The automatic transfer command is a command that is output when the image data stored in the CGROM 83 is transferred to the VRAF 96B via the VRAMRS 96A.

  In this embodiment, except for the address designation of the CGROM 83, the transfer source address (read address) and transfer destination address (write address) at the time of data transfer are commanded by the X coordinate and Y coordinate of the area. It can also be specified by the address itself where the image data is stored in the memory (ROM or RAM). Further, it is possible to designate a read address and a write address using an index created in advance (area address or the like is set).

  When the drawing circuit 91 of the drawing processor 109 receives the CGROM transfer command, the drawing circuit 91 causes the CG bus interface 93 to read the image data from the reading start address of the CGROM 83 and transfer the image data to the writing address of the VRAMRS 96A. When a VRAMFB transfer command is input, image data is read from the read address of VRAMRS 96A and written to the write address of VRAMFB 96B. When an inter-VRAM transfer command is input, image data is read from the read address of VRAMRS 96A and written to the write address of VRAMRS 96A. When a drawing effect command is input, when a VRAMFB transfer command is input, image synthesis is performed in accordance with parameters included in the drawing effect command.

  When the VRAMFB copy command is input, the drawing circuit 91 reads the image data from the read address of the VRAMFB 96B and writes it to the write address of the VRAMRS 96A. When an automatic transfer command is input, the CG bus interface 93 reads the image data from the read start address of the CGROM 83, transfers the image data to a predetermined area of the VRAMRS 96A, and further reads the image data from the predetermined area and writes it to the write address of the VRAMFB 96B. .

  FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing a command related to decompressing data-compressed moving image data among commands output from the rendering control CPU 101 to the drawing processor 109. The single stream start address is a command for designating a storage address of the image in the CGROM 83 when the moving image data of one moving image is expanded. The single stream area development command is a command for designating a storage address in the VRAMRS 96A of the image data after decompressing the moving image data of one moving image. The multi-stream start address is a command for designating storage addresses of the images in the CGROM 83 when decompressing moving image data of a plurality of (for example, two) moving images. The multi-stream area development command is a command for designating a storage address in the VRAMRS 96A of image data after decompressing moving image data of a plurality of moving images.

  The decode execution command is a command that specifies expansion of moving image data of a moving image. When the decoder 95 receives the decode execution command, the moving image data stored in the CGROM 83 in accordance with the single stream start address and the single stream region development command, and using the parameters of the multistream start address and the multistream region development command. Is decoded and stored in the VRAMRS 96A.

  FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing a data bus in a CG bus between the drawing circuit 91 and the CGROM 83 in the drawing processor 109. In FIG. 127, the CG bus I / F 93 (see FIG. 97) is not shown. As shown in FIG. 127, the data bus physically has 64 bits, but a 64-bit mode in which all 64 bits are used as a data bus, and a 32-bit mode in which lower 32 bits are used as a data bus. Can be switched to.

  In this embodiment, when image data is read from the ROM 83C in which moving image data is stored, the image data is read from ROMs 83A and 83B in which the 32-bit mode is set and still image (sprite image) data is stored. When reading, the 64-bit mode is set. Therefore, the image data of the sprite image is read from the CGROM 83 in 64-bit units, and the moving image data is read from the CGROM 83 in 32-bit units. In FIG. 127, for convenience of drawing, the ROM 83C is described so that the data bus extends from the ROM 83A. However, in reality, the data bus between the drawing control unit 91 and the ROM 83A branches to the ROM 83C. Wired.

  FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram for explaining decorative design image data stored in the CGROM 83. As shown in FIG. 128 (A), “7” decorative design and graphic image data are stored in the selected image data area in the CGROM 83. The decorative pattern indicating the number “7” combined with the circular figure is used in the production mode # 1. In addition, the decorative pattern indicating the number “7” combined with the approximately rhombus graphic is used in the production mode # 2. The decorative pattern indicating the number “7” combined with the star-shaped hexagonal figure is used in the production mode # 3. A decorative design corresponding to the image data stored in the selected image data area is the selection identification information.

  Further, the image data of other decorative designs is stored in the common image data area in the CGROM 83 as shown in FIG. 128 (B). Each image data stored in the common image data area is transferred from the CGROM 83 to the fixed area of the VRAMRS 96A when power supply to the gaming machine is started and the production control microcomputer 100 is activated (step in FIG. 131). (See S702). Each image data stored in the selected image data area is transferred from the CGROM 83 to the fixed area of the VRAMRS 96A when the effect mode is switched. A decorative design corresponding to the image data stored in the common image data area is the common identification information. In FIG. 128 (B), the dummy data is data indicating that it is not image data, for example, all-zero data.

  In this embodiment, the decorative pattern image data stored in the common image data area is preliminarily transferred to the fixed area of the VRAMRS 96A as pre-transfer data. However, the image data is pre-transferred to the fixed area of the VRAMRS 96A. The image data is not limited to decorative design image data. For example, it may be image data (moving image data) of a moving image constituting a background symbol.

  FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing the data structure of moving image data among the image data stored in the CGROM 83. The moving image data has a configuration in which a file header is set at the first address, and then a frame header and compressed data of each frame are sequentially set. In the stream, frame headers and compressed data of frames 1 to N (frame images 1 to n) are set in order from image 1. The moving image data is encoded by, for example, MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group phase 2) encoding method. Since the amount of image data before encoding is reduced by encoding, the encoded image data is referred to as compressed data.

  In FIG. 129, “Super Reach A (J) image” means the image data of the image shown in FIG. 121 (J). The “super reach A (O) image” means the image data of the image shown in FIG. 121 (O). FIG. 129 illustrates one piece of moving image data (Super Reach A moving image data), but the CGROM 83 stores more moving image data.

  The compressed data is stored in the CGROM 83 in a ROM having 32 bits as one word. When the drawing processor 109 reads compressed data from the CGROM 83, the bus width of the CG bus is set to 32 bits. Accordingly, the drawing processor 109 reads compressed data from the CGROM 83 in units of 32 bits.

  Next, a method of decoding moving image data (compressed data) compressed by the decoder 95 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. The frame numbers shown in FIG. 130A are the frame serial numbers in the moving image data shown in FIG. 129 (frames 1 to N). In the moving image data, the compressed data of frames 1 to N is composed of an I picture, a B picture, or a P picture defined by the MPEG2 encoding method in the order shown in FIG. 130 (B). For example, frame 1 is an I picture, frames 2, 3, 5, and 6 are B pictures, and frames 4 and 7 are P pictures. The subscripts attached to I, B, and P are serial numbers for each picture type.

  As described above, frames 1 to N (frame images 1 to n) are sequentially stored from the frame 1 (image 1) as moving image data (see FIG. 129). For example, frame 1 (image 1) in the stream is an I picture, frames 2, 3, 5, and 6 (images 2, 3, 5, and 6) are B pictures, and frames 4 and 7 (images 4 and 7). Is a P picture.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 33 ms) (step S701). . Next, initial data transfer processing is performed (step S702). In the initial data transfer process, the drawing processor 109 sets a fixed area (an area for storing fixed image data) in the VRAMRS 96A, and image data of the decorative design (graphic) stored in the CGROM 83 in the fixed area of the VRAMRS 96A. 102). In the initial data transfer process, a fixed area setting command is output to the drawing processor 109 in order to cause the VRAMRS 96A to set a fixed area. Also, a CGROM transfer command (see FIG. 125) is output to the drawing processor 109 in order to transfer the image data stored in the common image data area in the CGROM 83 as shown in FIG. 128 (B) to the fixed area of the VRAMRS 96A. To do. The drawing processor 109 sets a fixed area (see FIG. 124) in the VRAMRS 96A in response to an input of a fixed area setting command. In addition, the image data in the CGROM 83 is read from the read start address that is a parameter of the CGROM transfer command, and the image data is written in the fixed area of the VRAMRS 96A as display data according to the write address.

  Next, effect mode # 1 data transfer control processing is performed (step S703). The effect mode # 1 data transfer control process uses VRAMRS96A to display the image data of the decorative design indicating the number “7” combined with the circular graphic stored in the selected image data area (see the upper part of FIG. 128A). Is a process for transferring to a fixed area (specifically, an area to which dummy data shown in FIG. 128 (B) is transferred).

  The drawing processor 109 transfers the image data of the decorative design from the fixed region of the VRAMRS 96A to the drawing region of the VRAMFB 96B during the change of the decorative design. Since the decorative design image data is not read from the CGROM 83 outside the rendering processor 109, the decorative design can be variably displayed by data transfer inside the rendering processor 109 (data transfer from the fixed area of the VRAMRS 96A to the rendering area). The control burden on the drawing processor 109 is reduced, and the substantial data transfer speed is increased. The drawing processor 109 realizes the variation of the decorative design by writing the decorative design image data read from the fixed region of the VRAMRS 96A, for example, by shifting the position in the drawing region over time.

  As described above, the drawing processor 109 reads the image data from the fixed area when the image data is stored in the fixed area in the VRAMRS 96A and writes it as display data in the drawing area in the VRAMFB 96B. When the image data of the effect character) is not stored, the image data is read from the CGROM 83 and transferred to the transfer area in the VRAMRS 96A, and the image data is read from the transfer area and written as display data in the drawing area in the VRAMFB 96B.

  Further, the writing control with the position shifted in the drawing area is executed in accordance with the instruction of the CPU 101 for effect control. Command is output. In other words, display control data including data that can specify the position at which decorative pattern image data is drawn in the drawing area is set in the process table.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S704). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S705) and executes the effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and executes a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S706). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect control process processing (step S707). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the image display device 9 is executed. Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S707A). Further, a random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a predetermined random number is executed (step S708). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S704.

  It is assumed that the timer interrupt generation period is 1/33 seconds. The screen change frequency (frame frequency) of the image display device 9 is 30 Hz, and the display circuit 98 of the drawing processor 109 updates the display screen of the image display device 9 with a period of 1/33 seconds. The update of the display screen means that an image signal based on the image data of the drawing area in the VRAMFB 93B is output to the image display device 9, and an image based on the image data set in the drawing area at that time is displayed on the image display device 9. It is to let you. The timer interrupt generation period may be a value other than 1/33 seconds (for example, 2 ms). In this case, in the production control process, for example, a V blank interrupt (for example, the image display device 9) Processing related to drawing is executed in synchronization with the generation of an interrupt generated by the drawing processor 109 in the same cycle as the supplied vertical synchronization signal.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the hold storage display control process (step S707A). The effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the first valid start winning designation command or the second valid start winning designation command has been received in the on-hold storage display control process (step S1851). If the 2 valid start winning designation command has been received, the value of the total pending storage display counter indicating the total pending storage number, that is, the total pending storage display counter for counting the total pending storage number is incremented by 1 (step S1852). Then, control goes to a step S1853. If both the first valid start winning designation command and the second valid start winning designation command have been received in step S1851, the effect control CPU 101 increments the value of the total pending storage display counter by +2 in step S1852. You may do it.

  In step S1853, the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is changed to a state corresponding to the changed value of the combined hold storage display counter. That is, the total number (total number of pending storages) displayed on the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is set to a number according to the changed value.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S707) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S808 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the first variation pattern command reception flag or the second variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the notice selection process (step S801).

  Prior notice selection process (step S801): In the effect display device 9, a notice effect for notifying the player of the occurrence of the big hit (in order to notify the player before the display result of the decorative symbol is derived that the big hit will be obtained) (However, it may be executed when a big hit is not made.) Decide whether or not to perform the notice effect process, and if you decide to execute the notice effect process, decide the notice type To do. If it is decided to execute the notice effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S803). If it is not decided to execute the notice effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the movable member notice selection process (step S802).

  Movable member advance notice selection process (step S802): Using the effect display device 9 and the movable member 78, an advance notice effect for notifying the player of the occurrence of a big hit (moving the movable member 78 makes a big hit) A display effect for informing the player before the display result of the decorative symbol is derived.The movable member 78 is operated according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 by the player. It is determined whether or not to execute the movable member notice effect process. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S803).

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S803): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process (step S804).

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S804): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S805).

  Decoration symbol variation stop processing (step S805): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the ornament symbol is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Take control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S806) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S806): After the variation time is over, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the image display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S807).

  Big hit game processing (step S807): Control during big hit game is performed. For example, when an effect control command for display before opening the big winning opening or display when opening the big winning opening is received, display control of the number of rounds in the image display device 9 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S808).

  Big hit end processing (step S808): In the image display device 9, display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the first variation pattern command reception flag or the second variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the first variation pattern command reception flag or the second variation pattern command reception flag is set, it is confirmed whether or not the first variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811A). If it is the first variation pattern command reception flag, the first variation flag indicating that the decorative symbol is varied based on the reception of the first variation pattern command is set (step S811B).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first variation pattern command reception flag or the second variation pattern command reception flag (step S812). The first variation pattern command reception flag and the second variation pattern command reception flag are set in the command analysis process when the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command is received. In the command analysis process, the received fluctuation pattern command or data indicating the received fluctuation pattern command is stored in the fluctuation pattern command storage area of the RAM.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the total suspension storage display counter (step S812A), and proceeds to step S812B. In step S812B, the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is changed to a state corresponding to the changed value of the combined hold storage display counter. That is, the total number (total number of pending storages) displayed on the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is set to a number according to the changed value. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the notice selection process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a notice selection process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the notice selection process, the CPU 101 for effect control includes a variation pattern (“reach”) included in the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (stored in the variation pattern command storage area in the RAM in the command analysis processing). It is confirmed whether or not any one of them (see FIG. 104) (step S821). If the variation pattern does not include “reach”, the process proceeds to step S826. If the fluctuation pattern includes “reach”, a random number for determining the notice is extracted, and based on the extracted random number value, whether or not the notice effect is to be given and the type of the notice effect when it is decided to give the notice effect are determined. Determine (step S822). The received display result specifying command is also referred to when determining whether or not to give a notice effect.

  In addition, when it is decided to give a notice effect at the time of a big hit, a notice flag at the time of a big hit is set when it is decided to give a notice effect at a big hit, and a notice flag at the time of break is set when it is decided to give a notice effect at the time of a break. (Steps S823, S824). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S803) (step S825).

  If it is determined in step S821 that the variation pattern does not include “reach”, or if it is determined in step S823 that the notice effect is not performed, the value of the effect control process flag corresponds to the movable member notice selection process (step S802). The updated value is updated (step S826).

  In this embodiment, only when it is decided not to perform the notice effect, the case where it is determined whether to move to the movable member notice effect selection process and execute the movable member notice effect is shown. Even when it is determined to produce an effect, it may be determined whether or not to execute the movable member notice effect by moving to the movable member notice effect selection process. If it is decided to give a notice effect and also a movable member notice effect, a big hit notice effect or an off-time notice effect is executed and a movable member notice effect is also executed. Good.

  FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of processing for determining whether or not to give a notice effect and the type of notice effect when it is determined to give a notice effect. FIG. 136A shows a command (display result 4 designation command or command indicating that the received display result specifying command (stored in the display result specifying command storage area of the RAM in the command analysis process) is a hit. An example of a display result 5 designation command (see FIG. 109) is shown. FIG. 136 (B) shows an example in the case where the received display result specifying command is a command indicating a loss (display result 1 to 3 designation command; see FIG. 109).

  When the extracted random number value matches the notice determination value shown in FIG. 136 in the process of step S822, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to give the notice effect according to the matched notice determination value. Then, when a display result specifying command indicating a win is received and it is determined to give a notice effect, it is decided to execute a big hit notice effect. In addition, when the display result specifying command indicating the loss is received and it is determined to give the notice effect, it is decided to execute the notice effect at the time of loss.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a movable member notice selection process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the movable member notice selection process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the first variation flag is set (step S1820). If the first variation flag is set (that is, if the decorative symbol variation display is performed in synchronization with the first special symbol variation display), the received display result command (display in the RAM in the command analysis process) is received. It is confirmed whether or not the display result indicated by (stored in the result command storage area) is a big hit (step S1821). If it is a big hit, the first big hit determination table is selected as a determination table for determining whether or not to execute the movable member notice effect (step S1822).

  In this embodiment, in the movable member notice effect, the rotation operation determination table for determining whether or not to perform the display for prompting the rotation of the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 and whether or not the movable member 78 is moved. Whether or not to execute the movable member notice effect and the mode of the movable member notice effect are determined using the two kinds of decision tables including the movable decision table for determining whether or not the movable member notice effect is to be executed. Further, in this embodiment, the rotation operation determination table and the movable determination table are used when the decorative symbols are displayed in a synchronized manner in synchronization with any of the first and second special symbols. A plurality of types are prepared depending on whether or not there is a big hit and whether or not a reach effect is executed. In step S1822, the first big hit determination table is selected as the big hit rotation operation determination table and the movable determination table corresponding to the first special symbol.

  If it is not a big hit in step S1821 (that is, if it is out of place), the effect control CPU 101 indicates the received variation pattern command (stored in the variation pattern command storage area in the RAM in the command analysis process). It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern is any of variation patterns including “reach” (see FIG. 104) (step S1823). If the variation pattern includes “reach”, the first reach determination table is selected as the rotation operation determination table and the movable determination table for loss (with reach) corresponding to the first special symbol (step S1824). . If the variation pattern does not include “reach”, the first non-reach determination table is selected as the rotation operation determination table and the movable determination table at the time of loss (no reach) corresponding to the first special symbol (step S1825). ).

  If the first variation flag is set in step S1820 (that is, when the decorative symbol variation display is performed in synchronization with the second special symbol variation display), the received display result command (in the command analysis process, It is confirmed whether or not the display result indicated by (stored in the display result command storage area in the RAM) is a big hit (step S1826). If it is a big hit, the second big hit determination table is selected as the rotation operation determination table and the movable determination table for the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol (step S1827).

  If it is not a big hit in step S1826 (ie, if it is out of place), the effect control CPU 101 indicates the received variation pattern command (stored in the variation pattern command storage area in the RAM in the command analysis process). It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern is any one of variation patterns including “reach” (see FIG. 104) (step S1828). If the variation pattern includes “reach”, the second reach determination table is selected as the rotation operation determination table and the movable determination table for loss (with reach) corresponding to the second special symbol (step S1829). . If the variation pattern does not include “reach”, the second non-reach determination table is selected as the rotation operation determination table and the movable determination table at the time of loss (no reach) corresponding to the second special symbol (step S1830). ).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a notice determination random number, and determines whether or not to give a notice effect based on the extracted random number value and the selected rotation operation determination table (specifically, the rotation operation unit 812). It is determined whether or not display for prompting the rotation operation is performed (step S1831). If it is decided not to perform the notice effect (N in Step S1832), the process proceeds to Step S1837 as it is.

  If it is decided to give a notice effect (Y in step S1832), the effect control CPU 101 sets a movable member notice flag (step S1833). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a movable determination random number, and determines whether or not to move the movable member 78 in the movable member notice effect based on the extracted random number value and the selected movable determination table (step) S1834). If it is determined not to move the movable member 78 (N in step S1835), the process directly proceeds to step S1837. If it is decided to move the movable member 78 (Y in step S1835), a movable execution flag is set (step S1836).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S803) (step S1837).

  FIG. 138 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the rotation operation determination table. As shown in FIG. 138, in this embodiment, whether the decorative symbol variation display is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or is the big hit? If the result is NO or NO, six types of rotational operation determination tables are prepared according to whether or not the reach effect is executed, and a determination value is assigned to each of the rotational operation determination tables. Yes.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), in the case where the decorative symbol is displayed in synchronization with the variable symbol of the first special symbol and is a big hit, the rate is 50%. It is determined that the movable member notice effect is executed (specifically, a display prompting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 is performed). Further, as shown in FIG. 138 (B), in the case where the decorative symbol is displayed in synchronization with the first special symbol, the display is lost (with reach) at a rate of 10%. It is determined that the movable member notice effect is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 138 (C), in the case where the decorative symbol is displayed in synchronization with the first special symbol, the display is lost (no reach) at a rate of 5%. It is determined that the movable member notice effect is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 138 (D), in the case where the decorative symbol variation display is performed in synchronism with the variation display of the second special symbol and is a big hit, the movable member notice effect is 60%. To execute. In addition, as shown in FIG. 138 (E), when the decorative symbol is displayed in synchronization with the second special symbol, the display is lost (with reach) at a rate of 5%. It is determined that the movable member notice effect is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 138 (F), when the decorative symbol is displayed in synchronization with the second special symbol, the display is lost (no reach) at a rate of 2%. It is determined that the movable member notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 139 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the movable determination table. As shown in FIG. 139, in this embodiment, whether the decorative symbol is displayed in synchronization with which of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or whether it is a big hit. If it is NO or NO, six types of movable determination tables are prepared according to whether or not the reach effect is executed, and a determination value is assigned to each of the movable determination tables.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), in the case where the decorative symbol variation display is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol and it is a big hit, the movable member notice effect is displayed. After the transition, on the condition that there has been an operation from the rotary operation unit 812, at a rate of 80% (when the decorative symbol variation display is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol and is a big hit The movable member 78 is determined to be movable (at a rate of 40 percent of the total). In addition, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), when the decorative symbol is displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the display is lost (with reach), the movable member notice effect is displayed. After the transition, on the condition that there has been an operation from the rotation operation unit 812 (at a rate of 20% (in the case where the decorative symbol variation display is performed in synchronization with the first special symbol variation display) ) Is determined to move the movable member 78 (at a rate of 2 percent of the total). Further, as shown in FIG. 139 (C), in the case where the decorative symbol is displayed in synchronization with the first special symbol, and the display is lost (no reach), the movable member notice effect is displayed. After the transition, it is determined that the movable member 78 is not moved regardless of the operation from the rotation operation unit 812.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), in the case where the decorative symbol variation display is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol and is a big hit, after the transition to the movable member notice effect, On the condition that there has been an operation from the rotation operation unit 812, at a rate of 80% (if the decorative symbol is displayed in synchronization with the second special symbol's variable display and if it is a big hit, 48% of the total The movable member 78 is determined to be movable. In addition, as shown in FIG. 139 (E), when the decorative symbol is displayed in synchronization with the change display of the second special symbol and the display is lost (with reach), the movable member notice effect is displayed. After the transition, on the condition that there is an operation from the rotation operation unit 812 (at a rate of 5% (in the case where the decorative symbol variation display is performed in synchronization with the second special symbol variation display, the loss (with reach) ) Is determined to move the movable member 78 (at a rate of 1 percent of the total). In addition, as shown in FIG. 139 (F), when the decorative symbol is displayed in synchronization with the second special symbol, and the display is lost (no reach), the movable member notice effect is displayed. After the transition, it is determined that the movable member 78 is not movable regardless of whether or not there is an operation from the rotation operation unit 812.

  It is determined whether or not the display for prompting the operation of the rotation operation unit 812 is performed and whether or not the movable member 78 is moved at the ratios shown in the rotation operation determination table shown in FIG. 138 and the movable determination table shown in FIG. 139. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of a big hit as the rate at which the movable member notice effect is executed increases and as the rate at which the movable member 78 is actually moved increases. Therefore, the expectation to the big hit for the player can be improved by executing the movable member notice effect (the display for prompting the operation of the rotation operation unit 812 is performed). In addition, since the movable member 78 is actually moved, it is possible to further improve the degree of expectation for the big hit for the player. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved for the player.

  It is determined whether or not the display for prompting the operation of the rotation operation unit 812 is performed and whether or not the movable member 78 is moved at the ratios shown in the rotation operation determination table shown in FIG. 138 and the movable determination table shown in FIG. 139. Therefore, in the case where the decorative symbol is displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, the rate is higher than that in the case where the decorative symbol is displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. Then, it is determined that the display prompts the user to operate the rotation operation unit 812 or that the movable member 78 is actually moved. Therefore, in the case where the decorative symbol display is performed in synchronization with the display of the second special symbol, it is possible to further improve the player's expectation for the big hit, and to the player to the game. Interest can be improved.

  FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S803) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command or data indicating the received variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S840).

  Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area of the RAM (that is, the received display result specifying command) (step S841). The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the display result of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area.

  In step S841, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a predetermined random number and determines a stop symbol based on the extracted random number. At this time, if a display result specifying command (display result 1 to 3 designation command) indicating a loss is received, a combination of stop symbols reminiscent of a loss (for example, the left middle right symbol does not match, or left and right The symbol and the middle symbol do not match). In addition, when a display result specifying command (display result 4 designation command or display result 5 designation command) indicating a hit is received, a combination of stop symbols reminiscent of a big hit (for example, the left middle right symbol matches) ). In addition, when the display result specifying command (display result 5 designation command) indicating the probability variation big hit is received, the combination of the stop symbols reminiscent of the probability variation big hit (for example, “7” “7” “7”) May be determined. In addition, a combination of decorative symbols that evokes a big hit is sometimes referred to as a big hit symbol, and a combination of decorative symbols that evokes a loss is sometimes referred to as a missed symbol.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step S842). Then, the process timer corresponding to the production execution data 1 in the selected process data is started (step S843).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect device (the image display device 9 as an effect part) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, movable member control data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Then, the control of the movable member 78 as the production component, the various lamps as the production component, the light emitter of the LED, and the speaker 27 as the production component is started (step S844). For example, in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 9, a command is output to the drawing processor 109. Further, the motor 78A is driven to operate the movable member 78. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of various lamps in synchronization with the display effect of the image display device 9 and the movement of the movable member 78. . In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display effect of the image display device 9 and the movement of the movable member 78 from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis, but the effect control CPU 101 controls the change pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S845), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S804). (Step S846).

  FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the image display device 9 in accordance with the data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, movable member control data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbols. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the image display device 9 is described. Data relating to the operation of the movable member 78 is set in the movable member control data. Specifically, data such as the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation time of the motor 78A is set. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change.

  Specific data (for example, 00) indicating that the movable member 78 is not used is set as the movable member control data in the process table corresponding to an effect that does not use the movable member 78. The process table corresponding to the effect using the movable member 78 is a process table corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach B.

  The process table shown in FIG. 141 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern. Furthermore, different process tables are prepared according to the difference in the notice effect mode (notice type) when the notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S851) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S852). When the process timer times out (step S853), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S854). Further, the control state for the image display device 9 is changed based on the display control execution data set next (step S855A).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 changes the control state for the light emitters such as lamps and LEDs and the speaker 27 based on the lamp control execution data and sound number data set next (step S855B).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big hit time notice flag or the off time notice flag is set (step S855C). If any of the flags is set, a notice effect process is performed (step S855D). If not set, it is confirmed whether or not the movable member notice flag is set (step S855E). If set, a movable member notice effect is performed (step S855F). If not set, the process proceeds to step S856.

  Next, if the variation time timer has timed out (step S856), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S805) (step S858). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S857), the process proceeds to step S858. Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control to stop variation.For example, a variation pattern command indicating a long variation time due to noise between substrates is received. Even in such a case, the variation of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol has ended).

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stop process (step S805) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 performs control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol in accordance with the data stored in the decorative symbol display result storage area (data indicating the left middle right stop symbol) (step S861). . Specifically, an address or the like at which the stop symbol image data is stored in the fixed area of the VRAMRS 96A is specified, and a command to transfer the stop symbol image data to the VRAMFB 96B is output to the drawing processor 109. The drawing processor 109 transfers the image data of the stop symbol to the drawing area of the VRAMFB according to the command. Then, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a big hit (step S862). Whether or not it is determined to be a big hit is confirmed by, for example, a display result specifying command stored in the display result specifying command storage area.

  If it is determined to be a big hit, the address pointer is set to 0 (step S863) and the fixed area data transfer control process is executed (step S864). Note that the fixed area data transfer control process is a process for transferring the image data (see FIG. 128 (B)) stored in the common image data area of the CGROM 83 to the fixed area of the VRAMRS 96A, and the initial data in step S702. This process is similar to the process executed in the transfer process. It is not essential to execute the fixed area data transfer control process at this stage. When the data is garbled in the fixed area of the VRAMRS 96A due to noise or the like, the image data in the fixed area of the VRAMRS 96A can be returned to correct data. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S806) (step S865).

  If it is decided not to win, if the display result 2 designation command (outgoing designation / time reduction designation) is received, the probability variation state flag is reset and the time reduction state flag is set (steps S871, S872). , S873). Then, effect mode # 2 data transfer control processing is performed (step S874). That is, since the game mode is determined to be in the short time state, the effect mode # 2 data transfer control process is executed. In this embodiment, the symbol shown in the middle of FIG. 128 (A) is used as the decorative symbol “7” in the short time state. In the effect mode # 2 data transfer control process, the decorative pattern image data indicating the number “7” combined with the approximately rhombus figure stored in the selected image data area (see the middle of FIG. 128A). This is a process for transferring to the fixed area of the VRAMRS 96A.

  If the display result 3 designation command (outgoing designation / low probability designation) has been received, the time reduction state flag is reset (steps S875, S876). Then, effect mode # 1 data transfer control processing is performed (step S877). That is, since the game mode is determined to be in the low probability state (normal state), the effect mode # 1 data transfer control process is executed. In this embodiment, in the normal state, the symbol shown in the upper part of FIG. 128 (A) is used as the decorative symbol “7”. The effect mode # 1 data transfer control process uses VRAMRS96A to display the image data of the decorative design indicating the number “7” combined with the circular graphic stored in the selected image data area (see the upper part of FIG. 128A). It is a process for transferring to the fixed area.

  Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S878).

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S806) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 receives a fanfare flag indicating that the jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) has been received (in the command analysis process, the jackpot start designation command is received). It is set whether or not.) Is set (step S891). If the fanfare flag has been set, the fanfare flag is reset (step S892), and the process table corresponding to the big hit gaming effect is selected (step S893). Then, a process timer corresponding to the process data 1 in the selected process data is started (step S894). Further, the control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step S895). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S807) (step S896).

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S808) in the effect control process. In the jackpot end process, the effect control CPU 101 receives a jackpot end designation command reception flag indicating that the jackpot end designation command (first jackpot end designation command or second jackpot end designation command) has been received. (It is set when a designated command is received.) Is checked (step S881). When the big hit end designation command reception flag is set, the big hit end designation command reception flag is reset (step S882), and the image display device 9 is controlled to display the big hit end screen (step S888). Specifically, an address or the like where the image data of the big hit end screen in the CGROM 83 is stored, and a command to transfer the big hit end screen image data to the drawing area is output to the drawing processor 109. The drawing processor 109 reads the image data of the big hit end screen from the CGROM 83 according to the command, and transfers the read image data to the drawing area of the VRAMFB 96B.

  When the display result 5 designation command (probability change jackpot designation) has been received, the probability change state flag is set. When the time reduction state is set, that is, when the time reduction state flag is set, the time reduction state is set. The flag is reset (steps S884, S885, S886). Then, effect mode # 3 data transfer control processing is performed (step S887). That is, since the game mode is determined to be in a certain change state, the effect mode # 3 data transfer control process is executed. In this embodiment, in the probability variation state, the symbol shown in the lower part of FIG. 128A is used as the decorative symbol “7”. In the effect mode # 3 data transfer control process, the image data of the decorative pattern indicating the number “7” combined with the star-shaped hexagonal figure stored in the selected image data area (see the lower part of FIG. 128A). ) Is transferred to the VRAMFB 96B.

  Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S888).

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing effect mode # 1 data transfer control processing (step S703). In the effect mode # 1 data transfer control process, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a CGROM transfer command to the drawing processor 109 (step S601). The read address is an address at which decorative pattern image data (refer to the upper part of FIG. 128A) indicating the number “7” combined with a circular figure stored in the selected image data area in the CGROM 83 is stored. The write address is the address of the fixed area of VRAMRS 96A. The effect mode # 2 data transfer control process (see FIG. 133) and the effect mode # 3 data transfer control process (see FIG. 145) are executed in the same manner as the effect mode # 1 data transfer control process, although the read addresses are different. The The initial data transfer process (step S702) is also executed in the same manner as the presentation mode # 1 data transfer control process, although the read address and the write address are different. The drawing circuit 91 in the drawing processor 109 transfers the image data of the decorative design from the CGROM 83 to the fixed area in the VRAMRS 96A in response to the CGROM transfer command.

  Next, the notice effect executed using the effect device will be described. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the image data constituting the combined moving image of the moving images A and B used in the notice effect. FIG. 147 (A) illustrates a moving image in which a spacecraft moves. FIG. 147 (B) illustrates an example in which a satellite moves as a moving image.

  The drawing processor 109 in this embodiment has a capability of reproducing an image in 1/60 seconds (displaying an image based on image data). That is, the decoder 95 can decompress the frame image data that has been subjected to data compression every 1/60 seconds. Actually, when the image is reproduced at 1/30 seconds, that is, when the frame period in the actual display is 1/30 seconds, two frame image data can be expanded in one frame period. Therefore, when two moving images are combined and played back, as shown in FIG. 148 (A), frame image data for the frame images constituting the moving image A in a period of (1/60) × 2 seconds. And the frame image data of the frame images constituting the moving image B are alternately expanded, and as shown in FIG. 148 (B), the two expanded frame image data are synthesized once every 1/30 seconds. By executing the calculation for this, as shown in FIG. 148 (C), the synthesized moving image can be reproduced every 1/30 seconds. That is, the decoder 95 alternately decodes the moving image data of the moving image A and the moving image data of the moving image B within one frame period (simultaneously, the moving image data of the moving image A and the moving image of the moving image B Data is not decrypted.) Display data is created, and the created display data is synthesized by writing it into the drawing area of the VRAMFB 96B. In other words, the rendering processor 109 sequentially selects one moving image data from a plurality of moving image data for each predetermined cycle (for example, 1/2 of the frame cycle), and displays data for display from the moving image data selected in the cycle. The processing burden is reduced by creating Note that the reproduction cycle of moving image data is ½ times the frame cycle.

  FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (C) show a case in which the moving image data of moving image A and the moving image data of moving image B are combined. FIGS. 148 (D) and 148 (E) show the case. As described above, the moving image data of the moving image A and the moving image data of the moving image B may be written in the drawing area without being synthesized. In this case, the moving image data of the moving image A and the moving image data of the moving image B are written in different areas of the drawing area. That is, the moving image A is displayed on a part of the display screen of the image display device 9, and the moving image B is displayed on the other part. Also in this case, the decoder 95 alternately decodes the moving image data of the moving image A and the moving image data of the moving image B within one frame period (simultaneously, the moving image data of the moving image A and the moving image B of the moving image A). The display data is created, and the created display data is written in the drawing area of the VRAMFB 96B. That is, the decoder 95 reads from the CGROM 83 every time the first period elapses between the first period and the second period of the same reproduction period which is ½ of the frame period (in this example, 1/30 second). The display data created by decoding the moving image data of the moving image A is stored in the drawing area of the VRAMFB 96B, and the moving image read from the CGROM 83 every time the second period elapses in the reproduction period following the first period Display data created by decoding the moving image data of the image B is stored in the drawing area of the VRAMFB 96B. When the frame period (the screen update period of the image display device 9, that is, the display data reading period from the drawing area) is 1/60 second, the moving image data of the moving image A and the moving image data of the moving image B Are decoded at a period (1/30 second) that is twice the frame period.

  FIG. 149 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a notice effect executed in the image display device 9. FIG. 149 shows an example executed when a big hit is not made. In the example shown in FIG. 149, a part of the display screen of the image display device 9 is used as the notice effect area 9b. As shown in FIGS. 149 (A) to (D), the rendering processor 109 decodes the moving images A and B shown in FIG. 147 and then synthesizes them (see FIG. 148) and rotates them so Control to display in the area 9b is performed. The rotation angle gradually varies from frame to frame.

  FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the notice effect executed in the image display device 9. FIG. 150 shows an example that is executed in the case of a big hit. As shown in FIGS. 150A to 150D, the rendering processor 109 decodes the moving images A and B shown in FIG. 147, combines them (see FIG. 148), and rotates them to give a notice effect. Control to display in the area 9b is performed. The rotation angle gradually varies from frame to frame. Moreover, the rotation direction in the example shown to FIG. 150 (A)-(D) is reverse to the rotation direction in the example shown to FIG. 149 (A)-(D).

  FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the notice effect processing (see FIG. 142) in step S855D. In the notice effect process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the notice effect flag is set (step S612). If the notice effect flag is not set, it is checked whether or not the notice effect start timing has come (step S613). The notice effect start timing is the time when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the predetermined variable display. By setting data indicating the time in the process data, the effect control CPU 101 notifies the notice. It can be determined whether or not the production start timing has come.

  When it is time to start the notice effect, a flag for notice effect is set (step S614). Then, the production control CPU 101 outputs a multi-stream start address command (see FIG. 126) to the drawing processor 109 (step S615). The address of the CGROM 83 specified by the multi-stream start address command is an address in which the moving image data of the moving images A and B illustrated in FIG. Further, a multi-stream development area address command (see FIG. 126) is output to the drawing processor 109 (step S616). Then, a decode execution command (see FIG. 126) for instructing multi-stream decompression is output to the drawing processor 109 (step S617).

  Note that the decoder 95 expands the frame image data subjected to data compression every 1/60 seconds in accordance with a decode execution command. At that time, every 1/60 seconds, one frame of frame image data in the moving image A data and one frame of frame image data in the moving image B data are alternately expanded. Therefore, the decompression process for the other moving image data is not started until the decompression process for one moving image data is completed.

  In step S612, if it is confirmed that the flag for the advance notice effect is set, the effect control CPU 101 develops (decodes) one frame of image data (decoded) in the expanded region corresponding to the moving image A (the region in the VRAMRS 96A). In order to output the image data constituting the moving image A) to the VRAMFB 96B, first, a CGROM transfer command (see FIG. 125) is output to the drawing processor 109 to be developed on the VRAMRS 96A, and further, a VRAMFB transfer command (see FIG. 125). Is output, but a predetermined area (area for developing the notice effect image) is designated as the write address of the VRAMFB 96B (step S621). The drawing processor 109 changes the bus width setting of the CG bus from 64 bits to 32 bits when reading the image data of the moving image from the CGROM 83. Specifically, the upper 32 bits of the CG bus are invalidated.

  In addition, a rendering effect command for designating the α value of the image data constituting the moving image B is output to the rendering processor 109 (step S622). Further, in order to output the image data of one frame of the moving image B to the VRAMFB 96B, a CGROM transfer command and a VRAMFB transfer command are output to the drawing processor 109. As a write address of the VRAMFB 96B, a predetermined area (notification effect) is output. An area for expanding the image is designated (step S623).

  In addition, when the drawing processor 109 outputs the image data developed in the development area corresponding to the moving image B to the drawing area of the VRAMFB 96B, the image data already developed in the drawing area of the VRAMFB 96B (in this example, the moving image The image data constituting the image A) and each pixel are calculated. That is, the synthesis process (superposition process) is performed. At the time of combining processing, for example, for each of two image data, addition processing of each of R, G, and B values multiplied by an α value is performed. The drawing effect command also includes a parameter for commanding the rotation angle of an image (in this example, an image used for a notice effect).

  The α value is a value indicating transparency, and for example, a value corresponding to any of 0 to 1.0 is set. 0 indicates complete transparency and 1.0 indicates complete opacity. Complete transparency means that R, G, and B values of one image data are not used for the calculation when the combination calculation of one image data (α value is 0) and other image data is performed (for example, 0 And completely opaque means that R, G, and B of one image data when a composite operation of one image data (α value is 1.0) and other image data is performed. Indicates that the value is used as is. Also, the value between 0 and 1.0 is the same as the image data when the composition operation of one image data (α value is between 0 and 1.0) and other image data is performed. Indicates that the R, G, and B values are multiplied by a predetermined coefficient.

  FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the movable member notice effect process (see FIG. 142) in step S855F. In the movable member notice effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the notice effect start timing has come (step S1611). The notice effect start timing is the time when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the predetermined variable display. By setting data indicating the time in the process data, the effect control CPU 101 notifies the notice. It can be determined whether or not the production start timing has come.

  When it is time to start the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 illuminates and displays a character string such as “Turn !!” on the pressing operation unit 811 by emitting the operation unit center lamp 82A in blue. In other words, a process for performing a rotation operation guidance light emission operation for guiding the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 is executed (step S1612). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 displays on the press operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 a message for prompting the rotation operation, and the effect display device 9 displays, for example, “turn the jog dial!”. By displaying a display screen including a character string, the player is prompted to rotate the rotation operation unit 812.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the movable execution flag is set (step S1613). If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. That is, in this case, although it is determined that the display for urging the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 is performed, it is determined that the movable effect of the movable member 78 is not performed. Without performing the process of operating the member 78, the process is terminated as it is.

  If the movable execution flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not a rotation operation from the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 has been detected (step S1614). If a rotation operation from the rotation operation unit 812 is detected, it is confirmed whether or not the first variation flag is set (step S1615). If it is set, whether or not a rotation operation for one click is detected. Is confirmed (step S1616). If it does not satisfy the rotation operation for one click, the process is terminated as it is. If the rotation operation for one click can be detected, the position of the movable member 78 is changed by driving the motor 78A based on the movable member control execution data set next (step S1618). That is, the movable member 78 is moved. When the predetermined time elapses after moving the movable member 78, the effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 78A in the reverse direction to return the movable member 78 to the initial position.

  If the first variation flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a rotation operation for two clicks has been detected (step S1617). If it does not satisfy the rotation operation for 2 clicks, the process is terminated as it is. If the rotation operation for two clicks can be detected, the position of the movable member 78 is changed by driving the motor 78A based on the movable member control execution data set next (step S1618). That is, the movable member 78 is moved. When the predetermined time elapses after moving the movable member 78, the effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 78A in the reverse direction to return the movable member 78 to the initial position.

  In this embodiment, when an effect is produced based on the variation pattern of Super Reach B, the data is not specific data indicating that the movable member 78 is not used (that is, data for controlling the movable member 78). A process table including movable member control data in which the rotation speed and rotation direction of the motor 78A are set) is used. Therefore, when effect control is performed using the variation pattern of super reach B, the effect control CPU 101 controls the motor 78A in accordance with the movable member control data in the process data, thereby moving as illustrated in FIG. Control that the member 78 gradually advances into the transparent game area 71 can be performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach B is performed, the display control execution data includes a special effect display in a portion corresponding to the inside of the decoration member 73 (inside the frame). Including data indicating that When display control is performed as in the example shown in FIG. 93, data indicating that a star-shaped image 73a is displayed inside the decorative member 73 is included. In this case, in step S855A, the effect control CPU 101 reads out image data corresponding to the star-shaped image 73a from the CGROM 83 in accordance with the data indicating that the star-shaped image 73a is displayed, and a predetermined position in the drawing area of the VRAMFB 96B. A command (specifically, a CGROM transfer command shown in FIG. 125) to be written in (a position corresponding to the inside of the decoration member 73) is output to the drawing processor 109. The drawing processor 109 reads the image data corresponding to the star-shaped image 73a from the CGROM 83 in accordance with the command, and writes it in a predetermined position in the drawing area of the VRAMFB 96B (a position corresponding to the interior of the decoration member 73). Therefore, it is visually recognized by the player as if a special effect display is performed inside the decorative member 73.

  As described above, when it is determined that an effect using the movable member 78 is executed by executing the processes of steps S1614 to S1618, the movable member 78 is used during the variation of the decorative pattern. Production is performed. Further, whether or not the first variation flag is set (that is, if the decorative symbol variation display is performed in synchronization with the first special symbol variation display, or synchronized with the second special symbol variation display). Depending on whether or not the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, an effect of moving the movable member 78 is executed on the condition that a different amount of rotational operation is detected. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the case where the decorative symbol variation display is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, on the condition that the amount of rotation operation for one click is detected, An effect of moving the movable member 78 is executed. Further, when the decorative symbol variation display is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, an effect of moving the movable member 78 is executed on condition that the amount of rotation operation for two clicks is detected. To do.

  FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of background image data stored in the CGROM 83. FIG. 153 (A) illustrates image data of 160 (horizontal) × 120 (vertical) dots, and FIG. 153 (B) illustrates image data of 320 (horizontal) × 240 (vertical) dots. Yes. Note that the image data image shown in FIG. 153 (A) and the image data image shown in FIG. 153 (B) have different resolutions.

  FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram showing a background image displayed on the display screen 9 a of the image display device 9. FIG. 154 exemplifies a background image displayed on the display screen 9a having a total number of pixels of 640 (horizontal) × 480 (vertical) dots. When an image based on the image data illustrated in FIG. 153 (A) is displayed on the image display device 9, the drawing processor 109 displays the image by enlarging it four times in the vertical and horizontal directions as shown in the upper part of FIG. . Further, when an image based on the image data illustrated in FIG. 153 (B) is displayed on the image display device 9, the drawing processor 109 enlarges both horizontally and vertically as shown in the lower part of FIG. Display.

  FIG. 155 and FIG. 156 show the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14. It is a timing diagram which shows the timing when a display is performed. In FIG. 155, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are not the same number (in this example, the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number), the special symbol variation display is executed. Show the case. FIG. 156 shows a case where the special symbol variation display is executed when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are the same.

  First, a case will be described in which the special symbol variation display is executed when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are not the same number. As a premise, the game ball has not won any of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, and the count values of the first reserved memory number counter and the second memory number counter are both 0. Suppose that

  As shown in FIG. 155, when a game ball wins in the first start winning opening 13 (start winning A shown in FIG. 155), on condition that the upper limit has not been reached (step S2752), the first reserved memory number counter 1 is added (step S2753), and the display of the first special symbol hold storage display 18a is updated (step S2756). In this case, the value of the first reserved memory number counter becomes 1, and, for example, one small lamp or LED constituting the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a is lit.

  The CPU 56 determines that the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 0 (the count value is 1) in the first special symbol normal process (step S51), and the second reserved memory number is the first. It is determined that the number is not larger than the number of reserved storage (step S52). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the first changing flag (step S55), and performs the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a. When the first special symbol variation display is performed, the value of the first reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1 in the first variation pattern setting process (step S102D), and the first special symbol retention memory display 18a displays. Is updated (step S102E). In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the value of the first reserved memory number counter returns to 0, for example, all the small lamps or LEDs constituting the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a are turned off. To do.

  Next, if a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14 during the change of the first special symbol (start win B shown in FIG. 155), the upper limit is not reached (step S2759). The value of the 2 reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1 (step S2760), and the display of the second special symbol hold memory display 18b is updated (step S2763). In this case, the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 1, and, for example, one small lamp or LED constituting the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b is lit. Subsequently, if the game ball wins again at the first start winning opening 13 before the change of the first special symbol is finished (start win C shown in FIG. 155), it is on condition that the upper limit has not been reached (step S2752). The value of the first reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1 (step S2753), and the display of the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a is updated (step S2756). In this case, the value of the first reserved memory number counter becomes 1, and, for example, one small lamp or LED constituting the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a is lit. Furthermore, if two game balls are won in succession in the first start winning opening 13 before the change of the first special symbol is finished (start winning prizes D and E shown in FIG. 155), the same processing as described above is performed. The value of the first reserved memory number counter becomes 3, and, for example, three small lamps or LEDs constituting the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a are lit.

  When the variation display of the first special symbol is completed, the CPU 56 determines that the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 0 (the count value is 3) in the first special symbol normal process (step S51). Then, it is determined that the second reserved memory number “1” is not greater than the first reserved memory number “3” (step S52). For this reason, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S53, and starts the variable display of the first special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the second special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 determines that the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is not 0 (the count value is 1) (step S51B), and the first reserved memory number “3”. Is greater than the second reserved storage number “1” (step S52B). Therefore, the CPU 56 performs control so as not to move to step S53B. That is, the CPU 56 does not start the variable display of the second special symbol, and preferentially executes the variable display of the first special symbol.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are not the same number, priority is given to the variable symbol variable display corresponding to the larger reserved memory number. . In the example shown in FIG. 155, the variable display of the first special symbol is preferentially executed based on the fact that the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number. In the example shown in FIG. 155, the case where the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number has been described as an example. Then, based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is larger than the first reserved memory number, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  Next, the case where the special symbol variable display is executed when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are the same number will be described. As a premise, the game ball has not won any of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, and the count values of the first reserved memory number counter and the second memory number counter are both 0. Suppose that

  As shown in FIG. 156, when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14 (start winning A shown in FIG. 156), on condition that the upper limit has not been reached (step S2759), the second reserved memory number counter 1 is added (step S2760), and the display of the second special symbol hold storage display 18b is updated (step S2763). In this case, the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 1, and, for example, one small lamp or LED constituting the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b is lit.

  Further, in the second special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 determines that the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is not 0 (the count value is 1) (step S51B), and the first reserved memory number is the second. It is determined that the number is not larger than the number of reserved memories (step S52B). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the second changing flag (S55B), and performs the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. In addition, when performing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the second variation pattern setting process, the value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1 (the same processing as in step S102D), and the second special symbol retention storage display is performed. The display on the container 18b is updated (the same processing as in step S102E). In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the value of the second reserved memory number counter returns to 0, for example, all the small lamps or LEDs constituting the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b are turned off. To do.

  Next, when the game ball wins again at the second start winning opening 14 during the change of the second special symbol (start winning B shown in FIG. 156), on condition that the upper limit has not been reached (step S2759), The value of the second reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1 (step S2760), and the display of the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b is updated (step S2763). In this case, the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 1, and, for example, one small lamp or LED constituting the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b is lit. Subsequently, if the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 before the change of the second special symbol is finished (start winning C shown in FIG. 156), it is on condition that the upper limit has not been reached (step S2752). The value of the first reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1 (step S2753), and the display of the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a is updated (step S2756). In this case, the value of the first reserved memory number counter becomes 1, and, for example, one small lamp or LED constituting the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a is lit.

  When the variation display of the second special symbol is finished, the CPU 56 determines that the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 0 (the count value is 1) in the first special symbol normal process (step S51). Then, it is determined that the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 0 (the count value is 1) (step S51B). In addition, the CPU 56 determines that the second reserved memory number “1” is not greater than the first reserved memory number “1” (step S52). For this reason, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S53, and starts the variable display of the first special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the second special symbol process, the CPU 56 determines that the first reserved memory number “1” and the second reserved memory number “1” are the same number (step S313B). Therefore, the CPU 56 performs control so as not to move to steps S300B to S309B. That is, the CPU 56 does not start the variable display of the second special symbol, and preferentially executes the variable display of the first special symbol.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are the same, the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the predetermined first reserved memory number is displayed. Prioritized execution. In the example shown in FIG. 156, the case where the display of the first special symbol is preferentially executed is described as an example. However, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are the same, You may comprise so that the change display of 2 special symbols may be performed preferentially.

  FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing a modification of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S803) in the effect control process. In this example, the effect control CPU 101 selects the image data (image data of the image B) illustrated in FIG. 153 (B) when the probability variation jackpot designation command is received (steps S831, S832). . If the probability variation jackpot designation command has not been received, the image data illustrated in FIG. 153A (image data of image A) is selected (steps S831 and S833).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a CGROM transfer command (see FIG. 125) to the drawing processor 109, and the image data selected in step S832 or step S833 is stored in a predetermined area (transfer area shown in FIG. 124) of VRAMRS96A. Output (step S834). Specifically, a CGROM transfer command (see FIG. 125) is output. Further, in order to output the image data of a predetermined area of the VRAMRS 96A to the drawing area of the VRAMFB 96B, a VRAMFB transfer command (see FIG. 125) is output to the drawing processor 109 (step S835). Here, in the parameter of the VRAMFB transfer command, the address where the image data in the VRAMRS 96A is expanded is specified as the read address, but the entire background display area in the VRAMFB 96B is specified as the write address. That is, the first address of the background display area is designated as the writing start address, and the last address of the background display area is designated as the writing end address.

  In this example, the background display area is an area of 640 (horizontal) × 480 (vertical) dots. Therefore, when the drawing circuit 91 in the drawing processor 109 inputs a VRAMFB transfer command for the image data of the image A, the image data of the image A is enlarged four times and written to the VRAMFB 96B. Specifically, for example, each dot in the image data of the image A is used as each data of a (4 × 4) dot square area. When a VRAMFB transfer command is input for image data of image B, the image data of image B is doubled and written to VRAMFB 96B. Specifically, for example, each dot in the image data of the image B is used as each data of a square area of (2 × 2) dots. Therefore, in this example, the effect control CPU 101 sets the enlargement ratio by setting the parameter (specifically, the write address) of the VRAMFB transfer command. Note that the enlargement ratio may be set according to the parameters of the drawing effect command.

  Further, in this example, the case where the background image is switched when the change of the decorative design starts is taken as an example, but the timing for switching the background image may be at another time point.

  In this example, the case where the image data of the image A is quadrupled and the image data of the image B is doubled is taken as an example of the background image, but the control for enlarging the image data controls the background image. Not limited to cases. For example, control for enlarging the image data for a part of the background image may be performed. Moreover, you may perform control which expands image data about a decoration design. In that case, the image data of the images A and B is not limited to 4 times or 2 times, but may be enlarged at an arbitrary magnification. By controlling in such a manner, many kinds of images can be displayed on the image display device 9 without storing many kinds of image data in the CGROM 83. That is, it is possible to enrich the types of effects without increasing the storage capacity of the CGROM 83.

  Further, in this example, a still image is taken as an example, but a plurality of types of moving image data having different resolutions (number of pixels) and having a smaller number of pixels than the total number of pixels of the display screen 9a of the image display device 9 are stored in the CGROM 83. You may make it store. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enrich the types of effects without increasing the storage capacity of the CGROM 83.

  Further, for example, for image data that is frequently used (for example, image data of a decorative design), CGROM 83 is used as image data with relatively high resolution within a range smaller than the total number of pixels of the display screen 9a of the image display device 9. For image data that is rarely used (for example, character image image data used in special effects such as a notice effect), image data with a relatively low resolution is stored in the CGROM 83. May be. In such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the CGROM 83 in order to enrich the types of effects produced by the display of the image display device 9 while making the image data frequently used high-definition. .

  In this embodiment, the movable member 78 is provided on the back surface of the upper opaque region 72A (position corresponding to the upper opaque region 72A), but the back surface of the lower transparent region 72C (position corresponding to the lower opaque region 72C). A movable member 78 may be installed on the front panel. FIG. 158 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the mechanism portion of the gaming machine in which the movable member 78 is installed at a position corresponding to the lower opaque region 72C. FIG. 159 is a cross-sectional view showing a longitudinal section of the gaming machine when the movable member 78 is installed at a position corresponding to the lower opaque region 72C. The game board 6 is attached to the game frame 2A, and an LCD image display device 9 attached to the attachment plate 90 is installed on the back side of the game frame 2A. In the space 76 between the game frame 2A and the image display device 9, a movable member 78 is installed on the back surface of the lower opaque region 72C (a position corresponding to the lower opaque region 72C). A base portion attachment portion 78B (a transmission portion for transmitting the driving force of the motor 78A to the movable member 78) integrated with the movable member 78 is attached to the shaft of the motor 78A and rotated about the shaft of the motor 78A. Accordingly, the movable member 78 moves.

  On the back surface of the image display device 9, a main unit 31A including a game control board and an effect unit 80A including an effect control board are attached. In FIGS. 158 and 159, the rectangular parallelepiped cover portion A is attached over both the back surface of the upper opaque region 72A and the back surface outside the game region, and is an electrical component group provided in the upper opaque region 72A. It is formed so as to cover. As an electrical component (unit) in the electrical component group provided in the upper opaque region 72A, a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold memory display There are electrical components including each of 18a, the second special symbol storage memory indicator 18b and the normal symbol start memory indicator 41. The rectangular parallelepiped cover portion B is attached to both the back surface of the side opaque region 72B and the back surface outside the game region, and is formed so as to cover the electrical component group provided in the side opaque region 72B. Yes. As electrical components in the electrical component group provided in the side opaque region 72 </ b> B, there are electrical components including the prize ball display 51 and the round number display 75. The rectangular parallelepiped movable member attachment portion C is a member that is attached over both the back surface of the lower opaque region 72C and the back surface outside the game region, and attaches the attachment portion 78B integrated with the movable member 78. In addition, the movable member mounting portion C is formed so as to cover the electrical component group provided in the lower opaque region 72C. As electrical components in the electrical component group provided in the lower opaque region 72C, the first start winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, the variable winning ball apparatus 15, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and the winning opening (ordinary winning opening) ) There are electrical parts including 29, 30, 33, and 39 (including a detection switch for the prize opening). The upper opaque region 72A and the side opaque region 72B need not be provided.

  Further, in the lower opaque area 72C, there are electrical components including the first start winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, the variable winning ball apparatus 15, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39. Although provided, the electrical component including the prize ball display 51 and the electrical component including the round number display 75, the electrical component including the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display Even if an electrical component including any one of the electrical component including the device 10, the electrical component including the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a, the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b, and the normal symbol starting memory display 41 is installed. Good. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the electrical components is installed.

  Moreover, although the movable member attaching part C is attached over both the back surface of the lower opaque region 72C and the back surface outside the game region, it may be attached to either one of the back surfaces. Further, it is not always necessary to cover the electrical component group provided in the lower opaque region 72C.

  In addition, the movable member 78 is attached to the lower opaque region 72C, and a movable member attaching portion for attaching an attaching portion integrated with the movable member to the upper opaque region 72A and the side opaque region 72B is further provided. May be attached. Further, the movable member attaching portion may be attached to the cover portions A and B.

  The wiring A1 indicates a wiring that connects the electrical component group provided in the upper opaque region 72A and the main unit 31A. A wiring B1 indicates a wiring for connecting the electrical component group provided in the side opaque region 72B and the main unit 31A. The wiring C1 is a wiring that connects the electrical component group provided in the lower opaque region 72C and the main unit 31A. A wiring D1 indicates a wiring that connects the motor 78A and the rendering unit 80A. A wiring E1 indicates a wiring for connecting the image display device 9 and the effect unit 80A.

  The wirings A1, B1, C1, and D1 are holes provided in the lower side portion of the mounting plate 90 that passes through the lower side of the image display device 9 on the back side of the game board 6 and to which the image display device 9 is attached. It passes through a certain common wire passing part 79. The wiring E1 passes through a wiring passage portion 79B provided at a part of the mounting plate 90 corresponding to the back surface of the image display device 9. Note that the wiring F1 connected to the gate switch 32a passes under the image display device 9 on the back side of the game board 6, similarly to the wiring A1, the wiring B1, the wiring C1, or the wiring D1, and the image display device. 9 is attached to the main unit 31 </ b> A through a common wiring passage 79 which is a hole provided on the lower side of the attachment plate 90 to which 9 is attached.

  FIG. 160 is a front view for explaining the transparent game area 71 and the movable member 78 in the game area when the movable member 78 is installed at a position corresponding to the lower opaque area 72C. In FIG. 160, the hatched portion from upper left to lower right indicates an opaque region (upper opaque region 72A, side opaque region 72B, lower opaque region 72C), and the portion not hatched is transparent. A game area 71 is shown. The game area 7 is formed of a transparent game area 71 and an opaque area. The transparent game area 71 and the opaque area overlap with the area (display area) of the display screen 9A (inside the broken-line rectangle) of the image display device 9, but the display area also has a portion overlapping with the outside of the game area 6B.

  FIG. 160 shows a case where the movable member 78 is driven by the motor 78A to move to the transparent game area 71 and a case where the movable member 78 is stored in a position where it is not visually recognized by the player. The movable member 78 can be accommodated in a position (in the example shown in FIG. 160, the lower opaque region 72C) that is not visually recognized by the player by the motor 78A. In FIG. 160, the motor 78A is driven based on the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 by the player, and the movable member 78 moves to the transparent game area 71 from a position where it is not visually recognized by the player. . In FIG. 160, four mounting brackets (a bracket for mounting the image display device 9 to the mounting plate 90: see FIG. 158) are also shown outside the game board 6.

  In FIG. 161, the display effect in the image display device 9 when the movable member 78 is installed at a position corresponding to the lower opaque region 72C and the movable member 78 stopped at a predetermined fixed position cooperate to produce one effect. FIG. In FIG. 161, a “dragon” -shaped member is the movable member 78, and a flame-shaped member expressed so that the “dragon” -shaped member is discharged is an image displayed on the display screen 9 </ b> A of the image display device 9. 9c. In addition, as shown in FIG. 161, an image 73a having a different taste from the other part is displayed in a part corresponding to the inside of the decorative member 73 in the display screen 9A.

  In this embodiment, for example, in the super reach B effect, the display of “special reach” as shown in FIG. 121 (I) for notifying that the effect further developed than the effect by the high-speed rotation is executed. After that, the movable member 78 advances from the non-transparent area or the game area to the transparent game area 71 (the effects illustrated in FIGS. 122 (J) and (K) show that the movable member 78 is transparent from the right side). It is changed to the effect that advances into the area 71). When reaching the position where the overlapping portion of the movable member 78 with the transparent game area 71 is maximized, the image display device 9 displays a flame image as if it is exhaling from the movable member 78. The image is displayed in the vicinity of the changing middle symbol (the effect illustrated in FIG. 122 (L) is changed to an effect in which the movable member 78 has advanced into the transparent game area 71 from the right side. ).

  FIG. 162 is a front view for explaining another type of movable member 78 when the movable member 78 is installed at a position corresponding to the lower opaque region 72C. FIG. 162 shows a case where the movable member 78 is driven by the motor 78A to move to the transparent game area 71 and a case where the movable member 78 is stored in a position where it is not visually recognized by the player. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 162, the motor 78A is driven based on the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 by the player, and the movable member 78 is transparent from the position where the player cannot see it at all. Move to the game area 71. In the example shown in FIG. 162, the movable member 78 is supported at one end of the support member 78a, and the other end of the support member 78a is connected to the shaft of the motor 78A. The support member 78a is formed of a transparent material (for example, a transparent acrylic plate). In the example shown in FIG. 161, when the movable member 78 moves to a position where it overlaps with the transparent game area 71, a part of the movable member 78 exists in the opaque area. However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, all parts of the movable member 78 overlap with the transparent game area 71.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 158 to 162, the mounting position of the movable member 78 is different from that in the first embodiment. ~ Same as the case shown in FIG. Further, although the rotation direction and the rotation amount of the motor 78A are different from those shown in FIGS. Same as the case.

  In this embodiment and the modifications shown in FIGS. 158 to 162, the back surface of the upper opaque region 72A (position corresponding to the upper opaque region 72A) and the back surface of the lower transparent region 72C (position corresponding to the lower opaque region 72C). However, the movable member 78 may be installed on the back surface of the horizontal transparent region 72B (a position corresponding to the side opaque region 72B). FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the mechanism portion of the gaming machine in which the movable member 78 is installed at a position corresponding to the side opaque region 72B. FIG. 164 is a cross-sectional view showing a longitudinal section of the gaming machine when the movable member 78 is installed at a position corresponding to the side opaque region 72B. The game board 6 is attached to the game frame 2A, and an LCD image display device 9 attached to the attachment plate 90 is installed on the back side of the game frame 2A. In the space 76 between the game frame 2A and the image display device 9, a movable member 78 is installed on the back surface of the side opaque region 72B (a position corresponding to the side opaque region 72B). A part of the movable member 78 is attached to the shaft of the motor 78A, and the movable member 78 moves by being rotated about the shaft of the motor 78A.

  On the back surface of the image display device 9, a main unit 31A including a game control board and an effect unit 80A including an effect control board are attached. In FIGS. 163 and 164, the rectangular parallelepiped cover portion A is attached over both the back surface of the upper opaque region 72A and the back surface outside the game region, and is an electrical component group provided in the upper opaque region 72A. It is formed so as to cover. As an electrical component (unit) in the electrical component group provided in the upper opaque region 72A, a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold memory display There are electrical components including each of 18a, the second special symbol storage memory indicator 18b and the normal symbol start memory indicator 41. The rectangular parallelepiped movable member attachment portion B is a member that is attached over both the back surface of the side opaque region 72B and the back surface outside the game region, and attaches the attachment portion 78B integrated with the movable member 78. In addition, the movable member mounting portion B is formed so as to cover the electrical component group provided in the side opaque region 72B. As electrical components in the electrical component group provided in the side opaque region 72 </ b> B, there are electrical components including the prize ball display 51 and the round number display 75. The rectangular parallelepiped cover C is attached to both the back surface of the lower opaque region 72C and the back surface outside the game region, and is formed to cover the electrical component group provided in the lower opaque region 72C. As electrical components in the electrical component group provided in the lower opaque region 72C, the first start winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, the variable winning ball apparatus 15, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and the winning opening (ordinary winning opening) ) There are electrical parts including 29, 30, 33, and 39 (including a detection switch for the prize opening). The upper opaque region 72A and the lower opaque region 72C need not be provided.

  The side opaque region 72B is provided with an electrical component including the prize ball display 51 and an electrical component including the round number display 75. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, an electrical component including the normal symbol display 10, an electrical component including the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a, a second special symbol reserved memory display 18b, and a normal symbol start memory indicator 41, An electrical component including any one of the first start winning port 13, the second starting winning port 14, the variable winning ball device 15, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the winning ports 29, 30, 33, 39 may be installed. Furthermore, it is sufficient that at least one of the electrical components is installed.

  Moreover, although the movable member attaching part B is attached over both the back surface of the side part non-transparent area | region 72B and the back surface outside a game area | region, you may make it attach to any one back surface. Moreover, it does not necessarily have to be formed so as to cover the electrical component group provided in the side opaque region 72B.

  In addition, the movable member 78 is attached to the side opaque region 72B, and a movable member attaching portion for attaching an attaching portion integrated with the movable member to the upper opaque region 72A and the lower opaque region 72C is further provided. May be attached. Further, the movable member attaching portion may be attached to the cover portions A and C.

  The wiring A1 indicates a wiring that connects the electrical component group provided in the upper opaque region 72A and the main unit 31A. A wiring B1 indicates a wiring for connecting the electrical component group provided in the side opaque region 72B and the main unit 31A. The wiring C1 is a wiring that connects the electrical component group provided in the lower opaque region 72C and the main unit 31A. A wiring D1 indicates a wiring that connects the motor 78A and the rendering unit 80A. A wiring E1 indicates a wiring for connecting the image display device 9 and the effect unit 80A.

  The wirings A1, B1, C1, and D1 are holes provided in the lower side portion of the mounting plate 90 that passes through the lower side of the image display device 9 on the back side of the game board 6 and to which the image display device 9 is attached. It passes through a certain common wire passing part 79. The wiring E1 passes through a wiring passage portion 79B provided at a part of the mounting plate 90 corresponding to the back surface of the image display device 9. Note that the wiring F1 connected to the gate switch 32a passes under the image display device 9 on the back side of the game board 6, similarly to the wiring A1, the wiring B1, the wiring C1, or the wiring D1, and the image display device. 9 is attached to the main unit 31 </ b> A through a common wiring passage 79 which is a hole provided on the lower side of the attachment plate 90 to which 9 is attached.

  FIG. 165 is a front view for explaining the transparent game area 71 and the movable member 78 in the game area when the movable member 78 is installed at a position corresponding to the side opaque area 72B. In FIG. 165, hatched portions from upper left to lower right indicate opaque regions (upper opaque region 72A, side opaque region 72B, lower opaque region 72C), and portions not hatched are transparent. A game area 71 is shown. The game area 7 is formed of a transparent game area 71 and an opaque area. The transparent game area 71 and the opaque area overlap with the area (display area) of the display screen 9A (inside the broken-line rectangle) of the image display device 9, but the display area also has a portion overlapping with the outside of the game area 6B.

  FIG. 165 shows a case where the movable member 78 is driven by the motor 78A to move to the transparent game area 71 and a case where the movable member 78 is stored in a position where it is not visually recognized by the player. The movable member 78 can be accommodated in a position (in the example shown in FIG. 165, outside the game area 6B and the side opaque area 72B) that is not visually recognized by the player by the motor 78A. In FIG. 160, the motor 78A is driven based on the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 by the player, and the movable member 78 moves to the transparent game area 71 from a position where it is not visually recognized by the player. . In addition, in FIG. 165, four attachment metal parts (metal parts for attaching the image display device 9 to the attachment plate 90: see FIG. 163) are also shown outside the game board 6.

  FIG. 166 shows that the display effect in the image display device 9 when the movable member 78 is installed at a position corresponding to the side opaque region 72B and the movable member 78 stopped at a predetermined fixed position cooperate with each other. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example by which an effect is implement | achieved. In FIG. 166, the “dragon” -shaped member is the movable member 78, and the flame-shaped member expressed so that the “dragon” -shaped member is discharged is an image displayed on the display screen 9 </ b> A of the image display device 9. 9c. In addition, as shown in FIG. 166, an image 73a having a different taste from the other part is displayed in the part corresponding to the inside of the decorative member 73 in the display screen 9A.

  In this embodiment, for example, in the super reach B effect, the display of “special reach” as shown in FIG. 121 (I) for notifying that the effect further developed than the effect by the high-speed rotation is executed. After that, the movable member 78 advances from the non-transparent area or the game area to the transparent game area 71 (the effects illustrated in FIGS. 122 (J) and (K) show that the movable member 78 is transparent from the bottom) It will be changed to a production that advances to 71). When reaching the position where the overlapping portion of the movable member 78 with the transparent game area 71 is maximized, the image display device 9 displays a flame image as if it is exhaling from the movable member 78. The image is displayed in the vicinity of the changing middle symbol (the effect illustrated in FIG. 122 (L) is changed to an effect in which the movable member 78 has advanced into the transparent game area 71 from below). .

  FIG. 167 is a front view for explaining another type of movable member 78 when the movable member 78 is installed at a position corresponding to the side opaque region 72B. FIG. 167 shows a case where the movable member 78 is driven by the motor 78A and moves to the transparent game area 71, and a case where the movable member 78 is stored in a position where it is not visually recognized by the player. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 167, the motor 78A is driven based on the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 by the player, and the movable member 78 is transparent from the position where it is not visually recognized by the player. Move to the game area 71. In the example shown in FIG. 167, the movable member 78 is supported at one end of the support member 78a, and the other end of the support member 78a is connected to the shaft of the motor 78A. The support member 78a is formed of a transparent material (for example, a transparent acrylic plate). In the example shown in FIG. 166, when the movable member 78 moves to a position where it overlaps the transparent game area 71, a part of the movable member 78 exists in the opaque area. However, in the example shown in FIG. 167, all the portions of the movable member 78 overlap with the transparent game area 71.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 163 to 167, the mounting position of the movable member 78 is different from that in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, but each of the main board 31 and the effect control board 80 is included. The configuration of the substrate is the same as that of this embodiment or the modification shown in FIGS. Further, the rotation direction of the motor 78A is different from that of this embodiment, and the rotation amount is different from that of this embodiment and the modified examples shown in FIGS. 158 to 162. The contents of control of the control microcomputer 100 are also the same as in the case of this embodiment and the modifications shown in FIGS.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the movable member 78 includes the region corresponding to the opaque game region or the region corresponding to the outside of the game region (non-display corresponding region) and the display corresponding region corresponding to the display region (specifically Specifically, it is possible to move between the transparent member 71 and the overlapping ratio of the movable member 78 and the display corresponding region (the whole of the movable member 78 when viewed in a plan view) according to the gaming state. Since the movable member 78 is moved so that the ratio of the area overlapping the display corresponding area to the total area) can be changed, the player can visually recognize the display screen 9A of the image display device 9 without any obstruction. The effect of the display effect by the display device 9 can be prevented from being lowered, and the effect of the effect by the movable member 78 can be enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the reach effect (specifically, the super reach B effect) executed during the change of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is taken as an example of the effect using the movable member 78, but the movable member 78 is used. Production using is not limited to reach production. An effect using the movable member 78 may be performed in a notice effect, an effect executed during a big hit game, or other effects. Further, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 has exemplified the production in which the movable member 78 gradually advances into the transparent game area 71. However, the production using the movable member 78 is not limited to such production. It is not limited to directing. For example, when a specific effect such as a reach effect is not performed, the movable member 78 is positioned so as to exist in the transparent game area 71, and when the specific effect is started, the movable member 78 is moved to the non-transparent area 72 or It is also possible to evacuate the game area and then perform a specific effect by a display effect on the display screen of the image display 9. Alternatively, the movable member 78 may be gradually withdrawn from the transparent gaming area 71, or the movable member 78 may be controlled to repeatedly move between the transparent gaming area 71 and the non-transparent area 72 or outside the gaming area.

  In this embodiment, the data bus in the CG bus between the drawing circuit 91 and the CGROM 83 in the drawing processor 109 physically has 64 bits, but all 64 bits are used as a data bus. It is possible to switch between a mode and a 32-bit mode in which the lower 32 bits are used as a data bus. Hereinafter, the operation and effect when such switching is possible will be described.

  FIG. 168 (A) shows a case where two ROMs 83A and 83B are provided. However, when additional ROMs are added, two ROMs capable of inputting / outputting 32-bit data as shown in FIG. 168 (B) are shown. It is necessary to provide ROMs 83C and 83D or a ROM capable of inputting and outputting 64-bit data. In FIG. 168 (B), the ROM 83C and 83D describe the data bus as extending from the ROM 83A and 83B for the convenience of drawing, but in reality, between the drawing controller 91 and the ROM 83A and 83B. The data bus is branched and wired to the ROMs 83C and 83D. As shown in FIG. 168 (B), when the bus width is 64 bits, the drawing control unit 91 inputs data by 64 bits. In that case, if one ROM 83C is provided when the ROM is added, the drawing control unit 91 masks (forcibly sets to 0) the upper 32 bits of the input 64-bit data, or sets two 64-bit data. It is necessary to perform processing such as creating 64-bit data from the lower 32 bits of each data.

  In this embodiment, the CG bus mode can be switched between a 64-bit mode in which all 64 bits are used as a data bus and a 32-bit mode in which lower 32 bits are used as a data bus. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 168 (C), when reading image data from the ROM 83C in which moving image data is stored, the 32-bit mode is set, and images are read from the ROM 83A and 83B in which still image data is stored. When reading data, if the 64-bit mode is set, the ROM 83C to be added can be made one. In FIG. 168 (C), for convenience of drawing, the ROM 83C is described such that the data bus extends from the ROM 83A. However, actually, the data bus between the drawing control unit 91 and the ROM 83A is branched. Wired to the ROM 83C. When configured as shown in FIG. 168 (C), when the bus width is 32 bits, that is, when the lower 32 bits are set to the 32-bit mode used as the data bus, the drawing control is performed. The unit 91 can input data by 32 bits. Therefore, the drawing control unit 91 can handle 32-bit data as it is by providing only one ROM 83C.

  Further, in the case where the ROM expansion is not performed and the CGROM 83 can be formed by the three ROMs 83A, 83B, and 83C as shown in FIG. 168 (C), when the present invention is not applied, FIG. As shown, it is necessary to form the CGROM 83 with four ROMs 83A, 83B, 83C, 83D. That is, the number of ROMs used increases.

  The moving image data is stored in the ROM 83C in a compressed state. Therefore, the data amount is compressed as compared with the sprite images stored in the ROMs 83A and 83B. Then, the amount of data transfer processing from the CGROM 83 is small compared to the decoding processing by the drawing processor 109. Therefore, even if the bus width when reading moving image data (compressed data) from the CGROM 83 is narrowed to reduce the data transfer speed, the overall processing performance of the rendering processor 109 is not significantly reduced.

  In this embodiment, characteristic configurations of gaming machines as shown in the following (1) to (10) are shown.

  (1) The gaming machine according to the second embodiment is a gaming machine in which a player can perform a predetermined game by firing a game ball into a gaming area, and can be rotated by the player. Operation means (for example, the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 in the second embodiment) and a transparent game board (for example, the second embodiment) having transparency and having a game area formed on the front side. An image display device (for example, in the second embodiment) having a display area disposed on the back side of the transparent game board and visible to the player through the transparent game board. An image display device 9), and a movable member (for example, the movable member 78 in the second embodiment) movable within a region (for example, the space 76) formed between the transparent game board and the image display device. Based on the rotation operation by the rotation operation means Te, the movable member control means for moving the movable member (e.g., in the second embodiment, portions for performing the steps S1614~S1618 by attraction control microcomputer 100) characterized by comprising a. According to such a configuration, the movable member can be moved based on the rotation operation by the rotation operation means, so that it is possible to improve the gameability when performing an effect using the movable member.

  (2) The game area includes a transparent game area having transparency (for example, a transparent game area 71 in the second embodiment) and an opaque member (for example, decoration is provided above the transparent game area in the transparent game board). And a non-transparent game area (for example, the upper opaque area 72A in the second embodiment) formed by being attached, and the movable member control means corresponds to the non-transparent game area. A non-display corresponding area (for example, a back surface portion of an opaque game area in the space 76 or a back surface area outside the game area) in the space 76 and a transparent corresponding area corresponding to a transparent game area (for example, , And the overlapping ratio with the transparent corresponding area can be changed according to the gaming state. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 according to the second embodiment. In particular, it may be configured to execute the decorative symbol variation processing (see FIG. 142) with the variation pattern of the super reach B). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the screen of the image display device without obstruction, and to prevent the effect of display effects by the image display device from being reduced. Moreover, the effect by the movable member can be enhanced.

  (3) The game area includes a transparent game area having transparency (for example, the transparent game area 71 in the second embodiment) and an opaque member (for example, decoration is provided below the transparent game area in the transparent game board). A non-transparent game area (for example, the lower opaque area 72C in the second embodiment) formed by the attachment, and the movable member control means corresponds to the non-transparent game area. A non-display corresponding region (for example, a back surface portion of an opaque game region in the space 76 or a back surface portion outside the game region) in the space 76 and a transparent corresponding region corresponding to the transparent game region (for example, a region corresponding to the region or the outside of the game region) , And the overlapping ratio with the transparent corresponding area can be changed according to the gaming state. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 according to the second embodiment. In particular, it may be configured to execute the decorative symbol variation processing (see FIG. 142) with the variation pattern of the super reach B). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the screen of the image display device without obstruction, and to prevent the effect of display effects by the image display device from being reduced. Moreover, the effect by the movable member can be enhanced.

  (4) The game area includes a transparent game area having transparency (for example, the transparent game area 71 in the second embodiment) and an opaque member (for example, decoration is provided on the side of the transparent game area in the transparent game board). A non-transparent game area (for example, the side non-transparent area 72B in the second embodiment), and the movable member control means moves the movable member into the opaque game area. A non-display corresponding area (for example, the back surface portion of the opaque game area in the space 76 or the back surface area outside the game area) corresponding to the corresponding area or the outside of the game area and the transparent corresponding area corresponding to the transparent game area (For example, the portion of the back surface of the transparent gaming area in the space 76) can be moved between, and the overlapping ratio with the transparent corresponding area can be changed according to the gaming state (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 in the second embodiment. In particular, it is configured to execute the decorative symbol variation process (see FIG. 142) with the variation pattern of the super reach B). Good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the screen of the image display device without obstruction, and to prevent the effect of display effects by the image display device from being reduced. Moreover, the effect by the movable member can be enhanced.

  (5) Other aspects of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment include a first winning portion (for example, the first start winning opening 13 in the second embodiment) provided in the gaming area, and a gaming area. The second winning portion provided (for example, the second start winning port 14 in the second embodiment) and the variable display of the second winning portion based on the winning of the game medium (for example, a game ball) in the first winning portion. 1 start condition is satisfied (for example, after the final stop of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the second embodiment, or after the end of the first big hit game or the second big hit game, the first reserved memory When the number is not 0 and the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number), the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol in the second embodiment) is started, A first variable display section for deriving and displaying the display result (example: For example, the first special symbol display 8a in the second embodiment and the second start condition of variable display are established based on the winning of the game medium in the second winning portion (for example, the second implementation) After the final stop of the second special symbol or the first special symbol, or after the second big hit game or the first big hit game, the second reserved memory number is not 0 and the second reserved memory number is the first A second variable display unit that starts variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol in the second embodiment) and derives and displays the display result when the number is greater than the reserved storage number). For example, the player is provided with the second special symbol display 8b) in the second embodiment, and when the specific display result is derived and displayed on either the first variable display unit or the second variable display unit. Specific gaming state (e.g. A game machine that is shifted to a big hit game state), which can be rotated by a player (for example, the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 in the second embodiment) and a rotation operation by the rotation operation unit. And a game effect executing means for executing a predetermined game effect (for example, in the second embodiment, the portion for executing steps S1614 to S1618 in the effect control microcomputer 100). To do. According to such a configuration, since a predetermined game effect can be executed based on the rotation operation by the rotation operation means, it is possible to improve the game performance using the rotation operation means.

  (6) The gaming machine has first hold storage data (e.g., the number of game media winnings to the first winning unit that does not satisfy the first start condition up to a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 4) (e.g., A first reserved storage means (for example, realized by the first reserved memory number counter in the second embodiment) for storing the count value of the first reserved memory number counter in the second embodiment), and a predetermined Second on-hold storage data (for example, second in the second embodiment) that can specify the number of winnings of the game medium to the second winning part where the second start condition up to the upper limit (for example, 4) is not satisfied. A second reserved storage means (for example, realized by the second reserved memory number counter in the second embodiment) for storing the count value of the reserved memory number counter), and a second variable display unit for the second identification information. Variable display is not executed On the condition that the first variable display unit performs variable display of the first identification information, and the first variable display unit performs variable display of the first identification information on the condition that the second variable display is not performed. Variable display execution means for executing variable display of the second identification information in the unit (for example, in the second embodiment, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S104 to S106, steps S121 to S123, and step S131. The same process as steps S104 to S106 in the second variation pattern setting process, the same process as steps S121 to S123 in the second special symbol variation process, and the same process as step S131 in the second special symbol stop process And a variable display executing means, when the display result is derived and displayed on the first variable display section or the second display is possible. When the display result is derived and displayed on the display unit, if the number of winnings specified by the first reserved storage data is larger than the number of winnings specified by the second reserved storage data, the first start condition is assumed to be satisfied and the first The variable display of the first identification information in the variable display unit is executed in preference to the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display unit (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines N in step S52). The process after step S53 is executed based on the above, and the process after step S53B is controlled not to be executed based on the determination of Y in step S52B), and the number of winnings specified by the second reserved storage data Is greater than the number of winnings specified by the first reserved stored data, the variable table of the second identification information in the second variable display section is determined as the second start condition is satisfied. The display is executed with priority over the variable display of the first identification information in the first variable display unit (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 performs the processing in and after step S53B based on the determination of N in step S52B. And control so that the processing after step S53 is not executed based on the determination of Y in step S52). According to such a configuration, the variable display of the identification information on the variable display unit corresponding to the larger number of winnings of the number of winnings specified by the first reserved storage data and the number of winnings specified by the second holding stored data. Can be executed with priority. Since it is possible to preferentially start the fluctuation based on winning in the winning part with the larger number of winnings, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of invalid start winnings in the winning part.

  (7) When the display result is derived and displayed on the first variable display section or when the display result is derived and displayed on the second variable display section, the variable display execution means is the number of winnings specified by the first reserved storage data When the number of winnings specified by the second reserved storage data is the same, the variable display of the first identification information on the first variable display unit and the variable display of the second identification information on the second variable display unit Among them, the variable display of the identification information in the predetermined variable display unit is executed in preference to the variable display of the identification information in the other variable display unit (for example, in the second embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560). Is controlled so as not to proceed to steps S300B to S309B based on the determination of Y in step S313B. The process of S309 preferentially run) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification can be obtained because the number of winnings specified by the first reserved storage data and the number of winnings specified by the second reserved storage data are the same. It is possible to simplify the game control when the degree of advantage to the player does not change regardless of which of the variable display of information is executed first.

  (8) The gaming machine is the sum of the number of winnings specified by the first holding storage data stored in the first holding storage means and the number of winnings specified by the second holding storage data stored in the second holding storage means. Pending memory total number determination means (for example, the second embodiment) for determining whether or not a certain total number of winnings (for example, the total number of pending storage in the second embodiment) is a predetermined number (for example, 4) or more. The variable display of the first identification information on the first variable display unit is started based on the determination result of the pending storage total number determination means). Display time until the display result is derived and displayed, and the variable display until the display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display unit is started. Variable display time shortening means for shortening the interval (for example, in the second embodiment, a portion that executes step S102B when it is determined as Y in step S102A in the game control microcomputer 100). It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily start the variable display of the identification information on the variable display unit by shortening the variable display time of the identification information, and the occurrence of the invalid start prize to the winning part of the game medium is generated. Can be reduced.

  (9) When the variable display of the first identification information in the first variable display unit is executed, the game effect executing means is predetermined based on the fact that the rotation operation of a predetermined rotation amount is performed from the rotation operation means. (For example, in the second embodiment, when it is determined to be Y in step S1615 in the effect control microcomputer 100, step S1618 is executed based on the determination that Y is determined in step S1616.) ), When the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display unit is executed, the rotation operation of the rotation amount different from that when the variable display of the first identification information in the first variable display unit is executed A predetermined game effect is executed based on what is performed from the rotation operation means (for example, in the second embodiment, the effect control microcomputer May be configured in part) to perform the steps S1618 based to determining that Y in step S1617 when it is determined that N in step S1615 in Yuta 100. According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the first identification information in the first variable display unit is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display unit is executed. Since the rotation operation amount of the rotation operation unit can be varied, it is possible to further improve the game play using the rotation operation means.

  (10) The gaming machine selects a game effect selection means (for example, first game effect) that selects a game effect with a rotation operation from the rotation operation means and a game effect without a rotation operation from the rotation operation means. In the second embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 includes a portion for executing steps S1834 to S1836, and the game effect execution means executes the game effect selected by the game effect selection means (for example, the second In the embodiment, the step of executing steps S1614 to S1618 when it is determined as Y in step S1613 in the production control microcomputer 100), the game effect selection means is the first identification information in the first variable display section. When the variable display is being executed, the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display unit is executed. The game effects accompanied by the rotation operation from the rotation operation means are selected at different selection ratios (for example, in the second embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs step S1834 in FIG. 139). As shown in FIG. 4, the movable display is different between the case where the decorative symbol is displayed in synchronization with the first special symbol and the case where the decorative symbol is displayed in synchronization with the second special symbol. By using the determination table, the movable member 78 may be determined to move at a different rate. According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the first identification information in the first variable display unit is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display unit is executed. Since the selection ratio of the game effect accompanied by the rotation operation from the rotation operation means can be varied, the gameability using the rotation operation means can be further improved.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 169 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine as seen from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. The lower part of the hitting ball supply tray 3 has a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and the speed at which the hitting ball launching device launches the game balls (that is, the strength of the spring that plays the game balls). And a hitting ball operating handle (operating knob) 5 for adjusting the height).

  The player can adjust the momentum of the game ball fired from the ball striking device by rotating the operation knob 5. Specifically, by rotating the operation knob 5 to the right, the speed of the game ball fired from the ball striking device gradually increases, and when the speed exceeds a predetermined speed, the game ball fired Enters the left area of the gaming area 7 from above through the hitting rail. When the operation knob 5 is further rotated to the right, the launched game ball enters the right area of the game area 7 from above. Therefore, by changing the rotation amount with the operation knob 5 rotated to the right, it is possible to adjust the momentum of the game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device, and to adjust the area into which the game ball is to be shot. .

  A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 partitioned by guide rails is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  A variable winning ball apparatus 20 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 7. Below the variable winning ball apparatus 20, a first winning prize opening 11, a second starting prize opening 12, and a variable winning ball apparatus 15 forming a third starting prize opening 13 are provided. The winning ball that has entered the first starting winning port 11 is detected by the first starting port switch 11a, and the winning ball that has entered the second starting winning port 12 is detected by the second starting port switch 12a. Guided to the back. In addition, the winning ball that has entered the third starting winning opening 13 that can be won when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is detected by the third starting opening switch 13 a and guided to the back of the game board 6. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 15a. Hereinafter, the first start winning port 11, the second start winning port 12, and the third starting winning port 13 may be collectively referred to as “start winning ports” or may be expressed as starting winning ports 11, 12, and 13. . Further, the first start port switch 11a, the second start port switch 12a, and the third start port switch 13a may be collectively referred to as “start port switches” or may be represented as start port switches 11a, 12a, and 13a. .

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening and is detected by the start opening switch, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to open and close once or twice. By the opening / closing control, the left open door 76A moves to the left from the initial position, and the right open door 76B moves to the right from the initial position, so that the variable winning ball device 20 enters the open state, and the open door 76A. , 76B return to the initial position, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is closed. The state in which the variable winning ball device 20 performs the opening operation in response to the detection of the winning of the start port switch in this way is referred to as a starting operation state. Hereinafter, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be referred to as a big winning opening or an accessory. In addition, the game board 6 is provided with various kinds of winnings. Hereinafter, the winning combination means the variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  Further, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to be opened and closed a predetermined number of times, that is, a predetermined number of rounds when a big hit game start condition (for example, a game ball has won a specific area in the starting operation state) is established. This state is called a big hit gaming state (specific gaming state). In the big hit gaming state, a high percentage is won, and a large number of game balls are paid out to the player. Note that, except for the start operation state, a state where the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to open and close (a big hit game state) may be referred to as a first big hit game state. In addition, among the plurality of rounds in the first big hit gaming state, there may be included a round in which a large winning opening that is opened by the opening / closing plate 16 being opened is controlled to be opened / closed.

  An effect display device 9 such as an LCD for effect display is provided on the back side inside the variable winning ball device 20. The effect display device 9 variably displays a decorative symbol as identification information (variable display). In this embodiment, the effect display device 9 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”.

  On the right side of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, a special symbol display 8 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided. The special symbol display 8 is constituted by, for example, a 7-segment display.

  Above the special symbol display 8, there is provided a special symbol start memory display 18 composed of four LEDs for displaying the number of effective winning balls in which a game ball has entered the starting winning opening, that is, the starting memory number. The special symbol start memory display 18 displays up to four start memory numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol start memory display 18 increases the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 each time there is an effective start winning in the start winning openings 11, 12, and 13. Each time variable display is started on the special symbol display 8, the number of LEDs that are lit is reduced by 1 (that is, one LED is turned off). In this example, the special symbol start memory display 18 shifts the lighting state every time variable display is started on the special symbol display 8. As will be described later, since the start memory number is also displayed on the effect display device 9, the special symbol start memory display 18 may not be provided.

  On the left side of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. When the game ball passes through the gate 32 provided in the game area 7 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 displays a variable symbol of a normal symbol (in this example, a numeric display with a 7-segment LED). Be started. In this embodiment, “7” is stopped and displayed at the end of variable display in the case of winning, and other than “7” is stopped and displayed in the case of losing. In the case of winning, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. Note that the normal symbol hit probability is, for example, 12/13. Above the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol start memory display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of balls passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the gate 32 passes, the normal symbol start memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  In the lower part of the variable winning ball device 15, a big winning opening is provided in which the opening / closing plate 16 is opened by the solenoid 21 in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). The opening / closing plate 16 is means for opening and closing the special winning opening. The winning ball that has entered the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23. A special winning area (V winning area) is formed inside the big winning opening, and a game ball that has passed the V winning area is detected by the V winning switch 22. The next round in the jackpot gaming state is started on the condition that the game ball passes the V winning area (except for the case of the final round). In this embodiment, the game ball that has passed the V winning area is also detected by the count switch 23. Hereinafter, the grand prize opening by the variable prize ball device 20 may be referred to as a second grand prize opening, and the big prize opening by the opening / closing plate 16 may be referred to as a first grand prize opening. The first grand prize opening and the second big prize opening may be collectively referred to as “large prize opening”.

  In addition, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening) 38 is provided on the right side of the opening / closing plate 16, and a winning opening (normal winning opening) 39 is provided on the left side of the opening / closing plate 16. The game balls that have won the game ball winning openings 38 and 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 38a and 39a. The winning openings 38 and 39 constitute a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game media and allowing winning. The start winning opening also constitutes a winning area that accepts game media and allows winning, and a winning area is also provided inside the large winning opening (the first and second large winning openings). When a game ball wins a winning area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player as a prize (prize ball).

  Decorative lamps blinking and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7, and there is an out port 26 for collecting the game balls that have not won a prize at the bottom.

  Two speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (variable winning ball apparatus 20 or the like) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decoration LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  In this example, a prize ball LED 51 that is lit during award ball payout is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball break LED 52 that is lit when the supply ball is cut is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 28c. It has been. Further, a prepaid card unit that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through the ball striking rail, and then falls in the game area 7. When the hit ball enters the start winning opening and is detected by the start port switch, if the variable display of the symbol can be started, the special symbol starts variable display on the special symbol display 8 and the decoration display 9 displays the decorative symbol. Starts variable display. If it is not in a state in which the variable display of the symbol can be started, if the number of start winning memories which is the reserved storage of the special symbol variable display on the special symbol display 8 is not the upper limit number, the starting winning memory number is increased by one. That is, the number of LEDs to be turned on in the special symbol start memory display 18 is increased by one.

  The variable display of special symbols (“0” to “9”) on the special symbol display 8 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. If the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a big hit symbol (specific display result: specifically, for example, “3”, “7”), the first big hit gaming state (without starting operation state) of the big hit gaming state The game goes to the jackpot game state to be started. In the case of a symbol other than that (small hit symbol), it shifts to the starting operation state. In the start operation state, when a game ball wins in a special area provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 20, the state shifts to a second big hit game state (a big hit game state started after passing through the start operation state).

  As shown in FIG. 1, the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided with an operation portion 81 as an operation means that can be operated by a player. The operation unit 81 includes a plurality of operation units including a pressing operation unit 811 that can perform a pressing operation and a rotation operation unit 812 that can perform a rotating operation. In this embodiment, the configuration of the operation unit 81 and the detection method of the operation signal from the operation unit 81 (specifically, the pressing operation unit 811 and the rotation operation unit 812) are the same as those in the first embodiment. Since it is the same as the structure shown, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 178. 170 and 171 are front views of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 provided on the game board 6 as seen from the front. FIG. 172 is a perspective view showing a structure having game ball passage openings 71, 72, 73 provided on the back side of the open doors 76A, 76B shown in FIG. 170 and FIG. FIG. 173 is a perspective view showing a path from the passing port 71 to the specific winning port 66 that forms the specific region. FIG. 174 is a perspective view showing a path from the passing port 73 to a specific winning port forming a specific region. 175 (A), 176 (A), and 177 are top views of the lower part of the variable winning ball device 20 as viewed from above, and FIGS. 175 (B) and 176 (B) are variable winning ball devices. It is the front view which looked at the lower part of 20 from the front side. FIG. 177 also shows a rotating body (disk) 86 provided immediately above the specific winning opening 66. FIG. 178 is a top view of the rotating body 86 as viewed from above. In FIGS. 171, 173 to 177, the arrows indicate the course of the game ball.

  When the opening doors 76 </ b> A and 76 </ b> B are opened by driving the opening / closing motor 75, the variable winning device (combination object) 20 is in a state in which a game ball can enter. The game ball that has entered the accessory 20 passes through any of the passage openings 71, 72, 73 and flows down to the lower side of the accessory 20. The game ball that has passed through the passage opening 71 is detected by the first winning combination winning switch 71a, and the game ball that has passed through the passage opening 72 is detected by the second winning combination winning switch 72a and has passed through the passage opening 73. Is detected by the third prize winning switch 73a. The game ball that has passed through the passage port 71 passes through the guide rod 71A and is guided to the left in the accessory 20. The game ball that has passed through the passage openings 72 and 73 passes through the guide rod 73A and is guided to the right in the accessory 20. 170 shows a state where the open doors 76A and 76B are closed and the game ball cannot enter the accessory 20, and FIG. 171 shows a state where the open doors 76A and 76B are opened. Yes. In addition, the first prize winning switch 71a, the second prize winning switch 72a, and the third prize winning switch 73a may be collectively referred to as an “act winning prize switch”.

  Open doors 76A and 76B (not shown in FIG. 172) are provided on the front side of the structure shown in FIG. The game ball reaches any one of the passage openings 71, 72, and 73 through any of the three passages (routes from the near side to the far side) in the structure shown in FIG. When the open doors 76A and 76B are closed (completely closed state), the game ball cannot enter any of the three passage openings 71, 72, and 73. When the open doors 76A and 76B are in the open state, the open doors 76A and 76B can enter any of the three passage openings 71, 72, and 73. However, when the open doors 76A and 76B are in the most open state (fully open state), there are three. Although it can enter any of the passage openings 71, 72, 73, the left and right passage openings 71, 73 become smaller as the open area becomes smaller during the period when the open doors 76A, 76B shift from the fully opened state to the fully closed state. Compared to the above, it becomes easier to pass through the central passage 72. In addition, during a period of transition from the fully closed state to the fully opened state, the game ball gradually enters a state where it can enter any of the three passing ports 71, 72, 73 from a state where the game ball easily enters the central passing port 72. Transition.

  That is, immediately after the opening doors 76A and 76B start transition from the fully closed state to the fully closed state and immediately before returning to the fully closed state, the proportion of the game balls passing through the central passage 72 is relatively high. . Note that opening the opening doors 76A and 76B means that the accessory 20 is in an open state, and closing the opening doors 76A and 76B means that the accessory 20 is in a closed state. Moreover, the open door 76A and the open door 76B move in a symmetrical state. Moving in a symmetrical state means that the distance from the center (the central axis of the central passage port 72) to the end of the open door 76A (the end near the central passage 72) and the end of the open door 76B (the end of the open door 76B). This means that the distance to the end near the central passage 72 is always the same.

  Movable members 77 and 78 are provided on the left and right sides of the accessory 20. The moving part in the movable member 77 is a movable part 77A, and the moving part in the movable member 78 is a movable part 78A. The movable portion 77A is moved by a movable portion drive solenoid 77B, and the movable portion 78A is moved by a movable portion drive solenoid 78B. The movable part 77A and the movable part 78A each move in the vertical direction. A game ball that has won a specific winning opening 66 that forms a specific area provided at the bottom of the accessory 20 is detected by a specific area switch 66a. Note that the fact that a game ball has won the specific winning opening 66 and is detected by the specific area switch 66a is also referred to as V winning.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (A), the game ball that has passed through the passage opening 71 and is guided by the guide rod 71A (not shown in FIG. 173) passes through the passage 71B to the specific winning opening 66 and enters the specific area. It is possible to reach. The passage 71B becomes an open portion (a bowl-shaped passage) whose upper part is open from the middle, and a discontinuous passage 71C that is a passage that is connected to the passage 71B and cannot reach a specific area is provided at the beginning of the open portion. Yes. As shown in FIG. 173 (B), the movable portion 77A prevents the passage of the game ball downstream of the passage 71B at the beginning of the opening portion of the passage 71B during operation (when in the lower position). Is guided to the disengagement passage 71C. As shown in FIG. 173 (A), when the movable portion 77A is in the upper position, the game ball is not blocked by the movable portion 77A, and flows down to the downstream side of the passage 71B from the position where the movable portion 77A is provided. .

  As shown in FIG. 174 (A), the game ball that has passed through the passage openings 72 and 73 and is guided by the guide rod 73A (not shown in FIG. 174) passes through the passage 73B that leads to the specific winning opening 66. It is possible to reach the area. The passage 73B is an open portion (a bowl-shaped passage) that is open from the middle. The opening part of the passage 73B is curved, and there is no wall inside the curve at the beginning of the opening part. As shown in FIG. 174 (B), the movable portion 77A prevents the passage of the game ball downstream of the passage 73B at the beginning of the opening portion of the passage 73B during operation (when in the lower position). Is guided from the portion where the inner wall does not exist to the detaching passage 73C, which is a passage that cannot reach the specific region. As shown in FIG. 174 (A), when the movable portion 78A is in the upper position, the game ball is not blocked by the movable portion 78A and flows through the passage 73B along the outer wall of the curve by centrifugal force. It flows down from the position where the movable portion 78A is provided to the downstream side of the passage 73B.

  The passage 73B reaches the midway hole 74. The rotating body 86 is provided below the midway hole 74. The game ball that has passed through the halfway hole 74 flows down to the rotating body 86 side.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (A), the game ball that has passed through the midway hole 74 flows down to the specific area side through the passage 74B. The passage 74 </ b> B merges with the passage 71 </ b> B, which is a route from the passage port 71, in the upper part of the rotating body 86.

  In this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the passage port 72 and the game ball that has passed through the passage port 73 are merged by the guide rod 73A, but the game ball that has passed through the passage port 72 and the game ball that has passed through the passage port 73 A ball path may be provided so as to reach the intermediate hole 74 directly from the passage port 72 without joining the game balls.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (B), the game ball which has won the specific winning opening 66 and is detected by the specific area switch 66a is further detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. A game ball that has not won the specific winning opening 66 is also detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. That is, in this embodiment, all the game balls that have entered the accessory 20 are detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. Note that the game path won in the specific winning opening 66 is not detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a, and only the gaming balls that have not won the specific winning opening 66 are detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. It may be configured. In this case, the sum of the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 66a and the number of game balls detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a is the number of game balls discharged from the accessory 20.

  As shown in FIG. 176 (A), the game balls that have passed through the slipping paths 71C and 73C do not pass through the specific winning openings 66 from the slipping openings 67 and 68 formed in the vicinity immediately above the specific winning openings 66. Be guided to.

  As shown in FIG. 178, a plurality of concave portions 86 </ b> C are formed on the surface of the rotating body 86, and a notch 86 </ b> A is provided in a part of the rotating body 86. In the example shown in FIG. 178, seven concave portions 86C are provided. The game ball that has entered the passage 74B from the midway hole 74 and the game ball that has passed through the passage 71B reach the rotating body 86, but can enter the specific winning opening 66 only from the cutout portion 86A of the rotating body 86. The game ball that has entered the recess 86 </ b> C formed on the surface of the frame area (donut portion) of the rotator 86 is moved by the rotator 86, and is guided from the detachment port 69 to a path that does not pass through the specific winning port 66. . The recess 86C is a communication hole having no bottom surface. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the recess 86C can fall to the lower part, but the fall is prevented by the structure on the back surface of the rotating body 86 until the recess 86C containing the game ball reaches the position of the release port 69. ing. Further, the wall portion of the outer edge portion of the concave portion 86 </ b> C is prevented from falling toward the specific winning opening 66 from the concave portion 86 </ b> C. Note that a space between one recess 86C and the recess 86C adjacent thereto (hereinafter also referred to as “connecting portion”) is not a communication hole, so that the game ball does not fall from there.

  As indicated by broken line arrows in FIG. 177, the rotating body 86 rotates (in this example, rotates counterclockwise) by driving of the rotating body drive motor 87 (see FIG. 178). During the rotation of the rotating body 86, the game ball that has reached the rotating body 86 when the notch 86 </ b> A is positioned immediately above the specific winning slot 66 can immediately win the specific winning slot 66. Moreover, the area | region (internal area | region) inside the donut part in the rotary body 86 is an area | region formed in planar shape. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the rotating body 86 may enter the notch 86A or the recess 86C after rolling in the internal region.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 178, a sensor for position detection is provided in the vicinity of the rotating body 86. The sensor includes, for example, a light emitting element such as a light emitting diode and a light receiving element such as a photodiode or a phototransistor installed so as to sandwich the rotating body 86, and the rotating body 86 is provided with a hole 87c. The hole 87 c is formed at a predetermined position in the inner region of the rotating body 86. Specifically, it is formed at a position that allows light from the light emitting element to pass to the light receiving element side when the rotating body 86 rotates and the region including the hole portion is at a position corresponding to the sensor installation position. The light receiving element is hereinafter referred to as a position sensor 87a.

  The game ball that has passed through the intermediate hole 74 and has reached the rotating body 86 through the passage 74B is almost always dropped from the notch 86A and specified when the notch 86A is located immediately above the specific winning opening 66. Wins a prize opening 66. However, when the game ball reaches the rotating body 86 from the passage 71B, even when the cutout portion 86A is located immediately above the specific winning opening 66, the cutout portion 86A does not fall from the cutout portion 86A. May be crossed. The passage 74B which is a route from the intermediate hole 74 to the rotating body 86 is steeply inclined with respect to the surface of the rotating body 86 and is formed so as to flow down from the upper part with respect to the rotating body 86. This is because the passage 71B is formed so as to flow in from the lateral direction with respect to the surface of the rotating body 86 immediately before flowing into the rotating body 86.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the central passage 72 or the right passage 73, the V winning is more likely than when the game ball passes through the left passage 71. Will occur. That is, the right route from the passing port 72 and the passing port 73 is easier to guide the game ball to the specific winning port 66 than the left route from the passing port 71. Further, in the case where a ball passage that directly reaches the midway hole 74 from the passage port 72 is provided, when the game ball passes through the central passage port 72, it is not blocked by the movable portions 77A and 78A. Compared to the case where the left and right passage openings 71 and 73 are passed, the specific winning opening 66 is easily reached.

  In this embodiment, in the second big hit gaming state, it is assumed that a winning occurs when a game ball is detected by the accessory winning switch. That is, an area in which the three prize winning switches 71a, 72a, 73a are provided corresponds to the winning area. However, a switch for detecting a game ball may be provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in addition to the prize winning switch, and a winning may occur when the game ball is detected by the switch.

  FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of how the game proceeds in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 179, when a game ball is won at the start winning opening and the detection signal of any of the start opening switches 11a, 12a, 13a is turned on, that is, when a start winning occurs, the progress of the game is controlled. A lottery is executed by the game control means. In this embodiment, the lottery result is a big hit or a small hit, and there is no losing. Then, the variation (variable display) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started. When the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is finished, when the big hit is determined, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state (first big hit gaming state). In the big hit gaming state, the opening / closing control of the large winning opening (first large winning opening) by the opening / closing plate 16 is performed 16 times (16 rounds, 1 round opening allowance time is 29 seconds). As described above, in this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is fixed at 16, but the number of rounds (for example, any one of 2 rounds, 7 rounds, and 16 rounds) is determined by lottery or the like. May be.

  When the small hit is determined, the game control means controls the accessory 20 to the open state and starts the starting operation. In the starting operation state, the accessory 20 is opened for 0.9 seconds. The number of times of opening (number of times of opening) is once or twice. In the start-up operation state, when a game ball wins the accessory 20, and when the game ball wins the specific winning slot 66 and is detected by the specific area switch 66a, a V winning is generated. When a V prize is generated, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state (second big hit gaming state). If no V prize is generated, the game does not enter the second big hit gaming state. In other words, it becomes out of place.

  In this embodiment, in the second jackpot gaming state, the first grand prize opening is controlled to be opened / closed in all rounds, the round in which the first big prize opening is controlled to open / close, and the second big prize opening are There is a state in which a round controlled to open and close is mixed. In this way, there are a round with the first big prize opening where the continuation right of the next round is likely to occur and a round with the second big prize place where the continuation right of the next round is difficult to occur, so the variation of the game has been increased. Yes. However, even in a gaming machine having only the second grand prize opening without having both the first big prize opening by the opening / closing plate 16 and the second big prize opening by the variable winning ball apparatus 20, the display of the special symbol is performed. The present invention in which the number of times of opening of the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state is different can be applied.

  FIG. 180 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the change of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the start of the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 180, when the “start winning prize” occurs, the special symbol display 8 changes the special symbol, and the effect display device 9 performs the display effect in synchronization therewith. When the variable time has elapsed, a special symbol stop symbol is derived and displayed. If the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol, the accessory 20 is released (blade released) and a small hit game is started. Note that, as will be described below, the decorative design is changed in the effect display device 9 in synchronization with the change of the special design, but in FIG. 180, the change of the decorative design is omitted.

  FIG. 181 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the change of the special symbol and the decorative symbol, the start of the small hit game, and the start of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 181, when the “start winning” is generated, the special symbol display 8 changes the special symbol, and the effect display device 9 performs the display effect in synchronization therewith. Note that the example shown in FIG. 181 is an example in which variation patterns # 7A to # 7C described later are used. When the variable time has elapsed, a special symbol stop symbol is derived and displayed. If the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol, the accessory 20 is released (blade released) and a small hit game is started. When the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol ("3" or "7"), a jackpot display ("big hit" or "probability big hit") is performed, and the jackpot game is started. In that case, the game in the small hit game 8 starting operation state) is not executed. Thus, in this embodiment, the jackpot game state (first jackpot game state) that occurs when the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a specific symbol, and the jackpot that occurs when a V-winning occurs in the jackpot game Since there is a gaming state (second jackpot gaming state), the player can enjoy a plurality of types of jackpot games. Note that when the variation patterns # 7A to # 7C are used, the variation time is long, so even if the result is a small hit, the player is not required to go through the starting operation state until the variation time ends. It can be expected to occur. This is the same when the variation patterns # 8A to # 8C and # 9A to # 9C are used. Further, as will be described below, the decoration display pattern 9 is changed in the effect display device 9 in synchronization with the change of the special pattern. In FIG. 181, the change of the decoration pattern is omitted.

  FIG. 182 is an explanatory view showing an image display example of the post-change effect (effect executed before the end of the special symbol change and the start of the small hit game) in the effect display device 9. FIG. 182 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display effect for small hits (opening once for an accessory), and FIG. 182 (B) is an example of a display effect for small hits (opening for an accessory twice). It is explanatory drawing shown. Further, FIG. 182 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display effect of a small hit (3 rounds or 7 rounds at V winning), and FIG. 182 (D) is an illustration of a small hit (11 rounds at V winning). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a display effect. In this embodiment, the rotation operation from the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 is performed within a predetermined operation period after the display result of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit until the opening doors 76A and 76B are opened. Based on what has been done, the display screens shown in FIGS. 182A to 182D are displayed. When the rotation operation from the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 is not performed, for example, as shown in the display example used in the variation pattern 7B illustrated in FIG. Production of a mode that seems to be a big hit after losing in the battle is continued. FIG. 182 (E) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display effect when a V winning is generated in the small hit game. The display effect illustrated in FIG. 182 (E) is executed, for example, during a small hit game. The display effects illustrated in FIGS. 182 (A) to 182 (D) may also be executed during the small hit game.

  182 (A) to (D) exemplify still images, but the production control microcomputer 100 causes the production display device 9 to display the images in FIGS. 182 (A) to (D) during the post-fluctuation production period. ) Are controlled so as to sequentially display images in which the contents of the images illustrated in each of them are changed (for example, images in which petals gradually drop or move). In addition, the post-change effect is also performed on the light emitter and the speaker 27 in synchronization with the display of the post-change effect on the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 183 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a special symbol stop symbol and a winning type. As shown in FIG. 183, the special symbol stop symbol has a big hit symbol (in this example, “3” or “7”) and a small hit symbol (in this example, other than “3” and “7”). . As shown in FIG. 183, in this embodiment, the big hit symbol is determined to be either a normal big hit or a probable big hit depending on whether the big hit symbol is “3” or “7”. Further, as shown in FIG. 183, in this embodiment, there are eight types of small hits, that is, a small hit 1 to a small hit 8 depending on the small hit design. As shown in FIG. 183, the small hit symbol corresponds to the number of rounds in the second big hit gaming state. Further, the small hit symbol corresponds to the number of times the accessory 20 is released in the starting operation state. Therefore, a display relating to the player's advantage / disadvantage (number of times of opening) is made in the stage before the V winning in the small hit game, and the player's interest is drawn to whether or not the game ball wins the specific winning slot 66. Can do. In this embodiment, the number of rounds is determined by the type of the small hit symbol, but in addition to the type of the small hit symbol type, the number of rounds is determined depending on which of the passing holes 71, 72, 73 the game ball has passed. You may make it vary the range and kind of round number to be played, and the distribution ratio of a round.

  Further, the accessory 20 is controlled to be opened only in the starting operation state and the big hit gaming state. Therefore, in a game state other than those states, the game ball does not win a prize. Therefore, when a winning is detected inside the bonus game in a gaming state other than those states, the winning is not a regular winning (abnormal winning). Therefore, in this embodiment, when an abnormal winning occurs, a notification to that effect is made and a prize ball payout based on the winning is not performed. Therefore, in the gaming machine provided with the accessory 20, it is easy to find fraud. Also, it becomes possible to prevent prize ball payout based on fraud.

Next, the configuration and operation of control means and the like in the gaming machine will be described.
FIG. 184 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 184 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers. The random number circuit 503 may be provided outside the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 instead of being built in the game control microcomputer 560.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. In this embodiment, the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  In addition, the gate switch 32a, the first start opening switch 11a, the second start opening switch 12a, the third start opening switch 13a, the first winning combination winning switch 71a, the second winning combination winning switch 72a, and the third winning combination winning switch 73a. An input driver circuit 58 that supplies detection signals from the specific area switch 66a, the accessory discharge switch 85a, the prize opening switches 38a and 39a, the V prize winning switch 22, the count switch 23, and the position sensor 87a to the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on the main board 31. Further, a solenoid 15a for opening / closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15, a solenoid 21 for opening / closing the opening / closing plate 16, an opening / closing motor 75 for opening / closing the opening / closing doors 76A, 76B, a movable part driving solenoid 77B for operating the movable part 77A, An output circuit 59 for driving the movable part drive solenoid 78B for operating the movable part 78A in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a special symbol display 8 that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, a special symbol hold memory display 18, and a normal symbol hold memory display 41. Perform display control.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 177. The display control of the effect display device 9, the lighting control of the lamp, and the control of the speaker 27 are performed.

  FIG. 185 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 177, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 185, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 177 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103a. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 allows the signal input from the relay board 177 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 177). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  In addition, the signal input from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 177 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). A unidirectional circuit 177A as a means is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 185 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal directed from the relay board 177 to the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 177 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp (not shown) provided on the frame side. Further, the lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp, and the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to the eighth pressing operation unit lamp 82h, the operation unit center lamp 82A, the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation. This is supplied to each lamp provided in the operation unit 81 such as a unit lamp 82l.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are communicated between the effect control CPU 101, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70 in such a way that a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side. Communication).

  The effect control CPU 101 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol or the like (including a decorative design and a background design) in advance. The effect control CPU 101 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 101.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

  Further, the production control CPU 101 inputs a detection signal from the operation unit 81 via the input port 103b. Specifically, the CPU 101 for effect control includes the first press detectors 81a to 81a provided in the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 as described in the first embodiment via the input port 103b. The detection signal from the 4-press detector 81d is input. Further, detection signals from the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f provided in the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 are input.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address. The CPU 56 also executes processing for initializing the random number circuit 503. The CPU 56 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R. The random number circuit 503 generates a random number using a predetermined clock signal. As an example, the random number circuit 503 is set to output any numerical value of 0 to 598 to the CPU 56 when the numerical value is read from the CPU 56.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15, including S44 and S45).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S10 to S12, for example, an initial value (for example, 0) is set to a flag for performing processing selectively according to the control state such as a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets an abnormality notification prohibition flag (step S44) and sets a value corresponding to the prohibition period value in the prohibition period timer (step S45). The prohibition period value is a value indicating a period during which an abnormal winning notification described later is prohibited. The abnormality notification prohibition flag is a flag indicating that notification of an abnormal winning is prohibited, and is maintained in the set state until the prohibition period timer times out. Therefore, the start of the abnormal winning notification is prohibited for a predetermined period after the initialization notification is started in the effect display device 9.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. It is. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is a counter (normal symbol determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not the display result of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game machine control process), the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol is one round (normal When the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the random values for determination per symbol is increased), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S35 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, via the input driver circuit 58, the gate switch 32a, the first start opening switch 11a, the second start opening switch 12a, the third start opening switch 13a, the first winning combination winning switch 71a, and the second winning combination winning switch 72a. The detection signals of the third prize winning switch 73a, the specific area switch 66a, the prize discharging switch 85a, the prize opening switches 38a and 39a, the V prize winning switch 22, the count switch 23, and the position sensor 87a are inputted, and their states are entered. A determination is made (switch process: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a display control process for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage display 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 (step S22). For the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S33 and S34.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process for notifying an abnormal winning when, for example, it is detected that a game ball has won a prize at a time other than the regular time (step S23: abnormal winning notification process). Specifically, in the abnormal winning notification process, when an abnormal winning to the first big prize opening is detected, control is performed to transmit a first abnormal winning notification designation command (see FIG. 192) described later. Further, when an abnormal winning to the second big winning opening is detected, control is performed to transmit a second abnormal winning notification designating command (see FIG. 192) described later.

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S24). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S25 and S26).

FIG. 188 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 2: Determine the variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol (for variation pattern determination)
(2) Random 3: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(3) Random 4: Determine initial value of random 3 (for determining random 3 initial value)
(4) Random 5: Determine the stop symbol of the normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)

  Note that a random number generated by the random number circuit 503 is used as a big hit determination random number for determining whether to win a big hit or a small hit. Hereinafter, the jackpot determination random number may be referred to as random 1 or random R. The random numbers (1) to (4) may be referred to as software random numbers.

  In step S24 in the game control process shown in FIG. 187, the game control microcomputer 560 counts up (adds 1) a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination in (2). That is, the normal random number for determination per symbol is a random number for determination, and the other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In order to enhance the gaming effect, software random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (4) may be used.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol stop symbol is also determined by determining whether or not the big hit or the small hit is generated by random 1 (random R) that is a hardware random number.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S27). In the special symbol process, the processing corresponding to the special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special prize opening (the big prize opening by the accessory 20 and the opening / closing plate 16) in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. Execute. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 and the control state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command related to the display control of the effect display device 9 (effect control command control process: step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30).

  The CPU 56 also includes a first start opening switch 11a, a second start opening switch 12a, a third start opening switch 13a, a first winning combination winning switch 71a, a second winning combination winning switch 72a, a third winning combination winning combination switch 73a, Prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the prize opening switches 38a and 39a and the count switch 23 is executed (step S31). Specifically, the first start opening switch 11a, the second start opening switch 12a, the third start opening switch 13a, the first winning combination winning switch 71a, the second winning combination winning switch 72a, the third winning combination winning switch 73a, A payout control command indicating the number of winning balls is given to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to detection of a win based on the fact that any one of the prize opening switches 38a, 39a and the count switch 23 is turned on. Output. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 provides the output port with contents relating to solenoid on / off in the RAM area of the output port. Output (step S32: output processing). The CPU 56 also performs signal output processing for driving the motors 22 and 24 in the output processing.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, if the fluctuation speed of the special symbol is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 performs variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S34). For example, if the fluctuation rate of the normal symbol is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S35), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S34 (excluding step S30) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a relationship between a special symbol stop symbol and a determination value. However, FIG. 189 shows the number of determination values, not specific determination values. In this embodiment, the range of numerical values that can be taken by the random number for random determination (random R) is assumed to be 0 to 598. The total number of determination values is 599, which is a number that the jackpot determination random number can take. The 599 determination values are different numerical values. The CPU 56 extracts the count value from the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the big hit determination random value. The big hit or the small hit corresponding to the determination value that matches the big hit determination random value is obtained. Decide to do. It should be noted that since the second big hit game is started when a V win is generated in the small hit game (corresponding to the starting operation state), it is substantially determined that the big hit or the small hit is decided. It is also to decide whether it will be the second big hit.

  There are two types of big hits: a normal big hit and a probable big hit. In any case, when the change of the special symbol is finished, the game shifts directly to the 16-round big hit game state (first big hit game state) without going through the starting operation state. Later, the gaming state shifts to a probable change state (see FIG. 183).

  As shown in FIG. 189, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of small hits (small hits 1 to 8 per hit). The small hits include a small hit that opens the accessory 20 once in the starting operation state and a small hit that opens the accessory 20 twice in the starting operation state (see FIGS. 183 and 189). The small hit type and the special symbol stop symbol correspond to each other (see FIGS. 183 and 189). In addition, there are a plurality of types of second big hit games that are started on the condition that a V win has occurred in the small hit game. That is, there is a second big hit game with a different number of rounds.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 189, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state, the number of determination values corresponding to the big hit is larger than that in the normal state (non-probability variation state). That is, the probability of winning a big hit is increased. Further, in the probability variation state, the probability that the accessory 20 becomes a small hit that is opened twice is increased. In this example, in the probability variation state, the number of determination values corresponding to the small hits that the accessory 20 is released twice is (80 corresponding to the stop symbol 1 + 30 corresponding to the stop symbol 4 + stop symbol 6). Corresponding 125 pieces + 37 pieces corresponding to the stop symbol 8 + 90 pieces corresponding to the stop symbol 9) = 362 pieces. In the normal state, the number of judgment values corresponding to the small hits that the accessory 20 is released twice. (80 corresponding to stop symbol 1 + 125 corresponding to stop symbol 4 + 30 corresponding to stop symbol 6 + 67 corresponding to stop symbol 8 + 42 corresponding to stop symbol 9) = 344 It is a piece. Furthermore, in the probability variation state, the probability that the second big hit game with a large number of rounds is selected is increased. In the probability variation state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is increased. Furthermore, the probability that a large number of times of opening is selected as the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is increased. That is, for the small hits where the big hit game is started on the condition that the V prize is won, there are a large number of determination values corresponding to those having a large number of times of opening in the big hit game. In this way, the game control microcomputer 560 changes the selection ratio of the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus (for example, the accessory 20) in the big hit gaming state in the probability variation state by changing the number of determination values. The selection ratio of the number of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus in the big hit gaming state in the state (non-probability changing state) can be changed. In the probability variation state, the probability of selecting the second big hit game with a large number of rounds may be set lower than the probability in the normal state.

  FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a relationship between a variation pattern and a determination value. However, FIG. 190 shows the number of determination values, not specific determination values. The total number of determination values is 150, which is the number that can be taken by the random number for determining the variation pattern. The 150 determination values are different numerical values. The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the variation pattern determination random number. Decide to use the variation pattern corresponding to the value. That is, the variation time is selected based on the variation pattern determining random number. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 determines a variation pattern according to the type of stop symbol of the determined special symbol.

  FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S27) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special winning opening is executed.

  When the CPU 56 performs the special symbol process, the start port switch (first start port switch 11a, second start port) for detecting that a game ball has won a start winning port provided in the game board 6 is provided. If the switch 12a or the third start opening switch 13a) is turned on, that is, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the start winning opening has occurred (step S321), the start opening switch passing process is executed (step S322). . Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is ready to start the variable display of the special symbol, it checks the number of reserved memories (the number of start winning memories). The reserved memory number can be confirmed by the count value of the reserved memory number counter. If the number of reserved memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301).

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. The stop symbol after the variable display of the special symbol is determined. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S302).

  Special symbol changing process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is specially set. It is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to the symbol stop process (step S303).

  Special symbol stop process (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. The variable display on the special symbol display 8 is stopped and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. If the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S307). When the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to the pre-release of the accessory (step S304). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbols when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Pre-opening process of accessory (step S304): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The game control microcomputer 560 executes a process for performing the starting operation, and changes the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) in accordance with the process of releasing the accessory (step S305). Update to the value (5 in this example).

  Processing during opening of an accessory (step S305): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. It is confirmed whether or not the specific area switch 66a is turned on, and whether or not the accessory release time has elapsed. When the specific area switch 66a is turned on, the V winning flag is set. When the bonus release time has elapsed, the bonus is closed. Then, the value of the accessory release count counter is decremented by 1. If the value of the accessory release count counter is not 0, the accessory is released to perform the starting operation again. If the value of the accessory release count counter is 0, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to the post-function closing process (step S306).

  Post-combination processing (step S306): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. If the V winning flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S307). If the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (in this example, 0) corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300).

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to open the second grand prize port (that is, the accessory 20) or the first grand prize port (large prize port by the opening and closing plate 16). More specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the big prize opening is opened. In addition, the execution time of the process for opening the special prize opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) is set to a value (this value corresponding to the process for opening the special prize opening (step S308)). In the example, update to 8). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied, the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) is set to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to the post winning prize closing process (step S309). ).

  Process after closing the big prize opening (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm that all game balls have been discharged from the big prize opening is performed. When all the game balls are discharged and there are still remaining rounds and the continuation condition of the big hit game (the V winning) has been established, the internal state (specifically, the special symbol process flag) ) Is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the pre-opening pre-opening process (step S307). When all rounds are completed or when the continuation condition for the big hit game is not satisfied, the internal state is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to the big hit end process (step S310).

  Big hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300).

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. In this embodiment, as in FIG. 107 shown in the second embodiment, the effect control commands are effected from the main board 31 via the relay board 177 with eight signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7. It is transmitted to the control board 80. Further, between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, a signal line of the effect control INT signal for transmitting the capture signal (effect control INT signal) is also wired.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  Similarly to FIG. 108 shown in the second embodiment, the 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. Therefore, when viewed from the effect control microcomputer 100, the effect control INT signal corresponds to a signal that triggers the capture of effect control command data.

  The effect control command is sent only once so that the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize it. In this example, “recognizable” means that the level of the effect control INT signal changes, and that it is sent only once so as to be recognizable means that, for example, each of the first and second bytes of the effect control command data Accordingly, the production control INT signal is output in a pulse shape (rectangular wave shape) only once. Note that the effect control INT signal may have a polarity opposite to that shown in FIG. 108 of the second embodiment.

  FIG. 192 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. In the example shown in FIG. 192, commands 8001 (H) to 800F (H) are effect control commands (variation) for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of a special symbol. (Pattern commands) (corresponding to variation patterns # 1 to # 6 and # 7A to # 9C, respectively). The commands 8001 (H) to 8006 (H) correspond to the variation patterns # 1 to # 6, and the commands 8007 (H) to 800F (H) correspond to the variation patterns # 7A, # 7B, # 7C, # 8A, # This corresponds to 8B, # 8C, # 9A, # 9B, # 9C. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives any of the commands 8001 (H) to 800F (H), the production display device 9 performs control so that variable display of decorative symbols is started.

  Command 8CXX (H) (XX = 0 to 9) is an effect control command (display result designation command) that can specify a display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command. In this embodiment, the data set as XX is data indicating a special symbol stop symbol.

  Command 8DXX (H) (XX = 0 to 8) is an effect control command (small hit type designation command) for designating a small hit type. In this embodiment, the data set as XX is data indicating which small hit is 1 to 8 per small hit. That is, the command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command for designating 1 for a small hit, the command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command for designating 2 for a small hit, and the command 8D03 (H) specifies 3 for a small hit. It is an effect control command, command 8D04 (H) is an effect control command for designating 4 small hits, command 8D05 (H) is an effect control command for designating 5 small hits, and command 8D06 (H) is a small hit 6 is an effect control command that designates 6, command 8D07 (H) is an effect control command that designates 7 small hits, and command 8D08 (H) is an effect control command that designates 8 small hits.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the special symbol variable display (variation) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbols and derives and displays the display result. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot start designation command: a fanfare designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot game. Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of a small hit game (starting operation state).

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, for ending the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending designation command). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game. However, the small hit end designation command is transmitted when no V winning is made in the small hit game (starting operation state). When winning V, a jackpot start designation command is transmitted.

  Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state designation command) indicating that the gaming state has changed to the probability change state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) indicating that the gaming state has returned from the probability changing state to the normal state (non-probability changing state).

  Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (first abnormal winning designation command) for instructing notification of abnormal winning to the first big winning opening (lower attacker). The command D002 (H) is an effect control command (second abnormal winning designation command) for instructing the accessory (variable winning ball apparatus) 20 to notify the abnormal winning. The command D004 (H) is an effect control command (start prize abnormality designation command) for instructing notification of an abnormal prize to the third start prize opening (ordinary electric accessory) 15.

  Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (start winning designation command) indicating that a start winning has occurred. Note that the effect control command indicating that the start winning has occurred may be an effect control command indicating the reserved storage number itself.

  The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (time reduction number designation command) indicating the number of times that the special symbol can be changed (remaining number of times) in the time reduction state. It should be noted that the effect control command related to the special symbol variation in the short time state may be an effect control command indicating the number of times the special symbol variation has been executed in the short time state (including the variation executed when the effect control command is transmitted). . In this embodiment, the short time state is a gaming state in which the normal symbol variation time is shortened. Even when the gaming state is the probability variation state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened.

  The command E401 (H) is an effect control command (an accessory winning designation command) indicating that a winning for the accessory 20 has occurred. Command E 402 (H) is an effect control command (V winning designation command) indicating that a winning at the specific winning opening 66 has occurred.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 192, the display state of the light emitter such as a lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S322. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the reserved storage number is 4 which is the upper limit value (step S41). If the number of reserved memories is 4, the process is terminated.

  If the number of reserved memories is not 4, the value of the reserved memory number counter indicating the number of reserved memories is incremented by 1 (step S42). Further, the CPU 56 reads a count value from a counter for generating a random number and extracts a software random number, and reads a count value of the random number circuit 503 to extract a random R (a jackpot determination random number generated by the random number circuit 503). Then, a process of storing them in the storage area in the reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of the reserved storage number counter as the extracted random number value is executed (step S43). In step 43, the CPU 56 extracts a random 2 (see FIG. 188) value (a counter value for generating a variation pattern random number) as a software random number. In the reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is secured. Further, a counter for generating a random number for variation pattern and a holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  Further, the display of the special symbol hold memory display 18 is changed to a display showing the value of the hold memory number counter (step S44). Further, control for transmitting a start winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S45). Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command is used as a pointer. set. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S29) (the same applies to other effect control commands).

  194 and 195 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. The state where the special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. The case where the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300 is a state in which the special symbol display unit 8 does not display the variation of the special symbol and the jackpot game is not executed. State.

  In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 checks the number of reserved memories (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of reserved memories is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the reserved memory number is not 0, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S52). Then, the value of the reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S53). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n−1. To store. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories is extracted always matches the order of the number of reserved memories = 1, 2, 3 and 4. Yes.

  Then, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number (random R) from the random number buffer area (step S61), and executes the jackpot determination module (step S62). The big hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined determination value (see FIG. 189) with a big hit determination random number and executes a process for determining whether to make a big hit or a small hit. Note that deciding whether to make a big hit or a small win means deciding whether or not to shift to the first big hit gaming state or the starting operation state, but the special symbol display 8 has a stop symbol ( It also means determining the display result.

  When it is decided to make a normal big hit (step S63), the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag (step S71). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S69). When it is determined that the probability variation big hit is to be made (step S72), the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag and a probability variation big hit flag (steps S73, S74). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S69).

  If it is not determined to be a big hit, the CPU 56 sets the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state when the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state is set. -1 (steps S64 and S65), and a control for transmitting a time-saving number designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S66). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0, a time reduction end flag is set in order to shift the gaming state to the non-time reduction state when the variable display ends (steps S67 and S68). Then, control goes to a step S69.

  In this embodiment, when it is decided not to make a big hit, it is decided to make a small hit (see FIG. 189). That is, the CPU 56 does not make any decision in the lottery for determining whether or not to win the game.

  FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number buffer area (step S90). Then, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table based on the variation pattern determination random number (step S91). The fluctuation pattern table is an area of the ROM 54 in which determination values are set in association with the fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern selected in step S91 to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S92). Further, control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S93).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (step S94). For example, a start flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in step S91 is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S95). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S302) (step S96).

  FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 decrements the variable time timer by 1 (step S121), and when the variable time timer times out (step S122), the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (step S304). The updated value is updated (step S123). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the special symbol stop symbol has already been derived and displayed (step S130). When the stop symbol has already been derived and displayed, if the production time timer has timed out (if the value is 0), the value of the special symbol process flag is set in the pre-release function (step S304). The corresponding value is updated (steps S146 and S145). If the effect time timer has not timed out, the value of the effect time timer is decremented by 1 (step S147). Whether or not the special symbol stop symbol has already been derived and displayed is confirmed, for example, by setting a flag when executing the process of step S131 and checking whether or not the flag is set in the process of step S130. .

  If the special symbol stop symbol is not derived and displayed, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 to end the special symbol variation, and the special symbol display 8 stops. Control for deriving and displaying symbols is performed (step S131). Moreover, control which transmits the symbol determination designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control is performed (step S132).

  When the big hit flag is set (the special symbol display 8 displays 3 or 7 as a specific display result), the CPU 56 sends a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Transmission control is performed (steps S133 and S134). Also, the number of times of opening (number of rounds), which is the number of times that the big winning opening can be opened in the big hit game, is set in the opening number counter (step S135), and the pre-round start time (a new round is started) is set in the pre-round start timer. For example, a value corresponding to a notification time in the effect display device 9 is set (step S136). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winning opening start pre-processing (step S307) (step S137). Note that the number of rounds set in the release count counter is 16 corresponding to 16 rounds (16R) which is the number of rounds per first big hit.

  When the big hit flag is not set (N in step S133, that is, when it is a small hit), the CPU 56 issues a small hit type designation command for designating the type of small hit corresponding to the stop symbol of the special symbol. Transmission control is performed (step S140A). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a small hitting start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S140B). In addition, an effect time (3 seconds or 6 seconds in this embodiment) is set in the effect time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S141). The effect time is a time corresponding to a period during which the effect control microcomputer 100 is executing the effect after the fluctuation is stopped. If the time reduction end flag is set, the time reduction end flag is reset and the time reduction flag is reset (steps S142, S143, and S144).

  FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the accessory release pre-processing (step S304). In the pre-opening process, the CPU 56 sets 1 or 2 in the multi-function opening counter that indicates the number of times the variable winning ball apparatus 20 (playing object) is released in the starting operation (step S411), and sets the opening time of the playing object. A value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is set in the accessory opening time timer shown (step S412). Note that the value set in the accessory release count counter is a value (see FIG. 189) corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol determined in step S62. And the accessory 20 is made into an open state (step S413). Specifically, driving of the opening / closing motor 75 that drives the opening / closing doors 76A and 76B is started, and the accessory (variable winning ball apparatus) 20 is opened. Also, the in-function game ball number counter that counts the game balls that have entered the inside of the accessory 20 is cleared (initialized to 0) (step S414), and the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the processing during the release of the accessory ( The value is updated according to step S305) (step S415).

  FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the process during opening of an accessory (step S305). In the process during opening of the accessory, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the accessory release time timer has timed out (step S420). If it has timed out, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the accessory release number counter is 0 (whether or not the last release in the starting operation state has already ended) (step S420A). If the value of the bonus release counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S434. If the value of the accessory release number counter is not 0, the value of the accessory release number counter is decremented by 1 (step S420B). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the accessory release number counter has become 0 (step S420C). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the accessory release number counter has become 0 (step S420C). When the value of the accessory release number counter becomes 0, that is, when the start operation end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S434. When the value of the accessory release number counter is not 0, the CPU 56 performs control for releasing the accessory again. That is, a value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is set in the accessory opening time timer (step S420D). Further, the accessory 20 is controlled to be in an open state (step S420E).

  In step S434, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the in-function game ball number counter is zero. If the value of the in-game game ball number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S424. When the value of the game ball number counter in the bonus item becomes 0, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-instrument closing process (step S306) (step S435).

  As described above, the CPU 56 determines that when the value of the in-game game ball number counter becomes 0 after the bonus release time (0.9 seconds) for the final release has elapsed, that is, for all games. When the ball is ejected from the accessory 20, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing after closing the accessory (steps SS 420, S 420 A, S 420 C, S 434, S 435). In other words, in the process of releasing an accessory, the game state (in this case, the value of the special symbol process flag) is changed on condition that all the game balls are discharged from the accessory 20. Note that the special symbol process flag value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process on the condition that no V prize has occurred in the post-completion processing (see steps S454 and S468 in FIG. 203).

  If the accessory release time timer has not timed out, the value of the accessory release time timer is decremented by 1 (step S421). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the accessory release time timer has timed out (step S422). If time-out has occurred, the accessory 20 is controlled to be closed (step S432). Specifically, the open / close motor 75 is rotated in a direction to close the open / close doors 76A and 76B. Further, the rotating body 86 is stopped at the initial position, and the movable portions 77A and 78A of the movable members 77 and 78 are stopped at the initial position (a position where the game ball is not blocked) (step S433).

  The initial position of the rotator 86 is the position of the rotator 86 when the position sensor 87a outputs a detection signal. That is, it is the position of the rotating body 86 when the hole 87c provided in the rotating body 86 comes to a position corresponding to the sensor installation position. Therefore, the CPU 56 actually stops the driving of the rotating body drive motor 87 when the position sensor 87a outputs a detection signal in step S431. Further, by stopping the driving of the movable part drive solenoids 77B and 78B, the movable parts 77A and 78A are returned to the initial positions.

  If the accessory release time timer has not timed out, the rotating body / movable part control is executed (step S423). Further, when the first winning combination winning switch 71a, the second winning combination winning switch 72a or the third winning combination winning switch 73a is turned on, that is, when a gaming ball winning a winning combination is detected (step S424), an in-function gaming ball The value of the number counter is incremented by 1 (step S425), and a control for transmitting a prize winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S426). When the accessory discharge switch 85a is turned on, that is, when a game ball discharged from the accessory is detected (step S427), the value of the in-function game ball number counter is decremented by 1 (step S428).

  When the specific area switch 66a indicating that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 66 is turned on (step S429), the V winning flag is set (step S430) and a V winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S431).

  FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the rotating body / movable unit control. In the rotator / movable part control, the CPU confirms whether or not the rotator 86 and the movable parts 77A and 78A are in operation (in operation of the rotator / movable part) (step S435). If not in operation, it is confirmed whether or not the accessory 20 has been released (step S436). When turned on, the drive of the rotator 86 is started (step S437). That is, the rotating body drive motor 87 is rotated. Further, the driving of the movable parts 77A and 78A is started (step S438). That is, the drive of the movable part drive solenoids 77B and 78B is started. When the processes of steps S437 and S438 are executed, the CPU 56 sets an internal flag indicating that the rotating body / movable part is operating. Also, whether or not the accessory 20 has been released is confirmed by setting a flag when executing the process of step S413 and checking whether or not the flag is set in the process of step S436.

  FIG. 202 is a timing chart showing an operation example of the rotating body 86 and the movable portions 77A and 78A when the accessory 20 is released once. As shown in FIG. 202, the rotator 86 rotates at a constant speed for a time of 0.9 seconds + α. α is a period from when 0.9 seconds have elapsed from the start of opening of the accessory 20 to when all game balls that have entered the accessory 20 are discharged.

  Further, in this embodiment, the opening of the opening doors 76A and 76B of the accessory 20 and the movable portion 77A are determined depending on which kind of small hit is made and the accessory 20 is controlled to be opened. , 78A are different in relative timing.

  In this embodiment, when the accessory 20 is controlled to be in an open state based on the fact that the small hit is 1, the small hit is 3, the small hit is 5 or the small hit is 7, as shown in FIG. In addition, the movable part drive solenoid 77B for operating the movable part 77A is set to a position where it is driven until 0.4 seconds have elapsed from when the rotating body / movable part is in operation to block the passage of the game ball. . Next, the driving is stopped for 0.2 seconds, and the position is set to allow passage of the game ball. Thereafter, the position is set again to block the passage of the game ball. Further, the movable portion 78A is set to a position where the movable ball 78A is driven until 0.1 seconds elapses from when the rotating body / movable portion is in operation to prevent the game ball from passing. Next, the driving is stopped for 0.7 seconds, and the position is set to allow the game ball to pass. Thereafter, the position is set again to block the passage of the game ball.

  Further, when the accessory 20 is controlled to be in an open state based on the fact that the small hit 2, the small hit 4, the small hit 6 or the small hit 8 is obtained, as shown in FIG. The movable portion drive solenoid 77B for operating 77A is set to a position where it is driven until 0.1 seconds have elapsed since the rotating body / movable portion is in operation, thereby preventing the passage of the game ball. Next, the driving is stopped for 0.7 seconds, and the position is set to allow the game ball to pass. Thereafter, the position is set again to block the passage of the game ball. In addition, the movable portion 78A is set to a position where the movable portion 78A is driven until 0.4 seconds elapses from when the rotating body / movable portion is in operation to prevent the game ball from passing. Next, the driving is stopped for 0.2 seconds, and the position is set to allow passage of the game ball. Thereafter, the position is set again to block the passage of the game ball.

  Therefore, when the rotating body / movable part is in operation, the CPU 56 becomes 0. 0 from the time when the rotating body / movable part is in operation when the small hit is 1, 3, small hits, 5 small hits, or 7 small hits. When 4 seconds elapses, the driving of the movable portion drive solenoid 77B is stopped for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.1 seconds elapses after the rotating body / movable portion is in operation, the movable portion is driven for 0.7 seconds. The drive of the solenoid 78B is stopped. When the small hit is 2, the small hit is 4, the small hit is 6 or the small hit is 8, if the rotating body / movable part is in operation, 0.1 seconds have passed, and the movable part drive solenoid 77B is held for 0.7 seconds. The driving of the movable part drive solenoid 78B is stopped for 0.2 seconds after 0.4 seconds have elapsed from when the rotating body / movable part is in operation (step S439).

  Specifically, when the rotating body / moving part is operating, the CPU 56 is operating the rotating body / moving part when the small hit is 1, the small hit is 3, the small hit is 5 or the small hit is 7. At this time, a value corresponding to 0.4 seconds is set in the first timer for subtracting the value, and a value corresponding to 0.1 second is set in the second timer for subtracting the value. When the first timer times out, the drive of the movable part drive solenoid 77B is stopped and the value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the first timer, and when the second timer times out, the drive of the movable part drive solenoid 78B is stopped. And a value corresponding to 0.7 seconds is set in the second timer. Thereafter, when the first timer times out, the driving of the movable portion driving solenoid 77B is resumed, and when the second timer times out, the driving of the movable portion driving solenoid 78B is resumed.

  When the small hit is 2, the small hit 4, the small hit 6 or the small hit 8 is equivalent to 0.1 second in the first timer for subtracting the value when the rotating body / movable part is in operation. A value is set, and a value corresponding to 0.4 seconds is set in a second timer that subtracts the value. When the first timer times out, the driving of the movable part drive solenoid 77B is stopped and a value corresponding to 0.7 seconds is set in the first timer, and when the second timer times out, the driving of the movable part drive solenoid 78B is stopped. And a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the second timer. Thereafter, when the first timer times out, the driving of the movable portion driving solenoid 77B is resumed, and when the second timer times out, the driving of the movable portion driving solenoid 78B is resumed.

  FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the post-completion processing (step S307). In the post-completion processing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set (step S454). If the V winning flag is set, the V winning flag is reset (step S455), and the number of times of opening (the number of rounds) that is the number of times that the big winning opening can be opened in the second big hit game is set in the opening number counter ( Step S456). Note that the number of rounds set in the number-of-releases counter is the number of rounds (see FIG. 189) corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol determined in step S62.

  Furthermore, a value corresponding to the time before the start of the round (time for notifying in the effect display device 9 that the new round is started, for example) is set in the timer before the round start (step S457). Also, a big hit flag is set (step S458).

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S459), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S307). (Step S460).

  If it is confirmed in step S454 that the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a small hitting end designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S461), and the special symbol process. The value of the flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S462).

  FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S308) executed before each round in the big hit game (the first big hit game and the second big hit game). In the pre-opening process for the special winning opening, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display command for opening the special winning opening if it has not transmitted the display command for opening the special winning opening (steps S470 and S471). Also, the value of the timer before the round start is decremented by 1 (step S472). If the pre-round start timer times out (the value of the pre-round start timer is 0) (step S473), the winning number counter is initialized (step S474). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to zero.

  Then, a value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set in the opening time timer (step S475). In addition, the special winning opening (act) is controlled to be open. Specifically, in the round in which the first grand prize opening (large prize opening by the opening / closing plate 16) is opened, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the opening / closing plate 16 (steps S476, S477). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S309) (step S478). Further, in the round in which the second grand prize winning opening (the accessory 20) is opened, the open / close motor 75 is driven to open the open doors 76A and 76B (steps S476 and S479). Further, the in-item game ball number counter for counting the game balls won in the item 20 is cleared (initialized to 0) (step S480), and the process proceeds to step S478.

  FIG. 205 is an explanatory diagram showing a round in which the first big winning opening is opened in the second big hit gaming state. As shown in FIG. 205, the CPU 56 determines the round in which the first big winning opening in the second big hit gaming state is opened corresponding to the special symbols that have already been stopped. If it is decided to win the first big hit (in this example, if the special symbol stop symbol is decided to be “3” or “7”), the first big prize will be won in all rounds. Mouth open. In addition, when the special symbol stop symbol is “8” or “9”, as shown in FIG. 205, in the second big hit game executed after the small hit game is finished, the first in all rounds. The big prize opening is opened.

  FIG. 206 and FIG. 207 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening opening process (step S309). In the big prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first big prize opening is being opened (step S480). If the first big prize opening has been opened, the process proceeds to step S481B.

  When the first big prize opening is not opened (when the second big prize opening is opened), it is confirmed whether or not the opening time timer has timed out (step S481A). If the open time timer has timed out, the process proceeds to step S497. If the opening time timer has not timed out, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the winning number counter has reached 10 (step S482A). If the value of the winning number counter reaches 10, the process proceeds to step S497. When the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the value of the opening time timer is decremented by 1 (step S483A). If the value of the opening time timer is 0, that is, if the opening time timer times out (step S484), the accessory 20 is controlled to be closed (step S495). Specifically, the open / close motor 75 is rotated in a direction to close the open / close doors 76A and 76B. Further, the rotating body 86 is stopped at the initial position, and the movable portions 77A and 78A of the movable members 77 and 78 are stopped at the initial position (a position where the game ball is not blocked) (step S496).

  If the opening time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 executes the rotating body / movable part control (step S485). The rotating body / movable unit control is the same as the processing shown in FIG. However, here, the rotating body 86 is kept rotating at a constant speed until the second big prize opening is closed and the game ball is discharged from the accessory 20. For the movable parts 77A and 78A, the process of step S439 (see FIG. 201) is repeated every 0.9 seconds until the second big prize opening is closed.

  Further, when the bonus winning switch is turned on, that is, when a game ball won in the big prize opening (the bonus 20) is detected (step S486), the value of the in- bonus game ball counter is incremented by 1 (step S487), and the prize is won. The value of the number counter is incremented by 1 (step S488), and a control for transmitting a prize winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S489). Further, when the accessory discharge switch 85a is turned on, that is, when a game ball discharged from the big prize opening is detected (step S490), the value of the in-function game ball number counter is decremented by 1 (step S491). When the specific area switch 66a indicating that the game ball has won the specific winning opening 66 is turned on (step S492A), the V winning flag is set (step S493A), and the V winning designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. Is transmitted (step S494).

  In step S497, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the in-function game ball number counter is zero. If the value of the in-game game ball number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S486. If the value of the in-game game ball number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S499.

  In step S481B, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the open time timer has timed out. If the open time timer has timed out, the process proceeds to step S498. If the opening time timer has not timed out, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the winning counter is 10 (step S482B). When the value of the winning number counter becomes 10, the process proceeds to step S498. When the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the value of the opening time timer is decremented by 1 (step S483B). When the V winning switch 22 is turned on, the V winning flag is set (steps S492B and S493B). When the count switch 23 is turned on, that is, when a game ball won in the first grand prize opening is detected, the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (steps S486B and S488B).

  In step S498, the CPU 56 performs a process for ending the round. Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 21 is stopped and the open / close plate 16 is closed. Then, control is performed to transmit a display command after opening the special winning opening to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S499), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the post-closing process of the special winning opening (step S309). Update (step S500).

  FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening closing post-process (step S309). In the process after closing the big prize opening, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the number-of-opening counter (step S513). If the value of the opening number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S515 (step S514). When the value of the number-of-releases counter is 0, that is, when all rounds in the jackpot game have ended, the time-shortage flag is set and a predetermined value (20 in this example) is set in the time-shortage counter. Set (steps S519 and S520). Also, the big hit flag is reset (step S521), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S310) (step S522).

  In this embodiment, when the big hit game is over, the state becomes a short time state (a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened), but this state is the variation of the special symbol of the number indicated by the value set in the short time counter. Continue until is finished. In this embodiment, when the big hit game is finished, the state is always shifted to the short time state. However, for example, the short time state may be changed only when the first big hit game is finished.

  In step S515, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set. If the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S519 to end the big hit game. If the V winning flag is set, the V winning flag is reset (step S516), and the pre-round start time is notified to the pre-round start timer (for example, the effect display device 9 notifies the start of a new round). A value corresponding to (time) is set (step S517), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the big winning opening (step S307) (step S518).

  In this embodiment, on the condition that the V winning flag is set, that is, the game ball has won (V winning) in the specific winning opening 66 (one of the winning areas), and the first big The game will move to the next round on the condition that the game ball has won a prize in the special area (the area in which the game ball is detected by the V prize switch 22) (the V prize has been won). It does not have to be a condition. In that case, it is possible to always advance to the final round, or to advance to a predetermined round regardless of whether or not a V prize is won.

  FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the big hit ending process (step S310). In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S531). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S534. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S532). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S533), and the processing is ended.

  In step S534, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S535). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S536).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described.
FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). .

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and executes a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed. In addition, a random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a predetermined random number (for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol) is executed (step S706).

  Furthermore, a notification control process for performing notification using an effect device such as the effect display device 9 is executed (step S707). For example, when a first abnormal winning notification designation command (see FIG. 192) is received from the game control microcomputer 560, control for notifying an abnormal winning to the first big winning opening is performed. Further, for example, when a second abnormal winning notification designation command (see FIG. 192) is received from the game control microcomputer 560, control is performed to notify an abnormal winning to the second big winning opening. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  Further, in this embodiment, as in FIG. 45 shown in the first embodiment, a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 is 2 A ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six byte-structured effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 192) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  211 and 212 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 stores the display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S618). . Then, a display result designation command reception flag is set (step S619).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit type designation command (step S620A), the effect control CPU 101 stores the small hit type designation command in the small hit type designation command storage area formed in the RAM ( Step S620B).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S624). If the received effect control command is a small hit start specifying command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit start specifying command reception flag (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is a start winning designation command (step S627), the display state of the effect display device 9 is set so that the number of reserved memories displayed in the reserved memory number display area on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is increased by one. Control to change is performed (step S628). Further, if the received effect control command is a time reduction number designation command (step S629), control is performed to change the time reduction number displayed in the time reduction number display area on the display screen of the effect display device 9 (step S630).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632A). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols. Also, an initial notification flag is set (step S632B), and a value corresponding to the initial notification period value is set in the period timer (step S632C). The initial notification period is a period in which initialization notification is performed in response to reception of the initialization designation command. The effect control CPU 101 ends the initialization notification when the initial notification period elapses. The initial notification period is the same as the prohibition period set by the game control microcomputer 560 in step S45. Therefore, when the initialization notification is being performed, the abnormality notification designation command (the first abnormality notification designation command or the second abnormality notification designation command) is not received.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a small hit end specifying command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit end specifying command reception flag (step S644). If the received effect control command is an accessory prize designation command (step S649), an accessory prize designation command reception flag is set (step S650).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S653). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 213 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 213, the display screen includes a decorative symbol display area 9a, an effect area 9b, a reserved storage number display area 9c, and a short time count display area 9d. The decorative symbol display area 9a may be a fixed region, but for example, the position and size of the decorative symbol display area 9a may be changed as the decorative symbol changes. The effect area 9b is an area in which, for example, a character image is displayed while the decorative symbol is changing, but may be overlapped with another region (for example, the decorative symbol display area 9a). In addition, in the reserved memory number display area 9c, for example, a number corresponding to the number of reserved memories is displayed, and in the time reduction number display area 9d, for example, the number of times that the special symbol and the decorative design can be changed in the time reduction state (the remaining number of times) ) Is displayed as a numerical value.

  FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S808 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801).

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process (step S802).

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Decoration symbol variation stop process (step S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the ornament symbol is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Take control. If it is determined to be a big hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804). If it is not determined to be a big hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process after the end of change (step S805).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S807).

  Post-change end effect processing (step S805): After the decoration pattern change ends, an effect for informing the type of small hits is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit game processing (step S806).

  Small hit game processing (step S806): Control during the small hit game is performed. For example, in the effect display device 9, a display effect corresponding to the small hit game is performed. When the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). Otherwise, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S807).

  Big hit game processing (step S807): Control during big hit game is performed. For example, when a special winning opening opening designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9 is performed. When the big hit end designation command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end processing (step S808).

  Big hit end process (step S808): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  In this embodiment, the CPU 101 for effect control is an effect device (effect parts) such as the effect display device 9 according to the data set in the process table similar to that shown in FIG. 56 shown in the first embodiment. Control. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode (a mode for each predetermined time) constituting a variation mode during a variable display time (variation time) of variable display of decorative symbols. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the data etc. which show each production | generation aspect (production | production aspect for every predetermined time) which comprise the production | presentation after a fluctuation | variation etc. may be described. The process timer set value is set to a time during which an effect in the variation mode or the effect mode is performed. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, and executes control for displaying the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, or for performing the display effect. .

  Further, although the process table is stored in the ROM, a process table is prepared for each variation pattern corresponding to the variation time and for each type of effect after variation.

  FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 reads data indicating the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S840). Further, the display result of the decorative symbol (stop symbol) is determined according to the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command) (step S841). In step S841, if the received display result designation command indicates a jackpot symbol (in this example, the second byte of the display result designation command is “3” or “7”), the left, middle and right decorations are aligned. A combination of symbols (big hit symbol) is determined as a stop symbol. When the received display result designation command indicates a small hit symbol (in this example, the second byte of the display result designation command is other than “3” and “7”), a combination of decorative symbols “345” ( The small hit symbol) is determined as the stop symbol.

  When determining the jackpot symbol, the effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. Is used to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value that matches the extracted random number. Then, the display result designation command reception flag is reset (step S842).

  Further, the production control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step S843). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S844).

  Then, the production control CPU 101 sets the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1) on condition that the abnormality notification flag indicating that the abnormal winning notification is being performed is not set. In accordance with the sound number data 1), the control of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the various lamps (light emitting body) as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed (steps S 845 A and S 845 B). ). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. The abnormality notification flag is set based on the fact that the abnormality is being notified in the notification control process (step S707).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis, but the effect control CPU 101 controls the change pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  When the abnormality notification flag is set, the rendering device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 excluding the sound number data 1 (steps S845A and S845C). In other words, when the abnormality notification flag is set, when a new variable display of a decorative symbol is started, a sound effect corresponding to the variable display is not executed, but an abnormal winning notification is made. The corresponding sound output is continued.

  In addition, when performing the process of step S845C, the presentation control CPU 101 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data 1 to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. That is, control is performed so that the display at that time on the effect display device 9 (notification of abnormal winning is made) and the image of the display effect of variable display of decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed on the effect display device 9. . That is, when the abnormality notification flag is set, when a new variable display of a decorative symbol is started, not only a display effect corresponding to the variable display is executed, but an abnormal winning notification is made. The notification according to is continued.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S846), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S802). (Step S847).

  FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S851) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S852). When the process timer times out (step S853), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S854). Further, on the condition that the abnormality informing flag is not set, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S855A). , S855B).

  If the abnormality notification flag is set, control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (however, note number data i is excluded) (step S855A). , S855C). Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, the sound production according to the notification of the abnormal winning is continued, not the sound effect according to the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed.

  In addition, when the process of step S855C is performed, the presentation control CPU 101 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data i to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. . Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, not only the display effect according to the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, but also the notification according to the notification of the abnormal winning is continued.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S856), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S858). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S857), the process proceeds to step S858. Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control to stop variation.For example, a variation pattern command indicating a long variation time due to noise between substrates is received. Even in such a case, the variation of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol has ended).

  FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the confirmed command reception flag is set (step S861). If the confirmed command reception flag is set, the confirmed command reception flag is reset. (Step S862), and control for deriving and displaying the determined stop symbol is performed (Step S863). When the jackpot start designation command reception flag indicating that the jackpot start designation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560 is set (step S864), the effect control CPU 101 hits the effect display device 9 with a jackpot. The display (display for notifying that the big hit game is started) is performed (step S865), and the big hit display time timer for determining the display time of the big hit display or the small hit display is set (step S866), and the production control The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S867).

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 ends the variation (variable display) of the decorative symbols on the condition that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received (see steps S861 and S863). However, if the variation time timer based on the received variation pattern command times out, the variation of the decorative symbol may be controlled to end without receiving the symbol determination designation command. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 may not transmit the symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of variable display.

  When the jackpot start designation command reception flag is not set, the CPU 101 for effect control sets a value corresponding to the effect time (3 seconds or 6 seconds in this embodiment) in the effect time timer after the end of change. (Step S870). Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the type of small hitting notification, and displays a display screen for notifying the number of times the bonus is released in the effect after the change based on the extracted random number value or at the time of V winning It is determined whether to display a display screen for informing the number of rounds (step S870A). In this case, for example, the production control CPU 101 decides to display a display screen for informing the number of opening of an accessory at a rate of 50%, and displays a display screen for informing the number of rounds at the time of V winning at a rate of 50%. decide.

  When it is determined to display a display screen for informing the number of times the accessory is released, it is confirmed whether or not it is a small hit for the one-time release of the accessory (step S871A). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 stores the small hit type designation command storage area formed in the RAM in the command analysis process (see step S620B) according to the type of the small hit indicated in the small hit type designation command. Then, it is confirmed whether or not it is a small hit of one opening of the accessory. If it is a small hit to release the accessory 20 once, a process table corresponding to the post-fluctuation effect for notifying the small hit (opening the accessory once) is selected (step S872A), and the process proceeds to step S874. To do. In addition, when it is not a small hit that opens the accessory 20 once (that is, when it is a small hit that opens the accessory 20 twice), after the fluctuation for notifying the small hit (opening the accessory twice) A process table corresponding to the effect is selected (step S873A), and the process proceeds to step S874.

  If it is determined to display a display screen for notifying the number of rounds at the time of V winning, it is confirmed whether or not the number of rounds at the time of V winning is a small hit of 3 rounds or 7 rounds (step S871B). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 stores the small hit type designation command storage area formed in the RAM in the command analysis process (see step S620B) according to the type of the small hit indicated in the small hit type designation command. Then, it is confirmed whether the number of rounds at the time of winning V is a small hit of 3 rounds or 7 rounds. If the number of rounds at the time of winning V is a small hit of 3 rounds or 7 rounds, a process table corresponding to the post-change effect to notify the small hits (3 rounds or 7 rounds) is selected (step S872B). Then, the process proceeds to step S874. Further, when the number of rounds at the time of V winning is not the small hit of 3 rounds or 7 rounds (that is, when the number of rounds at the time of V winning is 11 small rounds), the small hit (11 rounds) is notified. Therefore, the process table corresponding to the post-change effect is selected (step S873B), and the process proceeds to step S874.

  In step S874, the effect control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 continuously displays the final image in the decorative symbol variation display (step S875). Specifically, as shown in the display example used in the variation pattern 7B shown in FIG. 181, for example, the effect control CPU 101 loses the enemy character in a battle and makes a big hit. Continue to display the display screen. In this embodiment, the main character as shown in FIG. 181 is determined to be the enemy based on the fact that the player performs a rotation operation from the rotation operation unit 812 during the execution of the post-change end effect processing. As shown in FIGS. 182 (A) to 182 (D), a display screen for notifying the type of the small hit is displayed from the display screen in a mode in which the character loses the battle and becomes a big hit.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process after the end of change (step S805) (step S876).

  In the jackpot display process (step S804), the effect control CPU 101 waits for the jackpot display time timer to time out in the jackpot display process, and when the jackpot display time timer times out, the effect control process flag value is processed in the jackpot game process ( Update to a value corresponding to step S807).

  FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the post-change end effect process (step S805) in the effect control process. In the effect process after the end of change, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S891) and subtracts 1 from the value of the effect time timer after the end of change (step S892). Next, the production control CPU 101 emits a blue light to the operation unit center lamp 82A to light up a character string such as “Turn!” On the pressing operation unit 811 (or a blinking display), thereby rotating the operation unit. Processing for performing a rotation operation guidance light emission operation for guiding the rotation operation of 812 is executed (step S892A). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 displays on the press operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 a message for prompting the rotation operation, and the effect display device 9 displays, for example, “turn the jog dial!”. By displaying a display screen including a character string, the player is prompted to rotate the rotation operation unit 812.

  Next, when the process timer times out (step S893), the effect control CPU 101 switches the process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S894). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a rotation operation detection flag indicating that the rotation operation from the rotation operation unit 812 has been performed is set (step S895A). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S895F. If set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the rotation operation from the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 has been detected (step S895B). If a rotation operation from rotation operation unit 812 is detected, a rotation operation detection flag is set, and the process proceeds to step S895D.

  Next, on the condition that the abnormality in-report flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect device based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next. Is changed (steps S895A and S895B). In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control has a small hit type (a role) in one of the display modes shown in FIGS. 182A to 182D according to the process table selected in steps S872A, S873A, S872B, and S873B. Whether the item is opened once or twice, and whether the number of rounds in the V prize is 3 rounds, 7 lands, or 11 rounds).

  When the abnormality notification flag is set, the rendering device is controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 excluding the sound number data 1 (steps S895A and S895C). That is, when the abnormality notification flag is set, the sound production according to the notification of the abnormal winning is continued, not the sound production according to the display of the production after the end of the variation.

  If the rotation operation from the rotation operation unit 812 cannot be detected in step S895B, the effect control CPU 101 continuously displays the final image in the decorative symbol variation display (step S896. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 As shown in the display example used in the variation pattern 7B shown in FIG. 181, for example, the display screen is continuously displayed in such a manner that the main character loses the enemy character in a battle and becomes a big hit.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to the value of the small hit game when the effect time timer times out after the end of the change (when the value becomes 0) and the jackpot start designation command is received. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the process (step S807) (steps S897, S898).

  As described above, when it is determined to notify the number of times the accessory is released on condition that the rotation operation from the rotation operation unit 812 is detected by executing the processes of steps S895A to S895F, the accessory 1 When it is opened twice, the display screen shown in FIG. 182 (A) is displayed, and when it is opened twice, the display screen shown in FIG. 182 (B) is displayed. When it is determined to notify the number of rounds at the time of V winning, the display screen shown in FIG. 182 (C) is displayed in the case of 3 rounds or 7 rounds, and in the case of 11 rounds, the display screen shown in FIG. ) Is displayed. Since the type of the small hit can be recognized by rotating the rotation operation unit 812, the interest in the game can be improved for the player.

  In this embodiment, the display screen shown in FIG. 182 (A) is always displayed when the accessory is opened once, and the display screen shown in FIG. 182 (B) is always displayed when the accessory is opened twice. 182 (A) and (B) so that both the display screens shown in FIGS. 182 (A) and (B) can be displayed even when the accessory is opened once or when the accessory is opened twice. The ratios at which the display screens shown in FIGS. 182 (A) and 182 (B) are displayed may be different between when the accessory is opened once and when the accessory is opened twice. For example, when the effect control CPU 101 is a small hit for a single-use accessory (see Y in step S871A), the determination table for determining a predetermined display screen and a random number are used, and FIG. Alternatively, the process table for displaying the display screen shown in FIG. 182B may be selected at a ratio of 7 to 3. In addition, when it is a small hit of one opening of an accessory (see N in step S871A), FIG. 182 (A) and FIG. 182 (B) are performed using a predetermined display screen determination table and random numbers. The process table for displaying the display screen shown in FIG. 3 may be selected at a ratio of 3 to 7.

  Further, in this embodiment, the display screen shown in FIG. 182 (C) is always displayed when the third or seventh round of the V prize is received, and the display shown in FIG. Although the case where the screen is displayed is shown, both of the display screens shown in FIGS. 182 (C) and 182 (D) are displayed even when the V winning is 3 rounds or 7 rounds or even when the V winning is 11 rounds. 182 so that the ratio of the display screens shown in FIGS. 182 (C) and 182 (D) is different between the 3rd or 7th round in the V winning and the 11th round in the V winning. May be. For example, the effect control CPU 101 uses the predetermined determination table for determining the display screen and a random number in the case of the small winning of 3 rounds or 7 rounds at the time of V winning (see Y of step S871B), FIG. The process table for displaying the display screen shown in (C) and FIG. 182 (D) may be selected at a ratio of 7 to 3. In addition, when it is a small hit of 11 rounds at the time of V winning (see N in step S871B), FIG. 182 (C) and FIG. 182 (D) are used by using a predetermined display screen determination table and random numbers. The process table for displaying the display screen shown in FIG. 3 may be selected at a ratio of 3 to 7.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case has been shown in which either the display screen for notifying the number of times the accessory is released or the display screen for notifying the number of rounds at the time of winning V is selected and displayed in the post-change end processing. The display screen may be displayed. In this case, for example, the effect control CPU 101 divides the display screen of the effect display device 9 into two vertically or horizontally in the effect processing after the end of variation shown in FIG. 219, and displays the image shown in FIG. 182 (A) or FIG. 182 (B). Any one of the display screens and the display screen of either FIG. 182 (C) or FIG. 182 (D) may be displayed simultaneously. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 101 superimposes either the display screen of FIG. 182 (A) or FIG. 182 (B) and the display screen of FIG. 182 (C) or FIG. 182 (D). May be displayed on the effect display device 9.

  Further, for example, the presentation control CPU 101 first displays the display screen of FIG. 182 (A) or FIG. 182 (B) based on the fact that the rotation operation is once performed from the rotation operation unit 812. Subsequently, the display screen of either FIG. 182 (C) or FIG. 182 (D) may be displayed, or the display screen of either FIG. 182 (C) or FIG. 182 (D) is displayed first. After that, the display screen of either FIG. 182 (A) or FIG. 182 (B) may be displayed. Further, for example, the presentation control CPU 101 first displays the display screen of FIG. 182 (A) or FIG. 182 (B) based on the fact that the rotation operation is once performed from the rotation operation unit 812. Further, the display screen of FIG. 182 (C) or FIG. 182 (D) may be displayed based on one rotation operation performed once again from the rotation operation unit 812. Conversely, the presentation control CPU 101 first displays either the display screen of FIG. 182 (C) or FIG. 182 (D) based on the fact that the rotation operation unit 812 has once performed the rotation operation. Further, the display screen of either FIG. 182 (A) or FIG. 182 (B) may be displayed on the basis that the rotation operation is once performed again from the rotation operation unit 812.

  Further, for example, the production control CPU 101 superimposes on the display screen shown in FIGS. 182 (A) to (D), and displays a character string indicating the type of small hits such as the number of times of opening of an accessory or the number of rounds in a V prize. You may make it display.

  Further, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may change the background color of the display on the effect display device 9 in the effect processing after the end of change. As an example, when a variation pattern command of variation patterns # 1 and # 4 (corresponding to 3 rounds) is received, the background color is blue and the variation pattern of variation patterns # 2 and # 5 (corresponding to 7 rounds) When a command is received, the background color is yellow, and when a variation pattern command of variation patterns # 3 and # 6 (corresponding to 11 rounds) is received, the background color is red. With such control, the player can be notified of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state. Further, in this case, the production control microcomputer 100 lights up a character string such as “Turn !!” in the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 (may be blinking), and prompts the rotation operation unit 812 to perform a rotation operation. Display may be performed, and the background color may be changed to blue, yellow, or red based on the rotation operation from the rotation operation unit 812.

  In the small hit game processing, when the small hit end designation command reception flag indicating that the small hit end designation command has been received from the gaming control microcomputer 560 is set, the presentation control microcomputer 100 performs the presentation control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S8008). When the jackpot start designation command reception flag indicating that the jackpot start designation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560 is set, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S808). Update to Note that the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a small-hit end designation command when a V-winning does not occur in the small-hit game, and transmits a big-hit start designation command when a V-winning occurs (see FIG. 203).

  In the jackpot end process, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays a display for notifying the end of the jackpot on the effect display device 9, and then changes the value of the effect control process flag to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). Update to the value corresponding to.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since initialization notification is given priority over abnormality notification (such as notification of abnormal winning), it is possible to prevent a situation in which initialization notification is difficult to recognize. Is done. That is, the initialization notification is performed prominently.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 ends the initialization notification when a predetermined period has elapsed (see steps S901 to S905), but ends the initialization notification at another timing. Also good. For example, the initialization notification is ended when the decorative symbol variable display is started for the first time after the initialization notification is started, or the abnormal winning notification designation command is received before the decorative symbol variable display is started. Sometimes the initialization notification may be terminated. Alternatively, the initialization notification may be terminated when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received or when the first effect control command other than the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received after the initialization notification is started. That is, it is preferable that the initialization notification is continued for a period sufficient for a game clerk or the like to recognize the initialization notification.

  Next, a modification of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 220 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the relationship between the stop symbol of the special symbol and the winning type in the gaming machine. FIG. 221 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of each random number used by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 221, the random 6: small hit type determining random number of (6) is added to the random number shown in FIG. FIG. 222 shows the relationship between the stop symbol of the special symbol and the judgment value (FIG. 222 (A)), and the type of small hit (specifically, the number of times the accessory 20 is released in the small hit gaming state, that is, in the starting operation state). It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of a relationship with a determination value (FIG. 222 (B)). However, as in FIG. 189, FIG. 222 shows the number of determination values, not specific determination values.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a big hit (first big hit) in the big hit determination process (see step S62 in FIG. 195) or the second big hit game executed after the small hit game ends. If the first big hit is not determined, the type of the small hit game (specifically, the number of releases of the accessory 20 in the small hit game state, that is, in the starting operation state) is determined. Is determined by a lottery using a random number for determining the type of small hits.

  The game control microcomputer 560 extracts the count value of the counter for generating the small hit type determining random number and uses the extracted value as the small hit type determining random value. The number of times of opening (see FIG. 222 (B)) corresponding to the determination value that matches is determined.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 220 to 222, as the big hit (first big hit), in addition to the normal big hit and the probability varying big hit, there is a sudden probability varying big hit. Suddenly promising big hit is the number of times the opening of the big prize opening and the opening time are shorter than in the case of the normal big hit and the probable big hit (for example, 0.5 seconds is opened twice), and the game state after the big hit game is Controlled to a high probability state (probability variation state). Therefore, the player feels as if the gaming state suddenly becomes a high probability state. Other processes are the same as those shown in FIGS. 183, 188, and 189.

  In this embodiment, characteristic configurations of gaming machines as shown in the following (1) to (4) are shown.

  (1) The gaming machine according to the third embodiment can play a predetermined game using a game ball, and a predetermined variable display execution condition (for example, in the third embodiment) After the game ball is won at the first start winning opening 11, the second starting winning opening 12 or the third starting winning opening 13, the variable display start condition (for example, the variable symbol variable display is executed) A variable display device (for example, in the third embodiment) that starts variable display of identification information based on the establishment of a big hit game and is not executed and derives and displays a display result Special symbol display 8 and effect display device 9), variable winning ball apparatus (for example, a third winning ball control apparatus) that can be controlled to either an open state in which game balls can be won or a closed state in which game balls cannot be won. Yes in the embodiment When a game ball wins a special area (for example, the specific winning port 66 in the third embodiment) among the winning areas provided in the variable winning ball apparatus. A game machine that shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, the second big hit gaming state in the third embodiment) in which the variable winning ball apparatus is controlled to be opened a predetermined number of times, and controls the progress of the game Means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560 including the CPU 56 in the third embodiment), and the game control means determines the display result of the variable display device (for example, the third embodiment). The part which performs the process of step S62 in the microcomputer 560 for game control in a form (refer also FIG. 189), and a display result (for example, a small hit figure on a variable display device) ) Is displayed, the starting operation control means (for example, the game in the third embodiment) that controls the starting operation state in which the variable winning ball apparatus is opened once or a plurality of times (for example, twice). A portion of the control microcomputer 560 that executes the processing of steps S411 and S413) and a rotation operation means that can be rotated by the player (for example, the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 in the third embodiment). It is characterized by having. According to such a configuration, the playability can be improved using the rotation operation means.

  (2) In the gaming machine, there are a plurality of types of open display results determined by the display result determining means (for example, stop symbols 0 to 2 of special symbols corresponding to small hits 1 to 8 in the third embodiment) 4 to 6, 8, 9 (refer to FIGS. 183 and 189), and on the condition that the rotation operation by the rotation operation means has been performed, based on which type of open display result is displayed on the variable display device. Open display result type notification means for notifying whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus is controlled in the starting operation state (for example, the fact that Y is determined in step S895A or S895B in the production control microcomputer 100 in the third embodiment) It may be configured to include a part for executing steps S895E and S895F as a condition. According to such a configuration, the player can recognize the type of the open display result based on the rotation operation by the rotation operation means, and the game performance can be further improved.

  (3) In the gaming machine, a specific area (for example, the specific winning port 66 in the third embodiment) is provided in the variable winning ball apparatus, and a specific game that is advantageous to the player when a game ball wins in the specific area A gaming machine that shifts to a state (for example, the second big hit game state in the third embodiment), and the game ball that has entered the variable winning ball apparatus is placed in an advantageous route or a specific region that is easily guided to the specific region A movable member (for example, the movable members 77 and 78 in the third embodiment) that distributes to one of the disadvantageous routes that are difficult to guide is provided, and any kind of open display result is displayed on the variable display device. Based on whether or not the variable winning ball apparatus is controlled to the starting operation state, the movable timing of the movable member with respect to the opening timing of the variable winning ball apparatus is changed (for example, the third embodiment) In the game control microcomputer 560, when executing step S439, the accessory 20 is controlled to be in the open state based on the fact that the small hit is 1, the small hit is 3, the small hit is 5 or the small hit is 7. In this case, as shown in FIG. 202 (A), the movable portion 77A is operated for 0.4 seconds, the drive is stopped for 0.2 seconds, the movable portion 77A is operated again, and the movable portion 78A is operated for 0.1 seconds. Operate and stop the drive for 0.7 seconds, then move the movable part 78A again, and the accessory 20 is controlled to be open based on the fact that the small hit is 2, the small hit is 4, the small hit is 6 or the small hit is 8. 202B, as shown in FIG. 202 (B), the movable portion 77A is operated for 0.1 second, the drive is stopped for 0.7 seconds, and then the movable portion 77A is operated again. Operate for 4 seconds, 0.2 seconds It may be configured to control to) as to operate the movable unit 78A again after stopping the driving. According to such a configuration, the movable timing of the movable member varies depending on the type of the open display result, so that the gameability can be further improved.

  (4) The gaming machine includes gaming state control means (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 560 in the third embodiment) that shifts the gaming state to the specific gaming state based on the winning of the game ball in the specific area. The game state control means is configured to determine which type of open display result is displayed on the variable display device and whether the game ball has won a specific area when the variable winning ball device is controlled to the start operation state. (For example, in the third embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 changes according to the stop symbol of the special symbol as shown in FIGS. 183 and 189 in the third embodiment. , It may be configured to shift to a second big hit gaming state with a different number of rounds). According to such a configuration, the aspect of the specific gaming state can be made different according to the type of the open display result, so that the gameability can be further improved.

  The present invention is applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine configured so that a player can play a predetermined game using a game medium.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 9 Production display device 100 Production control microcomputer 560 Game control microcomputer 611-619,622,623 Serial-parallel conversion IC
620,621 Input IC
81 operation unit 81a to 81d first pressure detector to fourth pressure detector 81e first rotation detector 81f second rotation detector 82A operation unit central lamp (multi-color LED)
82a-82h 1st press operation part lamp-8th press operation part lamp 82i-82l 1st rotation operation part lamp-4th rotation operation part lamp 811 Press operation part 811A Display member 812 Rotation operation part

Claims (1)

Identification on the basis of the first variable display means gaming media or second start region derives displays the variable display was carried out display results of identification information based on the first start-up region game media passes has passed A gaming machine that performs a variable display of information and shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the second variable display means for deriving and displaying the display result,
Operation means operable by the player;
A variable winning device that can change to an open state in the specific gaming state;
Extraction means for extracting numerical data when a game medium passes through the first start area or the second start area;
For the variable display of the identification information that has not yet started even though the game medium has passed through the first starting area, the numerical data extracted by the extracting means is stored as reserved storage up to a predetermined upper limit number. 1 hold storage means;
For the variable display of the identification information that has not yet started even though the game medium has passed through the second starting area, the numerical data extracted by the extracting means is stored as a reserved storage up to a predetermined upper limit number. 2 holding storage means;
Pre-determining means for determining whether the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed as to whether or not the specific gaming state is set;
Variable display executing means for performing control to execute variable display of identification information in the first variable display means or the second variable display means based on the determination result of the prior determination means;
An operation effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute an operation effect accompanied by an operation by the operation means;
An operation effect executing means for executing the operation effect based on a determination result by the operation effect determining means;
Initialization means for executing initialization processing when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Initialization notification means for executing initialization notification indicating that the initialization process has been executed by the initialization means;
A plurality of types of error notifications indicating the occurrence of errors relating to the gaming machine can be executed, and the error notification is based on determining that a game medium has entered the variable winning device in a gaming state other than the specific gaming state. An abnormality notification means for performing abnormality notification,
The operation effect determination means has different determination ratios when the variable display of the identification information in the first variable display means is executed and when the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display means is executed. Decide whether to execute the operation effect,
The initialization notification means executes the initialization notification in preference to the abnormality notification,
The abnormality notification unit, the Ri initialization executable der the abnormality notification after execution is complete notification, when executing the plurality of types of error notification, a corresponding plurality of types of error notification simultaneously displayable A gaming machine characterized by that.